Home

&Scaron;KODA Superb Owner`s Manual

1. Airbag system 16 Air conditioning system 110 Air outlets 110 Climatronic 115 Manual air conditioning system 112 Air outlets 110 Air recirculation Climatronic 17 Alarm Switching off 55 Triggering 55 Anti theft alarm system Activating deactivating 56 Trailer 172 Anti theft wheel bolts 208 Antilock brake system ABS 155 Armrest Front 87 rear 96 Rear 87 Ashtray 91 ASR Operation 155 warning light 37 Assist systems 154 ABS 38 155 ASR 37 155 Cruise Control System 161 DSR 155 EDL 155 ESC 37 154 HBA 155 HHC 156 Park assist 157 Parking aid 156 START STOP 162 Audio see radio navigation system 4 23 Automatic driving lamp control 70 Automatic gearbox Selector lever emergency unlocking 217 Starting off and driving 147 Tiptronic 146 Using the selector lever 145 Automatic gearbox modes 145 Automatic load deactivation 197 Automatic retractable cargo cover Superb Combi 101 Automatic transmission 145 Kickdown 147 Malfunction 148 Selector lever lock 146 AUX Installation in the storage compartment _ 92 Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventila tion 118 Adjust 119 Radio remote control 120 Switching on off 119 Avoiding damage to the vehicle Driving through water 152 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 152 B Ball head Check fitting 168 Fitting 168 Ready position 167 Removing
2. A Read and observe H and M on page 138 first Petrol engines Fig 134 1 Ignition switched off engine off the steering can be locked 2 Ignition switched on 3 Starting engine Diesel engines Fig 134 1 Fuel supply interrupted ignition switched off engine switched off the steering can be locked 2 Heating glow plugs on ignition switched on 3 Starting engine To lock the steering with the ignition key withdrawn turn the steering wheel until the steering locking pin engages audibly If the steering is locked and the key cannot be turned or can only be turned with difficulty to position 2 Fig 134 move the steering wheel back and forth and the steering lock will unlock II Note We recommend locking the steering wheel whenever leaving the vehicle This acts as a deterrent against the attempted theft of your car Starting the engine N Read and observe H and H on page 138 first Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system The glow plug warning light oo illuminates after the ignition has been switched on Start the engine once the ov warning light has gone out You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily Procedure for starting the engine gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Move the gearshift lever into neutral or move the selector lever into position PorN gt Switch on
3. Ql Read and observe H on page 89 first Opening gt Press the button A Fig 90 The compartment folds in the direction of the arrow Closing gt Swivel the lid of the glasses storage box against the direction of the ar row Fig 90 until it audibly clicks into place U WARNING The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the spectacles and otherwise must be kept closed risk of injury CAUTION Do not put any heat sensitive objects in the glasses storage box they could get damaged The compartment must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle risk of impairment to the functions of the anti theft alarm system Seats and practical features 93 Storage compartment on passenger side Fig 91 Open tray control air supply N Read and observe H on page 89 first A pen holder is provided in the stowage compartment Opening gt Press the button Fig 91 A The flap folds down Closing gt Lift the lid upwards until it clicks into place Air supply gt Open the air supply by pulling the lever in the direction of the arrow Fig 91 lt B gt The air supply is closed by pressing the lever in the opposite direction to that of the arrow Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows cooled air to flow into the storage compartment Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or in te
4. 34 Operation Anti lock brake system ABS 38 d Rear fog light 38 Lamp failure 38 Adaptive headlights AHL 38 Exhaust inspection system 38 ov Glow plug system diesel engine 38 EPC Engine performance check petrol engine 39 Diesel particulate filter diesel engine 39 M Fuel reserve 39 r Airbag system 40 U Tyre inflation pressure 40 amp Windscreen washer fluid level 40 Brake linings 41 amp Turn signal system 41 z0 Low beam 4 0 Fog lights 41 Cruise control system 41 Selector lever lock starter system KESSY 41 D Main beam 4 The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in the display of the instrument cluster After switching on the ignition some warning lights light up briefly as a func tion test If the tested systems are OK the corresponding warning lights go out a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after starting the engine E WARNING a Ignoring illuminated warning lights and related messages or instructions in the instrument cluster display may lead to serious personal injury or damage to the vehicle f you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 72 The warning triangle must be set up at t
5. AN Read and observe H on page 12 first The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible to adjust the routing of the front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size gt Press the height adjuster and move up or down in the desired direc tion Fig 7 gt Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has correctly locked in place CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Inertia reels 15 Belt tensioners 15 Inertia reels Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel When pulling slowly on the seat belt the belt can move freely When pulling sharply on the seat belt the movement is locked by the inertia reel The belts also lock when full braking when the car accelerates when driving downhill and when cornering U WARNING If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it have it inspected immediately by a specialist garage Belt tensioners The safety for the driver front passenger and passengers on the outer rear seats who are wearing their seat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fit ted to the inertia reels on the front and rear external seat belts The three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal collision of a certain severity The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened The seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a collis
6. 1511 1529 1497 1511 1496 Clearance 139 159 124 1419 140 125 141 1599 127 140 141 126 Wheel base Track gauge front rear a Applies to vehicles with a rough road package b Applies to vehicles with a sport chassis Applies to vehicles with a 3 6 1 191 kW FSI engine 230 Technical data 2761 1545 1518 1537 1510 2761 1545 1518 2761 1545 1517 1537 1510 2761 1545 1517 Vehicle specific information depending on engine type The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational and technical data for motor vehicles 1 4 1 92 kW TSI Motor Output kW at rpm 92 5000 Maximum torque Nm at rpm 200 1500 4000 Number of cylinders displacement cm 4 1390 Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb Combi MG6 Top speed km h 204 203 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 5 10 6 Operating weight kg depending on equipment configuration 1467 1615 1489 1647 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1400 1500 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Slopes up to 12 b Slopes up to 8 1 8 1 112 kW TSI Motor Output kW at rpm 112 4300 6200 730 Maximum torque Nm at rpm 250 1500 4200 740 Number of cylinders displacement cm 4 1798 Performance an
7. 22 9 trip km 1255 Oar 22 2 trip km 1255 10 2 1 With vehicles that have an automatic gearbox and in the manual switching mode Tiptronic the current ly engaged gear is shown 2 For vehicles with segment display the arrow is displayed behind the gear indication N Read and observe H on page 42 first The function of the gear recommendation is to help reduce fuel consumption A suitable gear is engaged if necessary a recommendation to shift to high or lower gear is displayed Display Fig 28 gt Optimal gear engaged B Recommended gear Recommended gear The gear recommendation is intended only for vehicles with a manual trans mission or for vehicles with an automatic transmission in manual shift mode Tiptronic The recommended gear and the arrow icon is displayed gt Tf Recommends that you shift to a higher gear gt J Recommends that you shift to a lower gear If for example f4 is shown in the display with vehicles that have manual gear boxes this indicates that it is better to shift from a lower gear to the 4th gear If for example f4 is shown in the display with vehicles that have automatic gearboxes and are in the manual switching mode Tiptronic this indicates that it is better to shift from the 4th gear to a higher gear H WARNING The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different driving situations such as overtaking For
8. First clean the chrome parts with a damp cloth and then polish them with a soft dry cloth If this method does not completely clean chrome parts use a specific chrome care product EE CAUTION Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment risk of surface scratches Decorative films A Read and observe H and H on page 177 first Wash the films with a mild soap solution and clean warm water Never use harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents as this could damage the films The following instructions must be followed when washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner gt The minimum distance between the nozzle and the vehicle body should be 50 cm gt Keep jet perpendicular to the film surface gt The maximum water temperature is 50 C gt The maximum water pressure is 80 bar EE CAUTION In the winter months do not use an ice scraper to remove ice and snow from the areas with films Do not use any other objects to remove frozen layers of snow or ice risk of film damage Windows and exterior mirrors A Read and observe H and H on page 177 first Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mir rors Regularly clean windows from the inside with clean water Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this purpose When drying the windows after washing the vehicle do not use window leath ers that have been used to polish the
9. gt Three point seat belts for all the seats gt Belt force limiter for front and outer rear seats gt Belt tensioner for front and outer rear seats gt Seat belt height adjusters for the front seats gt Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger gt Driver s knee airbag gt Front side airbags gt Rear side airbags gt Head airbags gt Anchoring points for child seats using the ISOFIX system gt Anchoring points for child seats using the TOP TETHER system gt Head restraints adjustable for height gt Adjustable steering column The specified safety equipment works together in order to optimally protect you and those travelling with you in accident situations The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you if you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used If the seat belt is not fastened properly this may result in injuries if an airbag is activated in the event of an accident CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Correct seated position for the driver 9 Adjusting the steering wheel position 10 Correct seated position for the front passenger 10 Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats 11 Examples of incorrect seated positions 1 E WARNING a The front seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match the body size
10. wireless connection of electronic devices for data transfer WLAN wireless Abbreviations 7 Safety CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Before setting off 8 Driving safety 8 Safety equipment 8 In this section you will find important information tips and notes on the sub ject of passive safety in your vehicle We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with for ex ample regarding seat belts airbags child seats and safety of children E WARNING a This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for the driver and his occupants a You can find further information on safety concerning you and those trav elling with you in the following chapters of this owner s manual The complete on board literature should always be in the vehicle This applies in particular if you rent out or sell the vehicle Before setting off A Read and observe H on page 8 first For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you please pay attention to the following points before setting off J Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning proper ly J Ensure that the function of the wiper and the condition of the wiper blades are free of any defects J Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside v Adjust the rear view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed JV Ensu
11. Fig 3 Driver wearing seat belt This chapter contains information on the following subjects The physical principle of a frontal collision 13 Fastening and unfastening seat belts 14 Belt height adjustment on the front seats 15 Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an accident They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival in the event of a major accident Correctly fastened seat belts hold occupants of the car in the correct seated position Fig 3 The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy energy of motion to a considerable extent They also prevent uncontrolled movements which in turn may well re sult in severe injuries Occupants of a vehicle who have correctly fastened their seat belts have the major benefit of the fact that the kinetic energy is absorbed as effectively as possible by the belts The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety meas ures such as the airbag system also contribute to the kinetic energy being re duced as effectively as possible The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the vehicle page 22 12 Safety E WARNING a Fasten your seat belt before each journey even when driving in town This also applies to the passengers seated at the rear risk of injury Expectant women must also a
12. New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until the hands free system has completed the search gt Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found gt Confirm the PIN gt If the hands free system announces as standard SKODA_BT on the display of the mobile phone enter the PIN within 30 seconds and wait until the connection is established gt To finish pairing confirm the creation of the new user profile in the MAXI DOT display If there is no free space available to create a new user profile delete an exist ing user profile During the connecting procedure no other mobile phone may be connected with the hands free system Up to four mobile phones can be paired with the hands free system whereby only one mobile phone can communicate with the hands free system The visibility of the hands free system is automatically switched off 3 minutes after the ignition is switched on and is also deactivated when the mobile phone has connected to the hands free system Restoring the visibility of the hands free system If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands free system within 3 minutes of switching on the ignition the visibility of the hands free system can be re established for 3 minutes in the following ways gt By turning the ignition off and on gt By turning voice control off and on gt In the Bluetooth Visibility menu in the MAXI DOT display Creating a conn
13. Storage compartment on the driver s side Fig 80 Open the storage compartment on the driver s side N Read and observe H on page 89 first Opening gt Raise the handle A Fig 80 and open out the compartment in the direction of the arrow Closing gt Swivel the lid against the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place E WARNING The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety reasons Seats and practical features 89 Storage compartments in the doors H WARNING The storage compartment must never be used as an ashtray or for the stor age of combustible materials fire hazard and risk of damage to the stor age compartment EF Note The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light which illuminates when the parking light is on Cup holders Fig 83 Front centre console Cup holder Fig 81 Storage compartment in the front door in the rear door A Read and observe H on page 89 first I WARNING Use the storage compartment only for storing objects which do not project _ so that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not impaired Storage compartment in the front centre console Fig 82 Opening the storage compart ment AT gt N B3T 0647 CO Read and observe I on page 89 first Fig 84 Rear armrest Remove cup holder insert cup holder Open close N Read and observe H on page 89 first Press on the edge of the roof A Fig 82
14. Vehicle data sticker The vehicle data sticker Fig 212 A is located on the base of the luggage compartment and is also fixed into the service schedule The vehicle data sticker contains the following data 1 Vehicle identification number VIN 2 Vehicle type 3 Gearbox code paint number interior equipment engine output engine code 4 Partial vehicle description Type plate The type plate Fig 212 B is located at the bottom of the B pillar on the right driver s side The type plate contains the following data 5 Vehicle identification number VIN 6 Maximum permissible gross weight Maximum permissible towed weight towing vehicle and trailer Maximum permissible front axle load 9 Maximum permissible rear axle load Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number VIN vehicle body number is stamped on the right hand suspension strut dome in the engine compartment This num ber is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen together with a VIN bar code and on the type plate Engine number The engine number three digit code letter and serial number is stamped onto the engine block Supplementary Information applies to Russia The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the registration documents HE WARNING Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights risk of acci dent and damage Op
15. 112 to the left by around 90 gt Fold up and remove the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the ar row gt Unlock the carrier rails B by turning the arbour mounted fixing eyes C to the right by approx 90 E WARNING Ensure that the carrier rails and variable loading floor are correctly fastened when installing the variable loading floor If this is not the case there is a risk of injury for the occupants CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Partial extension of variable load floor 105 Divide boot 105 Fit and remove variable loading floor 106 Fixing set 106 Movable lashing eyes 107 The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier TE CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg F Note The space below the variable loading floor can be used for stowing objects for example the fastening elements removed foldable boot cover etc Partial extension of variable load floor k S A See B3T 0660 Fig 113 Luggage compartment partially pulling out the variable loading floor I Read and observe M on page 105 first The variable loading floor can be partially pulled out over the rear bumper gt Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle and lift gently in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 113 gt Extend the variable load floor over the bumper in the dir
16. 210 Do it yourself Sealing and inflating the tyre AN Read and observe H on page 209 first Sealing gt Shake the tyre inflator bottle 10 Fig 183 on page 209 vigorously several times gt Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflator bottle 10 in a clock wise direction The film on the cap is pierced automatically gt Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully onto the tyre valve gt Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre gt Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve gt Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover 1 Inflating gt Screw the air compressor tyre inflation hose 5 Fig 183 on page 209 firmly onto the tyre valve gt Check that the air release valve 7 is closed gt Start the engine and run it in idle gt Plug the connector 9 into 12 Volt socket page 91 Cigarette lighter gt Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 8 gt Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is achieved Maximum run time of 8 minutes M gt Switch off the air compressor gt If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar unscrew the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve gt Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent to distribute in t
17. 5 Control unit for headlight beam adjustment and headlight swivel Alarm spare lis control unit for parking aid control unit for park assist front and rear lighter 5 Instrument cluster control unit for electromechanical power steer Headlight cleaning system ing selector lever lock power supply for data bus Heated front seats 7 Heated opening of the crankcase ventilation air flow meter Heated rear seats 8 Control unit for trailer detection Rear window wiper 9 Relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation Fan air conditioning system relay for auxiliary heating and ventila 10 Adaptive left main headlight tion 11 Adaptive right main headlight Not assigned 12 Not assigned Light switch 13 Diagnostic socket light switch rain sensor clock Control unit for trailer detection 14 Central locking system and bonnet lid Control unit for trailer detection 15 Central control unit interior lights Control unit for trailer detection 16 The air conditioning system Switch for seat heating 17 Not assigned Telephone preinstallation 18 Telephone Preparation for the aftermarket radio i Instrument cluster operating lever under the steering wheel relay Only for START STOP Central control unit DC DC converter the en coil for heated windscreen gine control unit 20 KESSY 21 KESSY ELV 22 Air blower for Climatronic 23 Front power window central locking of the front doors 24 Selector lever lock 25 Rear window heater relay for auxiliary heating and vent
18. In vehicles with manual transmission do not drive at unnecessarily low engine speeds Shift down a gear when the engine is no longer running smoothly Ob serve the recommended gear page 43 Gear recommendation CAUTION The engine is not protected from excessive engine revs caused by shifting down at the wrong time This can result in a sudden increase in revs beyond the permissible maximum rpm and hence engine damage Never rev up a cold engine when the vehicle is stationary or when driving in individual gears For the sake of the environment Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds Shifting up sooner helps save fuel reduces engine noise and protects the environment New tyres New tyres must firstly be run in since they do not offer optimal grip at first Therefore drive especially carefully for the first 500 km or so New brake pads New brake pads do not initially provide optimal braking performance They first need to be run in Therefore drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or SO CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Looking ahead 149 Economical gear changing 149 Avoiding full throttle 150 Reducing idling 150 Avoiding short distances 150 Checking tyre pressure 150 Avoiding unnecessary ballast 151 Regular maintenance 151 Saving electrical energy 151 Environmental compatibility 151 The technical re
19. Roof rack system Roof load 109 Running in Brake pads 149 Engine 148 The first 1 500 km 148 Tyres 149 S SAFE see Safe securing 54 SAFELOCK see Safe securing 54 Safe securing 54 Safety 8 Child safety 22 Child safety seats 22 Correct seated position 9 Head restraints 83 ISOFIX 25 TOP TETHER 27 Saving electrical energy 149 Screens see Sun screen in the rear doors 76 Seals Taking care of your vehicle 178 Seat belt warning light 35 Seat belts 12 Belt tensioners 15 Cleaning 183 fastening and unfastening 14 Height adjustment 15 Inertia reels 15 The physical principle of a frontal collision 13 Seat features 85 Seats Convenience features of passenger seat _ 87 Electric adjustment 82 Front armrest 87 Head restraints 83 Heating 85 Manually adjusting 82 Rear armrest 87 Save 84 Seat backrests 87 Storing in memory of remote control key ___ 84 Ventilated front seats 86 Seats and practical features 81 Adjusting the seats 81 see Automatic gearbox Manual gear shifting on the multifunction steering wheel 146 Selector lever Refer to Selector lever 145 Selector lever lock starter system KESSY Warning light 41 Service 174 Service interval display 48 Setting 32 Setting the 32 Shelves 88 Shifting gears Driving and saving energy 149 Side airbag 19 Side
20. may have been approved by a nationally recognised approval authority All accessory products go through a fastidious process of technical develop ment technical tests and quality inspection Customer tests and only if all tests are positive does the product become a SKODA Genuine Accessory Our SKODA Genuine Accessories service also provides expert advice and pro fessional fitting if requested by the customer SKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects in SKODA Genuine Parts for a period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with materials de fect liability legislation unless otherwise agreed in the purchase contract or in any other agreements You should keep the confirmed warranty certificate and the receipt for these accessories for this period so that the commencement of the warranty term may be verified In addition SKODA Service Partners also stock a range of suitable car care products as well as those parts which are subject to natural wear and tear such as tyres batteries bulbs and wiper blades Note The accessories authorized by KODA AUTO a s will be offered by the KODA Partners in all countries where KODA AUTO a s has a sales and service net work This will usually be in the form of a printed catalogue of Original SKODA Accessories in the form of separate printed brochures or in the form of offers for SKODA Genuine Accessories on the SKODA Partner s website Spoiler A Read and ob
21. on Alcantara seat upholstery Avoid leaving the vehicle in bright sunlight for long periods of time in order to stop the fabric from bleaching If the vehicle is parked outside for long peri ods of time cover the fabric to protect it from direct sunlight Some clothing materials e g dark denim do not have sufficient colour fast ness This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers even when used correctly This applies particularly to light coloured seat cov ers This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover but rather to poor colour fastness of the clothing textiles Seat covers A Read and observe H and on page 181 first Electrically heated seats Do not clean the covers by moistening as this can damage the seat heating system Use a specific cleaning agent such as dry foam or similar to clean the covers Seats without seat heating Thoroughly vacuum the seat covers with a vacuum cleaner before cleaning Clean the seat covers with a damp cloth or cleaning products specially de signed for this purpose Indented points arising on the fabrics by everyday use can be removed by brushing against the direction of hair with a damp brush Always clean all parts of the covers so that there are no visible edges Then allow the seat to dry completely CAUTION Regularly remove dust from the seat covers using a vacuum cleaner Electrically heated seats must not be dried after cleaning
22. page 211 Jump starting FE CAUTION Avoid high engine revolutions full throttle and high engine loads before the engine has reached its operating temperature risk of damaging the engine Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to run at an idling speed for about 1 minute This prevents any possible accumula tion of heat when the engine is switched off For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary If possible start your journey as soon as the engine has started Through this the engine rea ches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are AE Note After switching off the ignition the radiator fan can intermittently continue to operate for approx 10 minutes Electronic immobilizer N Read and observe H and H on page 138 first An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key The immobiliser is deac tivated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition key is withdrawn from the lock The engine will not start if a non authorized ignition key is used The following message is shown in the instrument cluster display Immobilizer active 8 IMMOBILIZER Ignition Switch Fig 134 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock
23. risk of fire Storage compartment in the rear armrest Fig 96 Opening the storage compart ment f N Read and observe H on page 89 first Opening gt Lift button A on the front of the armrest and lift the storage compartment cover in the direction of the arrow Fig 96 Closing gt Fold back the storage compartment lid in the opposite direction to that of the arrow Fig 96 until it clicks Rear seat backrest with long cargo channel Fig 97 Rear seats Cover handle boot Unlock button 96 Operation N Read and observe H on page 89 first After folding the rear armrest and cover up an opening in the seat backrest becomes visible through which the removable through loading bag with skis can be pushed The armrest and cover can be folded forward from the passen ger compartment or the boot Opening from the passenger compartment gt Fold down the rear armrest Fig 76 on page 87 gt Pull the handle A pull up to the stop in the direction of the arrow and fold the cover down Fig 97 Opening from the boot gt Push the unlock button B Fig 97 in the direction of the arrow and fold the cover including the armrest forwards Closing gt Fold the cover and rear armrest upwards to the stop the cover must click into place Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing This is appa rent as the red field above the unlocking button B Fig 97 is not visible from the boo
24. 152 MAXI DOT display Engine is au tomatically switched off auto matic engine cut off is not possi ble 22 9 22 0 trip trip km km 1255 10 2 1255 Dera Q Read and observe H on page 162 first For system dependent automatic engine shutdown to work the following conditions must be met The driver s door is closed The driver has fastened the seat belt The bonnet is closed The driving speed exceeded 4 km h after the last stop v No trailer is coupled S SSS Some additional conditions for the system to function correctly cannot be in fluenced or recognised by the driver Therefore the system can react differ ently in situations which are identical from the driver s perspective If after stopping the car the message UNABLE TO START STOP appears in the segment display or in the MAXI DOT display the check mark Fig 152 then the conditions for automatic engine shutdown are not met Running the engine is essential for the following reasons for example gt The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet been reached gt The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low gt The current consumption is too high gt High air conditioning capacity high fan speed big difference between the desired and actual interior temperature Note a f the vehicle remains outdoors for a long time in minus temperatures or in direct sunlight it can take several hours until the interna
25. 91 H 205 50 R17 93 H 1 6 1 77 kW TDI CR 225 45 R17 91 H 225 40 R18 92 Y 205 55 R16 91 Va 205 55 R16 91 W 2 0 1 147 kW TSI 205 50 R17 93 W 225 45 R17 91 W 225 40 R18 92 Y 202 General Maintenance Motorisation 1 8 1 112 kW TSI 205 55 R16 Minimal Load index Minimal Speed icon 205 50 R17 225 45 R17 225 40 R18 1 8 1 118 kW TSI 205 55 R16 205 50 R17 225 45 R17 225 40 R18 3 6 1 191 kW FSI 205 50 R17 225 45 R17 225 40 R18 2 0 1 103 kW TDI CR 205 55 R16 205 50 R17 225 45 R17 225 40 R18 2 0 1 125 kW TDI CR 205 55 R16 205 50 R17 225 45 R17 225 40 R18 a Applies only to vehicles with a rough road package Superb GreenLine Motorisation Minimal Load index lt L lt lt I lt lt lt lt E E lt I KIKI I lt lt I lt Minimal Speed icon 1 6 1 77 kW TDI CR 205 55 R16 Superb N1 Minimal Speed icon Minimal Motorisation Load index 205 50 R17 225 45 R17 225 40 R18 3 6 1 191 kW FSI CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Winter tyres 203 Snow chains 203 Winter tyres Summer tyres have less grip on ice snow and at temperatures below 7 C This is especially true of low profile tyres or high speed tyres Fitting winter tyres will significantly improve the handling of your veh
26. Alcantara 182 Fabrics 182 Synthetic leather 182 washing 176 Vehicle Condition see Auto Check Control 33 Vehicle data sticker 228 Vehicle dimensions 230 Vehicle height 230 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 228 Vehicle key lock 51 unlock 51 Vehicle length 230 Vehicle tool kit 205 Vehicle width 230 Visibility 75 Visors see Sun screen 76 see Sun visors 76 W Warning at excessive speeds 46 Warning lights 34 warning messages Diesel particulate filter 39 Warning symbols see Warning lights 34 Warning triangle 204 Washing Automatic car wash system 177 by hand 176 Chrome parts 178 High pressure cleaner 177 Washing vehicles 176 Water Driving through 152 Wax treatment See Taking care of your vehicle 178 Weather conditions 173 Wheel bolts Anti theft wheel bolts 208 Caps 201 Loosening and tightening 207 Wheel rims 197 Wheels Changing 205 Full trim 200 General information 197 Load index 201 Replacing wheels 198 Service life of tyres 198 Snow chains 203 Spare wheel 200 Speed symbol 202 Storing wheels 198 Temporary spare wheel 200 Tyre pressure 198 Tyre size 201 Tyre sizes 198 Tyre wear indicator 198 Unidirectional tyres 199 Winter tyres 203 Wi Fi 130 Windows 179 De icing 179 See Electrical power windows 61 Windscreen De icing 179 Heater 75 Windscreen washer fluid Checking 188 Replenishing 188 Warning light 40 Winter 18
27. Fig 71 Memory buttons and SET button N Read and observe H on page 81 first The memory function for the driver s seat provides the option to store the po sitions of the driver s seat and the external mirrors Each of the three memory buttons B Fig 71 can be assigned a set position Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward gt Switch on the ignition gt Adjust the seat to the desired position gt Adjust both of the exterior mirrors page 80 gt Press the button A Fig 71 gt Within 10 seconds after pressing the button press the desired memory button B An acknowledgement sound confirms the storage Saving front passenger mirror settings when reversing Above the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror down The lowering func tion for the mirror on the passenger side when reversing must be ena bled page 47 gt Switch on the ignition gt Press the required memory button B Fig 71 gt Turn the knob for the external mirror control to the position for the passen ger side mirror adjustment page 80 gt Engage reverse gear gt Adjust the front passenger s mirror to the desired position page 80 gt Disengage reverse gear The set position of the exterior mirror is stored Retrieving the saved setting gt Briefly press the desired memory button B Fig 71 with the ignition on 84 Operation or gt Press and hold the desired memory button B
28. If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec onds the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by several centimetres If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window be ing moved down for the second time even though the obstacle was not yet been removed the closing process is only stopped During this time it is not possible to automatically close the window The force limiter is still switched on The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window again within the next 10 seconds the window will now close with full force If you wait longer than 10 seconds the force limiter is switched on again Window convenience operation A Read and observe H and M on page 62 first The convenience operation of the windows offers the possibility of opening or closing all the windows at once Convenience operation can take place in one of the following ways Unlocking andopening 63 Opening gt Press and hold the symbol button amp on the remote control key gt Hold the key in the driver s lock in the unlock position gt Press and hold the upper part of the central locking button in the driver s door page 55 gt Hold button A Fig 44 on page 62 in the opening position Closing gt Press and hold the symbol button amp on the remote control key gt Hold the key in the driver s lock in the lock position gt Pr
29. Mirror with automatic dimming Fig 64 A Warning light lights when dimming is activated Switch for the activation of the automatic mirror dimming Light sensor D Light sensor on the back of the mirror Mirror with automatic dimming If the automatic dimming is enabled the mirror dims automatically depending on the light falling on the sensors Lights and visibility 79 When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged the mirror always moves back into the basic position not dimmed Do not attach external navigation devices on to the windscreen or in the vicini ty of the automatic dimming interior mirror H D WARNING The illuminated display of an external navigation unit can lead to opera tional faults to the automatic dimming interior mirror risk of accident EF CAUTION Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the light striking the sen sors is not affected by other objects If the automatic interior mirror dimming is switched off the exterior mirror dimming is also switched off Exterior mirrors Fig 65 Exterior mirror operation CQ Read and observe H on page 79 first The knob can be moved into the following positions depending on the vehi cle equipment Adjust the left mirror Adjust the right mirror Switch off mirror control Mirror heater Folding in the exterior mirrors 80 Operation Adjust the position The mirror can be adjusted to the desired
30. Warning light for open door 36 Door open Warning light 36 Driver Steering Recommendation DSR 155 Driving Abroad 153 Driving through water on streets 152 Emissions 229 Fuel consumption 229 Driving economically Economical gear changing 149 Driving through water 152 DSR 155 DVD preinstallation 136 E Economical and environmentally friendly driv ing 149 Economical driving Ballast 151 Driving at full throttle 150 Idling 150 Looking ahead 149 Regular maintenance 151 Saving energy 15 Short distances 150 Tyre pressure 150 EDL Operation 155 Electrical power windows 63 Button in the driver s door 61 62 Button in the rear doors 63 Operational faults 64 Electric boot lid Force limit 59 Manual operation 59 Electric luggage compartment lid Acoustic signals 61 Adjusting the top lid position 61 Deleting the top lid position 61 Malfunctions 61 Operating 59 Electric sliding tilting roof 64 Electronic Differential Lock EDL 155 Electronic immobilizer 139 Electronic Stability Control ESC 154 Emergency Activation of the sliding tilting roof 218 Changing a wheel 205 Hazard warning light system 72 jump starting 211 Jump starting 211 Locking the door without a locking cylinder 217 Locking the driver s door 216 Selector lever unloc
31. Your own voice tag can also be saved using the voice control in the FURTHER OPTIONS menu LONG DIALOGUE CANCEL If the system does not recognise the command it repeats the first part of the help thus enabling a new entry to be completed After the 2nd unsuccessful attempt the system repeats the second part of the help After the 3rd unsuc cessful attempt the answer Cancelled is given and the dialogue is ended The help is not reduced suitable for beginners The dialogue is ended Store voice recording of a contact If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts you can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book Voice tag Record menu item Your own voice tag can also be saved using the voice control in the FURTHER OPTIONS menu Communication and multimedia 133 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Music playback via Bluetooth 134 Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel 134 AUX and MDlinputs 135 CD changer 136 DVD preinstallation 136 Music playback via Bluetooth The universal telephone preinstallation makes it possible to play back music via Bluetooth from devices such as MP3 players mobile phones or notebooks To ensure the music can be played back via Bluetooth you must first pair the device with the hands free system in the Phone Bluetooth Media pl
32. air passages and lead to conjunctivi tis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs a Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and if it comes into contact with the skin causes deep wounds that take a long time to heal Repeated contact with diluted acids causes skin diseases inflammations ulcers skin cracks a If any battery acid comes into contact with your eyes rinse the affected eye immediately with clean water for several minutes and consult a doctor immediately a Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water If you swal low battery acid consult a doctor immediately E WARNING t is prohibited to work with naked flames or lights a t is prohibited to smoke or carry out any activities that produce sparks Never use a damaged vehicle battery risk of explosion 194 General Maintenance E WARNING Continued Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery risk of explosion and chemical burns Replace a frozen vehicle battery a Never jump start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels risk of explosion and chemical burns H WARNING a When you charge a battery hydrogen is released and a highly explosive gas mixture is also produced An explosion can be caused through sparkling over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on Creating a bridge between the poles on the b
33. also be activated deactivated by locking unlocking page 47 Opening closing a door Be B3T 0555 Fig 33 Door handle door opening lever N Read and observe H on page 51 first Opening from the outside gt Unlock the vehicle gt Pull on door handle A Fig 33 on the door you wish to open Opening from the inside gt Pull on door handle B of the door and push the door away from you Closing from the inside gt Grasp pull handle C and close the door E WARNING Make sure that the door has closed correctly as it can open suddenly while the vehicle is being driven there is a risk of death Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening closing sweep there is a risk of injury An opened door can close spontaneously if there is a strong wind or the vehicle is on a slope there is a risk of injury a Never drive with the doors open there is a risk of death Unlocking locking KESSY Fig 34 Sensors in the handle of the front door QO Read and observe H on page 51 first The KESSY system Keyless Entry Start Exit System enables unlocking and locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key Sensors in the handle of the front door Fig 34 A Unlocking sensor Locking sensor Unlocking gt Grab the door handle of the front door or cover the sensor A Fig 34 M with the whole palm of your hand Locking gt Touch the sensor B Fig 34
34. and animals as they may not be recognised by the system sensors Before reversing you should make sure that there are no small obstacles such as rocks thin posts trailer drawbars etc in front or behind your vehi cle Such obstacles may not be recognised by the system sensors Under certain circumstances surfaces of certain objects and types of clothing cannot reflect the system signals Thus these objects or people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the System sensors a External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the system Un der adverse conditions this may cause objects or people to not be recog nised by the system 156 Driving EE CAUTION f a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and there is no obstacle close to your car this indicates a system fault The fault is also indicated by the symbolP flashing in the button Fig 148 on page 157 Seek help from a specialist garage The sensors must be kept clean free of ice etc to enable the system to op erate properly Under adverse weather conditions heavy rain water vapour very low or high temperatures etc the system function may be limited incorrect recog nition of obstacle Additionally installed accessories such as e g bicycle carriers can impair the system function Note The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory set to be higher than for rear obstacle recognitio
35. and attaching a wheel 206 Changing brake fluid 193 Charging a vehicle battery 196 Check Fit ball head properly 168 Checking Battery electrolyte level 195 Brake fluid 193 Coolant 192 Engine oil 190 Oil level 190 Windscreen washer fluid 188 Checks Statutory checks 173 Children and safety 22 Child safety Side airbag 24 Child safety lock 55 Child seat Classification 25 ISOFIX 25 on the front passenger seat 23 TOP TETHER 27 Use of child seats 25 Use of ISOFIX child seats 26 Chrome parts refer to Taking care of your vehicle 178 Cigarette lighter 91 Cleaning Alcantara 182 Covers of electrically heated seats 182 Fabrics 182 Headlight lenses 179 Natural leather 181 Plastic parts 178 Synthetic leather 182 Wheels 180 Cleaning the vehicle Towing device 180 Cleaning vehicle 176 Climatronic 115 Air recirculation 117 automatic mode 116 Control elements 115 Controlling blower 118 Cooling system 116 Defrosting windscreen 118 Setting the temperature 116 Clothes hook 94 Cockpit 12 Volt power outlet 92 Ashtray 91 Cigarette lighter 91 General view 29 Lighting 73 Practical features 88 Storage compartments 88 Comfort control window 63 COMING HOME 72 Compartments 88 Components of the puncture repair kits 209 Computer See multifunction display 44 Index 237 Convenience opera
36. and when it was turned back on again In cold temperatures and during the winter check before the journey or be fore switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are fro zen to the windscreen this may damage both the blades and windscreen wip er motor a Carefully release frozen wiper blades off the windscreen Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving a f the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly there is a risk of damage to the windscreen Do not switch on the ignition if the front wiper arms are retracted The wiper arms could damage the paint of the bonnet a f there is an obstacle on the windscreen the wiper will try to push away the obstacle The wiper stops automatically after 5 attempts to eliminate the ob Stacle in order to avoid damage to the wiper Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper on again FF Note Each time the ignition switches off for the third time the position of the windscreen wipers changes This counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rub bers a The rear window wiper only operates if the boot lid is closed a The wiper blades should be cleaned on a regular basis with a windscreen cleaner to avoid any smears The wiper blades should be cleaned with a sponge or cloth if they are heavily soiled by insect residues for example Keep the wiper blades clean They may become
37. are balanced When driving however there are a range of factors that may result in an imbalance This may become apparent by vibration in the steering If this is the case have the wheels checked by a specialist garage Have the wheels likewise rebalanced after replacing the tyres Setting the vehicle geometry Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear leads to excess wear on the tyres and impairs driving safety With a distinctive tyre wear we recommend that you check the setting of the vehicle geometry in a specialist workshop Tyre damage We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage punctures cuts splits and bulges etc on a regular basis Remove foreign bodies e g small stones from the tyre tread immediately Drive over kerbs and other such obstacles slowly and at right angles wherever possible in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims Immediately replace damaged wheel rims or tyres Exchanging the wheels For uniform wear on all tyres we recommend that you change the wheels ev ery 10 000 km according to schedule Fig 172 You will then obtain approxi mately the same life for all the tyres After a wheel has been replaced the tyre pressure has to be adjusted In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring tyre pressure values are to be stor ed page 166 Tyre storage Identify disassembled tyres so that the previous direction of rotation can be maintained if the tyres are reass
38. area thus begins at a distance of around 35 cm on vehicles equipped with a factory fitted towing device Towing a trailer On vehicles equipped with a factory fitted towing device only system areas A and B Fig 148 are active when towing a trailer Activation deactivation CQ Read and observe H and H on page 156 first The system is automatically activated by selecting reverse gear or pressing the symbol button Pa Fig 148 on page 157 The symbol Pw illuminates in the button activation is confirmed by a brief acoustic signal The system is deactivated by moving out of reverse gear either by pressing the symbol buttonP or automatically at a speed exceeding 10 km h the sym bol Pu in the button goes out On vehicles which only have rear sensors the system can only be deactivated by moving out of reverse gear CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Functioning 158 Finding a parking space 158 Parking 159 Departing from a parallel parking space 160 Automatic emergency braking 160 Information messages 160 Park Assist in the following referred to as the system helps drivers park in suitable parallel and perpendicular parking places and also to manoeuvre out of parallel parking spaces The system takes over the steering movements when parking or driving out of the parking space the driver operates the pedals as well as the gear lever The state in which the s
39. at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers a Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat Children must be fastened page 22 Transporting children safely with a suitable restraint system a f the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position he is exposed to life threatening injuries in case he is hit by a deployed airbag E WARNING Continued a f the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright the risk of injury is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving as this will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury Correct seated position for the driver Fig 1 Correct driver seating position properly adjusted headrest A Read and observe H on page 9 first For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident the following instructions must be observed v Adjust the driver s seat in the forward back direction so that the pedals can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs JV For vehicles with driver knee air bag adjust the driver s seat in a forward back direction so that there is a gap of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel in the vicinity of the knee airbag B Fig 1 v Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steerin
40. at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible Engine parts can be damaged if petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed is used a Even in the event of an emergency petrol of a lower octane number than 91 RON must not be used otherwise the engine can be severely damaged EE CAUTION In no case may fuel additives with metal components be used especially not with manganese and iron content There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system EE CAUTION Fuels with metal components such as LRP lead replacement petrol must not be used There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system Note Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the engine can be used without limitations The use of petrol with an octane rating higher than 95 RON in does not re sult in either a noticeable increase in power nor lower fuel consumption in ve hicles for which unleaded petrol 95 91 92 or 93 RON is specified On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min 95 RON the use of pet rol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and re duce fuel consumption 1 In Germany also DIN 51628 in Austria NORM C 1590 in Russia GOST R 52368 2005 EN 590 2004 2 In Germany complying with standard DIN 52638 i
41. be avoided If looking ahead when driving less braking and consequently less accelerating are required If possible let your vehicle coast to a stop or use the engine brake if you can see that the next set of traffic lights is on red for example Economical gear changing Fig 142 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km depending on the selected gear AN Read and observe M on page 149 first Shifting up early saves on fuel Manual gearbox gt Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear gt Shift up into the next gear at approximately 2 000 rpm Starting off and Driving 149 An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early Observe the recommended gear page 43 Gear recommendation A suitably selected gear can have an effect on fuel consumption Fig 142 Automatic gearbox gt Slowly apply the accelerator pedal However do not depress it as far as the kickdown position page 147 gt An economic driving programme is automatically selected if the accelerator pedal is only depressed slowly Avoiding full throttle 1 100 km Fig 143 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km and speed in km h km h 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 AN Read and observe M on page 149 first Driving more slowly saves fuel Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel con sumption but also positively influence envi
42. be hidden under the water making it difficult or impossible to drive through water Do not drive through salt water as the salt can cause corrosion A vehicle coming into contact with salt water is to be thoroughly rinsed with fresh wa ter Note After driving through water we recommend having the vehicle checked by a specialist garage QJ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Unleaded petrol 5B Headlights 153 In certain countries it may be possible that the SKODA Partner network is limi ted or has not been established This is the reason why procuring certain spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garages may only be able to make limited repairs Unleaded petrol A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded petrol page 184 Unleaded petrol Information regarding the locations of fill ing stations that offer unleaded petrol is for example provided by the auto mobile associations Headlights The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically It illuminates the side of the road on which the vehicle is being driven to a greater extent When driving in countries in which the traffic drives on the other side of the road than in your home country the asymmetrical low beam may dazzle on coming drivers In order to avoid this the headlights must be adjusted at a specialist garage Headlights with Xenon lights can be adjust
43. bodywork Residues of preservatives in the window leather can make the window dirty and reduce visibility EE CAUTION The ice scraper should not be moved forward and backward but in one direc tion to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass a Snow or ice that is contaminated with coarse dirt such as fine gravel sand or salt must not be removed from the windows and mirrors there is a risk of damage to the surface of the windows and mirrors Do not remove snow or ice from glass parts using warm or hot water risk of cracks forming in the glass a When removing snow or ice from windows and mirror lenses ensure that the paintwork of the vehicle is not to damage Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp edged objects or corro sive and acidic cleaning agents there is a risk of damaging the heating ele ments or window aerial Headlight lenses A Read and observe H and F on page 177 first Clean plastic front headlight lenses using clean warm water and soap EE CAUTION Never wipe headlights to dry Do not use any sharp objects to clean the plastic lenses as this may damage the protective paintwork and consequently cause cracks to form on the head light lenses Do not use any harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents to clean the headlights as this could damage the headlight lenses Door lock cylinders A Read and observe H and on page 177 first Specific products must be used for de icing door
44. by intensive sun s rays ac centuate this caustic effect 176 General Maintenance It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end of the winter WARNING When washing your vehicle in the winter Water and ice in the braking system can affect the braking efficiency risk of accident Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is switched off risk of accident CAUTION Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight risk of paint damage For the sake of the environment Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose Washing by hand A Read and observe H and M on page 176 first Soak the dirt with plenty of water and rinse as well as possible Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge a washing glove or a washing brush Work from the top to the bottom starting with the roof Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals Clean wheels door sills and similar parts last Use a second sponge for such areas Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois leather EE CAUTION a When washing the car by hand protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts e g when cleaning the underfloor the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims etc There is a risk of cuts a Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle s paintwork Automatic car wash systems A
45. can be switched off up to a speed of 2 km h Emergency start up of the engine Fig 136 Emergency start up of engine A Read and observe H and H on page 140 first If the authorisation check for the key fails the following message appears in the instrument cluster display Q Key not found NOKEY The emergency start up must be completed gt Press the starter button directly with the key Fig 136 or gt Press the starter button and then hold the key to the starter button Note During an emergency engine start up the key bit must face the starter but ton Fig 136 Emergency ignition shutoff system A Read and observe H and on page 140 first The ignition can be turned off in an emergency even when travelling at a speed of more than 2 km hr gt Press the starter button Fig 135 on page 141 for longer than 1 second or twice within 1 second After emergency stop of the ignition the steering is unlocked CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Information on braking 143 Handbrake 144 HH WARNING Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switch ed off risk of accident The clutch pedal must be depressed when braking on a vehicle with man ual transmission when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs Otherwise the function of the brake booster may be impaired risk of accident When leaving the vehicle never leave
46. causing damage to the lid a In certain circumstances if the lid is loaded e g by a thick layer of snow the opening process of the lid can be interrupted Remove the load on the lid to re enable the electrical operation a If the lid closes automatically e g under load of snow you will hear an inter mittent beep The flap is always to be close before disconnecting the battery Operating description B3T 0579 Fig 42 Operation of the lid Unlocking andopening 59 Fig 43 Button for the flap operation operation areas N Read and observe H and H on page 59 first Control elements The lid can be operated with the following control elements gt With the symbol button on the remote control key press for about 1s gt With the button in the handle A on the outer part of the lid Fig 42 gt With the button B on the inner part of the lid Fig 42 gt With the button C in the centre console Fig 43 Operating areas The system distinguishes 3 operating areas where the function of the individu al operating elements changes Fig 43 The end positions of the lid fully closed in the secured lock and fully opened differ as well The range of the area 3 changes depending on the setting of the top position of the lid page 61 If the lid is set in the uppermost position in the area 2 the area 3 is not ac tive The range of the area 2 changes depending on the setting of th
47. compartment in boot with battery 102 Side compartments in the luggage compart ment 101 ski bag 97 Sliding tilting roof Close Superb Combi 66 Closing 64 Closing the sun screen Superb Combi 66 Electric sliding tilting roof 64 Emergency operation 218 Opening closing the sun screen Superb Combi 66 Opening and tilting 64 Opening and tilting Superb Combi 66 Operation 64 Operation Superb Combi 66 Snow chains 203 Spare wheel 200 Speedometer 31 See speedometer 3 Speed symbol Refer to Wheels 202 Spoiler 175 Starting and stopping the engine KESSY ___ 140 Starting and stopping the engine using the key 138 Starting engine Jump starting 211 Starting the engine Jump starting 211 Key 139 see KESSY 142 START STOP 162 Information messages 164 Jump starting 212 Manually deactivating activating the system _ 164 Operating conditions for the system 163 operation in vehicles with automatic gearbox 163 operation in vehicles with manual gearbox __ 163 system related automatic start up 164 Steering lock unlock see KESSY 141 Steering wheel 10 Stopping the engine Key 140 Storage compartment in rear centre console __ 95 Storage compartment on passenger side __ 94 Storage compartments 88 Storage compartment under passenger seat __ 94 Storage pockets on the front seats 95 Storing skis 96 Sun screen 76 Sun screen in the
48. complete passive vehicle safety concept TO ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect when the airbag is deployed the front seats must be correctly adjusted to match the body size page 9 Correct and safe seated position f you do not fasten the seat belts when driving lean too far forward or adopt an incorrect seated position you are exposing yourself to increased risk of injury in the event of an accident E WARNING Information on the use of the airbag system a If there is a fault the airbag system must be checked by a specialist ga rage immediately Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activa ted in the event of an accident No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system a Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of system components due to other repair work e g removal of the steering wheel must only be carried out by a specialist garage a Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork a t is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one ac cident The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been de ployed 16 Safety System description QN Read and observe H on page 16 first The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the warning lig
49. confirming the stored value the speed limit is disabled gt By reconfirming the option to change the speed limit is activated If the set speed limit is exceeded an audible signal will sound as a warning The Speed warning MAXI DOT display or Segment display menu item ap pears in the display with the limit set The speed limit set mode is stored even after the ignition is switched off and on CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Main menu 47 Settings 47 Compass point display 48 The MAXI DOT display provides you with information about the current operat ing state of your vehicle Depending on the vehicle equipment it also provides you with data relating to the radio multifunction display MFD mobile phone navigation system automatic gearbox and devices connected via the MDI in put Furthermore it allows the adjustment of some other features of your ve hicle E WARNING Language Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle You can set the language for the display texts here Automatic blind Combi This is where the automatic roll up function of the boot roll cover can be deac Main menu CQ Read and observe H on page 47 first MFD data Press and hold button A or C Fig 27 on page 42 to activate the MAIN Convenience MENU By briefly pressing the C button you
50. cylinder then the alarm is triggered Switching off the alarm The alarm is turned off by pressing the 8 button on the radio remote control key or switching on the ignition EE CAUTION Before leaving the vehicle it must be checked that all of the windows doors and the sliding tilting roof are locked in order to ensure the full functionality of the anti theft alarm system FF Note The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years Activating deactivating N Read and observe on page 56 first Activating The anti theft alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 sec onds after the vehicle is locked If the vehicle is unlocked and a door or the boot lid not opened within the next 30 seconds the vehicle will lock again automatically and the SafeLock system or anti theft alarm system will be switched back on This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally Deactivating The anti theft alarm system is deactivated automatically after the vehicle is unlocked If the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds the anti theft alarm system is automatically activated again The alarm system is also deactivated if you unlock the driver door using the key within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle 56 Operation FF Note a f the car is unlocked with the key in the driver door insert the key into the ignition and switch the ignition to deactivate the alarm system a You can switch the audible
51. does not relate to a fault in the seat cover but rather to poor colour fastness of the clothing textiles Note When using the vehicle minor visible changes may occur to the leather parts of the covers e g wrinkles or creases as a result of the stress applied to the covers Synthetic leather fabrics and Alcantara A Read and observe H and M on page 181 first Artificial leather Clean artificial leather with a damp cloth If this method does not completely clean the artificial leather use a mild soap solution or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose Fabric Clean upholstery cover materials and cloth trims on doors boot cover etc us ing specific cleaning agents e g dry foam Use a soft sponge brush or commercially available microfibre cloth Use a cloth and special detergent to clean the headlining Remove any lumps on the cover fabric and any fabric residue using a brush Remove stubborn hair using a cleaning glove Alcantara Dust and fine dirt particles in pores creases and seams may chafe and damage the surface 182 General Maintenance If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the Al cantara seat upholstery from direct sunlight to prevent fading Minor changes in colour caused by use are normal EE CAUTION a Do not use leather cleaners on Alcantara seat upholstery Do not use solvents floor wax shoe cream stain remover or similar agents
52. down split seat backrest gt Press the release knob A Fig 77 gt Fold the seat backrest completely forwards Fold down undivided seat backrest gt Push the release handles A Fig 77 on both sides of the seat backrest at the same time gt Fold the seat backrest completely forwards Fold back split seat backrest gt If you removed the head restraint you need to reinsert it with the backrest tilted slightly forwards page 83 gt Hold the rear outer seat belt C Fig 77 against the side trim panel gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing knob A clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest H gt Make sure that the red pin B is hidden Fold back undivided seat backrest gt If you removed the head restraints you need to reinsert them with the back rest tilted slightly forwards page 83 gt Hold the rear outer seat belts C Fig 77 against the side trim panel gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the release levers A on either side of the seat back click into place check by pulling on the seat backrest H gt Make sure that the red pins B on both sides of the seat back are not visible E WARNING The seat belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding back the seat backrests they must be ready to use a The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so tha
53. driving break again after 15 minutes Activation deactivation The system can be activated deactivated via the MAXI DOT display in the As sistants menu option page 47 Information messages A Read and observe H on page 165 first In MAXI DOT display the icon appears for a few seconds amp and the following message Q Fatigue detected Take a break An audible signal is also emitted CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Save tyre pressure values 166 The tyre pressure monitoring function hereinafter referred to only as a sys tem monitors the tyre pressure while driving If the rolling circumference of a wheel is changed the warning light 1 in the instrument cluster illuminates and an audible signal sounds Information on the procedure for the notification of change of tyre inflation pressure page 40 The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed inflation pressure and this pressure values are stored in the system HH WARNING Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver s responsi bility Tyre pressure should be checked regularly page 198 The system cannot warn in case of very rapid loss of tyre pressure e g in the event of a sudden puncture Assistsystems 165 Save tyre pressure values Fig 154 Key for storing the pressure val ues A Read and observe H on page 165 first Saving the tyre pressure v
54. even after heavy shaking E WARNING The towing device can only be used when the tow bar is correctly locked there is the risk of an accident occurring Removing the ball head Fig 159 Unlock the operating lever of the ball head removing the ball head A Read and observe H and on page 166 first gt Remove cover 1 Fig 159from the lock in the direction of the arrow gt Insert the key into the lock so that its green marking is pointing upwards gt Turn the key 2 180 to the left so that its red marker points upward gt Grasp the ball head from underneath gt Press the release pin 3 as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow and at the same time push the lever 4 downwards as far as it will go in the di rection of the arrow The ball head is released in this position and falls freely into the hand If it does not fall freely into the hand use your other hand to push it upwards At the same time the ball head latches into the ready position and is thus ready to be re inserted into the mounting recess H gt Place the cap 4 Fig 155 on page 167 onto the mounting recess E WARNING Never allow the ball head to remain unsecured in the boot This could cause damage to the boot upon sudden braking and could put the safety of the occupants at risk EE CAUTION a f the lever is held firmly and not pushed downwards as far as it can go it will go back up after the ball head is
55. following instructions must be observed if vehicle damage is to be avoided when driving through water e g flooded roads gt Determine the depth of the water before driving through it The water level must not reach above the web of the lower beam Fig 145 gt Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed At a higher speed a water wave can form in front of the vehicle which can cause water to penetrate into the engine s air intake system or other parts of the vehicle gt Never stop in the water do not reverse and do not switch the engine off E WARNING a Driving through water mud sludge etc can impair the braking power and extend the braking distance risk of accident a Avoid abrupt and sudden braking immediately after water crossings After driving through bodies of water the brakes must be cleaned and dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this Do not place any other road users in jeopardy EE CAUTION Should water penetrate into the intake system of the engine there is a threat of serious damage being incurred by the engine parts a When driving through water some vehicle parts such as chassis electrics or transmissions can be severely damaged Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permis sible water level for your vehicle Potholes mud or rocks can
56. gt No CFCs used in the production process gt Without use of mercury gt Use of water soluble paints Trade in and recycling of old cars SKODA meets the requirements of the brand and its products with regard to protecting the environment and the preserving resources All new SKODAvehi cles can be recycled by up to 95 and can always be returned free of charge In a lot of countries sufficient trade in networks have been created where you can trade in your vehicle After you trade in your vehicle you will receive a confirmation stating the recycling in accordance with environmental regula tions FF Note You can find more detailed information about the trade in and recycling of old cars from a specialist garage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects General information 152 Driving through water on streets 152 D Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements 152 Driving General information Pay attention to low slung parts of the vehicle such as the spoiler and ex haust particularly in the following situations gt When driving on poorly maintained roads and paths gt When driving over kerbs gt When driving on steep ramps etc Particular attention is required for vehicles with sport suspension and when the vehicle is fully laden Driving through water on streets Fig 145 Maximum permissible water lev el when driving through water The
57. increased sulphur content Note We recommend avoiding regularly driving short distances to assist the com bustion process of the soot particles in the filter a If the engine is turned off during the filter cleaning process or shortly after wards the cooling fan may turn on automatically for a few minutes fi Fuel reserve N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light D illuminates if the fuel level is less than approx 10 5 litres The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Please refuel Range km EE CAUTION Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring This can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine and the exhaust system Note The text in the display goes out only after refuelling and driving a short dis tance Instruments and Indicator Lights 39 t Airbag system A Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light 2 illuminates there is a fault in the airbag system The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Q Fault Airbag The operational capability of the airbag system is monitored electronically even if one of the airbags is switched off If a front side or head airbag or belt tensioner has been switched off using the vehicle system tester gt The warning light 2 illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the igni tion is switched on and then flashes again for approxim
58. is moved again to P Emergency operation of the sliding tilting roof CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation 218 Activation after unclamping and reclamping the battery 218 Emergency equipment and self help 217 B3T 0597 Fig 196 Point for positioning screwdriver opening for positioning the key The sliding tilting roof can be closed or opened manually if a fault occurs The emergency operation of the sliding tilting roof is located underneath the glasses storage box 1 page 93 Glasses storage box gt Open the glasses storage box gt Carefully insert an approximately 5 mm wide screwdriver into the slot in the positions shown by the arrows 1 Fig 196 gt Carefully fold the glasses storage box downwards by gently pressing down and turning the screwdriver gt Insert an Allen key SW 4 up to the stop into the opening 2 and close or open the sliding tilting roof gt Reinstall the glasses storage box by first inserting the plastic plugs and then pushing the entire part upwards Have the fault on the sliding tilting roof rectified as soon as possible by a spe cialist garage EF Note a It is necessary after each emergency operation to move the sliding tilting roof into the basic position This is why the rotary switch must be set to posi tion A Fig 46 on page 64 and pressed forwards for about 10 seconds After each emergency operation it i
59. is reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occu pied T16 Operation By pressing the button AUTO again it is changed to HIGH mode Automatic mode can be switched off by pressing any of the air distribution buttons or by increasing decreasing the blower speed Switching the cooling system on off gt Press the button A C The warning light in the button illuminates gt Press button A C once more The warning light in the button goes out After the cooling system is switched off only the ventilation and heating func tion remains active whereby the minimum temperature that can be reached is the outside temperature Setting the temperature The interior temperature for the left and right side can be set separately or to gether For both sides gt Turn the control dial A Fig 126 on page 115 to the left or right to increase or decrease the temperature The warning light in the button DUAL does not illuminate For the right side gt Turn the control dial D Fig 126 on page 115 to the left or right to increase or decrease the temperature The warning light in the button DUAL illuminates If the warning light in the symbol button DUALis lit the temperature for both sides cannot be set with the control dial A This function can be restored by pressing the symbol button DUAL The warning light in the button goes out The interior temperature can be set between 18 C and 26 C The interior
60. is still not unlocked then the following message is displayed on the display of the instrument cluster Move the steering wheel MOVE STEERING WHEEL Slightly move the steering wheel and the system will make up to 3 more at tempts to unlock after 2 seconds At the same time the warning light flash es If the steering is still not unlocked to try to eliminate the possible cause and then repeat the unlocking attempt Ignition on off QO Read and observe H and H on page 140 first gt Press the starter button Fig 135 on page 141 briefly The ignition is switched on or off On vehicles fitted with a manual transmission the clutch pedal must not be depressed while switching the ignition on or off otherwise the system would try to start On vehicles fitted with a automatic transmission the brake pedal must not be depressed while switching the ignition on or off otherwise the system would try to start Starting off and Driving 141 If the driver s door is opened while the ignition is on an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in the instrument cluster display Ignition on 6 IGNITION SWITCHED ON When leaving the vehicle always switch off the ignition Note The ignition is switched on when indicated by the illuminating of certain indi cator lamps in the instrument cluster Starting the engine A Read and observe H and on page 140 first Vehicles with a diesel engine are equi
61. light system and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance The national le gal requirements must be observed a Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible E WARNING a A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a stand ard tyre Do not drive faster than 80 km h 50 mph a Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering E WARNING Continued The sealant is hazardous to heath Remove immediately if it comes into contact with the skin Observe the manufacturer s usage instructions for the breakdown kit For the sake of the environment Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in accordance with environmental protection regulations Note a Anew bottle of sealant can be purchased from KODA Original Parts Immediately replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit or consult a specialist garage about repair options The national legal requirements must be observed when repairing a tyre Components of the puncture repair kits Fig 183 Principle sketch Components of the breakdown kit AN Read and observe H on page 209 first Components of the set Fig 183 1 Valve remover 2 Sticker with max 80 km h max 50 mph speed designation 3 Inflation hose with plug 4 Air compressor 5 Tyre inflation hose Emerg
62. not locked and so that the turn signal lights windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system can be used gt Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is running If the engine is not running significantly more physical force is required to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle If using a tow rope ensure that it is always kept taught Both drivers should be familiar with the problems which might possibly occur while a vehicle is being towed Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing dis tance is greater than 50 km E WARNING a When towing respect the national legal provisions especially those which relate to the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle be ing towed When towing exercise increased caution For towing no spiral tow rope is to be used Fig 187 B the towing eye may unscrew out of the vehicle there is a risk of accidents The tow rope should not be twisted there is a risk of accidents EE CAUTION Do not tow start the engine there is a risk of damaging the engine and the catalytic converter The battery from anoth
63. observe H and M on page 194 first A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine gt Switch off the ignition and all of the electrical components gt Disconnect both battery cables negative first then positive only when rapid charging the battery gt Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals red positive black negative gt Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch the charger on gt Once charging is complete Switch off the charger and remove the mains ca ble from the power socket gt Only then disconnect the charger s terminal clamps gt Reconnect the cables to the battery first positive then negative It is not necessary to disconnect the battery cables if you are recharging the vehicle battery using low amperages for example from a mini charger Refer to the charger manufacturer s instructions A charging current of 0 1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity or low er must be used until full charging is achieved Both cables must be disconnected before charging the battery with high amperages known as rapid charging The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging H WARNING Quick charging the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special charger and specialist knowledge 196 General Maintenance EE CAUTION On ve
64. odometer N Read and observe H on page 30 first Use buttons 3 and 7 to set the time Fig 21 on page 30 3 The choice to change the display hours or minutes The change of the displayed value In vehicles equipped with the MAXI DOT display it is also possible to set the Time in the Time menu page 47 Display of the second speed N Read and observe H on page 30 first The display can show the current speed in mph This feature is provided for driving in countries with different units for speed MAXI DOT display The display of the second speed can be set in the Alt speed dis menu item page 47 Settings Segment display gt Press the 3 Fig 21 on page 30key repeatedly until the odometer display flashes page 32 gt Press the 7 key while the display is flashing The second speed is displayed instead of the odometer Display of the second speed can be disabled in the same way Display in rear centre console Fig 26 Centre console at rear Display N Read and observe H on page 30 first The time and the outside temperature are displayed on the display in the rear centre console when the ignition is switched on Fig 26 The values are taken over by the instrument cluster 1 On models on which the speedometer indicates mph the second speed is displayed in km h Auto Check Control Ql Read and observe H on page 30 first Vehicle condition Certain functions and conditions o
65. of paired devices Find Device search Phone name option to change the name of the phone default SKODA_BT Settings The following menu items can be selected from the Settings menu item Phone book Phonebook Update Update the phone book List Arrange the entries in the phone book Surname Arrange according to surname Surname Sort by contact name Ring tone Ring tone setting Back Return to the telephone s basic menu 1 On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system this function can be accessed via the naviga tion system menu refer to the Operating instructions for the Amundsent navigation system 126 Operation CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Connecting the phone to the hands free system 127 Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display 128 Internet connection via Bluetooth 129 The universal telephone preinstallation GSM III comprises the following func tions gt Phone Phonebook page 124 gt Convenience operation via the multifunction steering wheel page 122 gt Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display page 128 gt Voice control of the telephone page 131 gt Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units page 134 gt Internet connection page 129 gt Display of SMS messages page 128 All communication between a telephone and the hands free system of your vehicle can only b
66. of the lamp are automatically switched off Use light Ao ony B3T 0618 Fig 110 Use light remove light A Read and observe M on page 103 first Use light gt If you press button A Fig 110 once the lamp illuminates with 100 light intensity gt If you press button A again the lamp illuminates with 50 light intensity gt Press A button once again the light goes out Remove the lamp from the holder gt Grasp the lamp in the areas of the arrows D Fig 110 and swivel it in the direction of the arrow E Reinserting the lamp the holder gt First of all place the deactivated lamp in the holder on the side facing the boot lid and then press on the lamp from the other side until it is clicks into place Changing rechargeable light batteries Ql Read and observe M on page 103 first Proceed as follows if you wish to replace the faulty rechargeable batteries yourself gt Remove the lamp gt Lever off the cover for the rechargeable batteries with a narrow and pointed object from the location of the lock off clips F Fig 110 on page 103 gt Remove the faulty rechargeable batteries from the lamp gt Insert the new rechargeable batteries Seats and practical features 103 gt Insert the cover for the rechargeable batteries and press it down until it clicks into place CAUTION a We recommend having faulty rechargeable batteries replaced by a KODA service partne
67. of the light sensor on the windscreen This can impair its function or reliability Adaptive headlights AHL A Read and observe H on page 67 first The AHL system makes sure the street remains lit up depending on the traffic and weather situation The AHL system automatically adjusts the cone of light in front of the vehicle to the driving speed or the use of the wiper The AHL system works as long as the light switch is in position AVTO page 70 The AHL system operates in the following modes Out of town mode The cone of light in front of the vehicle is similar to the low beam City mode The light cone in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that this and the adjacent pavements intersections pedestrian crossings etc are illuminated The mode is active at speeds of 15 50 km h Motorway mode The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can re spond in time to an obstruction or other hazard in time The mode activates progressively from a speed of 90 km h onward It is most efficient at a speeds above 120 km h Rain mode The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can re duce the glare from oncoming vehicles in rain The mode is active at speeds of 15 70 km h and if the windscreen wipers continuously operate for a period of time longer than 2 minutes The mode is deactivated when the windscreen wipers are switched off for longer than 8 minutes Dynamic corn
68. off page 70 Switching on the parking light or parking lights page 73 Z0 Switch on low beam 68 Operation Pull switch Switch on the front fog lamp page 71 Q Switching on the rear fog light page 71 20 Headlight range control Turning the dial B Fig 49 from the position to 3 gradually adjusts the headlight range control and thereby shortens the light cone The positions of the width of illumination correspond approximately to the fol lowing car load Front seats occupied boot empty All seats occupied boot empty All seats occupied boot loaded Driver seat occupied boot loaded w N We recommend you adjust the headlight beam when the low beam is switched on c Instrument lighting Turning the rotary switch C Fig 49 when the lights are switched on adjusts the brightness of the instrument lighting Fig 49 The instruments are also illuminated when the parking light low or high beam light is switched on Bi Xenon headlights The Bi Xenon bulbs adapt automatically to the load and driving state of the vehicle when the ignition is switched on and when driving Vehicles that are equipped with Bi Xenon headlights do not have a manual headlight range ad justment control E WARNING Always adjust the headlight beam to satisfy the following conditions a The vehicle does not dazzle other road users especially oncoming vehi cles a The beam range is sufficient for safe driving lt
69. on if the oil level is above range A Fig 166 on page 190 Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist ga rage CAUTION Do not pour any additives into the engine oil risk of serious damage to the engine parts FF Note Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you en gine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle We recommend that you use oils from SKODA Original Accessories If oil comes into contact with your skin the affected area must be washed thoroughly Specifications and capacity A Read and observe H and on page 189 first Specifications and capacity in I for vehicles with flexible service intervals Petrol engines 1 4 1 92 kW TSI 1 8 1 112 118 kW TSI 2 0 1 147 kW TSI 3 6 1 191 kW FSI Specification VW 503 00 VW 504 00 VW 504 00 VW 504 00 VW 504 00 Capacity Diesel engines 1 6 1 77 kW TDI CR 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR DPF 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR DPF Specification VW 507 00 VW 507 00 VW 507 00 Capacity a Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without DPF Inspecting and replenishing 189 Specifications and capacity in I for vehicles with fixed service intervals Petrol engines Specification Capacity 1 4 1 92 kW TSI VW 501 01 VW 502 00 3 6 VW 502 00 1 8 1 112 118 kW TSI applies to Russia 4 6 SAE OW 30 VW 502 00 505 00 VW 502 00 2 0 1 147 kw TSI appl
70. on the B column cladding CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Deactivating airbags 21 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 21 Deactivating airbags Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones below gt If using a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat due to different legal regulations the airbag must be deactivated if using a forwards facing child seat in some countries page 22 Transporting children safely gt If it is not possible to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the mid dle of the steering wheel and chest despite the driver s seat being correctly adjusted gt If special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a physical disability gt If different seats have been fitted e g orthopaedic seats without side air bags The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key operated switch page 21 Deactivating the front passenger airbag We recommend that you ask a SKODA service partner to deactivate any other airbags Monitoring the airbag system The operational capability of the airbag system is monitored electronically even if one of the airbags is switched off Airbag deactivated using diagnostic equipment gt The warning light 2 illuminates for approx 4 seconds after switching on the ignition and then flashes again for approx 12 seconds Front passenger ai
71. on the controls and switches are the same as for left hand drive models Cockpit e 29 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Overview Revolution counter Speedometer Coolant temperature gauge Display Fuel gauge Counter for distance driven Display of the second speed Display in rear centre console Auto Check Control Fault display The Error message will appear in the display if there is a fault in the instru ment cluster Ensure that the fault is rectified as soon as possible by a special ist workshop HE WARNING Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully responsible for road safety Never operate the controls in the instrument cluster while driving risk of accident Operate the controls only when the vehicle is at a standstill 1 Applies for vehicles with a segment display 30 Operation Overview SD a a SA Dy 1 min x 100 A T N 3 Vly Ve 2 gt Fig 21 Instrument cluster aa MM E Niles Read and observe H on page 30 first Engine revolutions counter page 31 gt with warning lights page 34 Speedometer page 31 gt with warning lights page 34 Button for display mode gt Time settings page 32 gt Enable disable the display of the second speed page 33 gt Service intervals Display of the number of days an
72. only while the model is still in production but with wear and tear parts for at least 15 years after the end of series production and with all other vehicle parts for at least 10 years SKODA service partners are liable for any defects in SKODA original parts for a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with materials defect liability under the law unless otherwise agreed in the purchase agreement You should keep the confirmed warranty certificate and the receipt for these components for this period so that the commencement of the warranty term may be verified Body repairs SKODA vehicles are designed so that if the body suffers damage it is only nec essary to replace those parts which are in fact damaged Before you decide to have damaged body parts replaced however you should first contact your specialist garage to determine whether or not such parts can also be repaired Repairs to body parts are usually cheaper SKODA Original accessories A Read and observe H on page 173 first If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle you should remember the follow ing We recommend that you use SKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle SKODA AUTO a s offers a warranty on the reliability safety and suitability for your particular vehicle of these accessories Although we constantly monitor the market we are not able to assess or offer a warranty on other products even though in some instances such products may have a type approval or
73. other repair work e g removal of the steering wheel must only be carried out by a specialist garage Modifications repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults and can also se riously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system risk of accident and fatal injury The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed Airbag modules cannot be repaired H WARNING Information on the use of the airbag system a t is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been removed from old cars or have been recycled Never install damaged airbag parts in the vehicle The airbags may then not be deployed properly or even at all in the event of an accident No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system E WARNING A change to the vehicle s wheel suspension including the use of non ap proved wheels and tyre combinations can alter the functioning of the air bag system risk of accident and fatal injury Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork Car care 175 E WARNING The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the front doors For this reason no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or door panels e g installation of additional lou
74. passenger seat page 20 Deactivating airbags Never use a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the pas senger airbag is activated This child safety seat is positioned in the deploy ment area of the front passenger airbag The airbag may cause the child se vere or even fatal injuries in the event of it being deployed a This fact is also indicated by the sticker that can be found in one of the following locations On the B column on the front passenger side Fig 14 The sticker is visible upon opening the front passenger door On the front passenger s sun visor In some countries the sticker is lo cated on the front passenger s sun visor Fig 15 a With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3 make sure that the loop around fittings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the same height as the loop around fittings on the B pillar on the passen ger side a As soon as the rear facing child seat is no longer being used on the pas senger seat the front passenger airbag should be reactivated again 24 Safety Use of the child seat in the front passenger seat Applies to Taiwan Fig 16 Front passenger sun visor label A Read and observe H and on page 22 first No babies infants or children are to be carried on the passenger seat This fact is also indicated by the label that can be found on the passenger s sun visor Fig 16 Child safety and side airbag Fig 17 I
75. s seat and the external mirrors assume the positions stor ed in the memory of this key Saving front passenger mirror settings when reversing Above the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror down The lowering func tion for the mirror on the passenger side when reversing must be ena bled page 47 gt Unlock the vehicle using the respective remote control key gt Switch on the ignition gt Turn the knob for the external mirror control to the position for the passen ger side mirror adjustment page 80 gt Engage reverse gear gt Adjust the front passenger s mirror to the desired position page 80 gt Disengage reverse gear The adjusted position of the exterior mirror is stored in the remote control key memory Disable the function of automatic storage gt Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key gt Press and hold the button A Fig 71 on page 84 At the same time press the button 8 on the remote control key within 10 seconds The successful deactivation of the automatic storage function for each key is confirmed by an acoustic signal Stopping the ongoing adjustment gt Press any button on the driver s seat or the button 3 on the remote control key CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Seat heaters 85 Ventilated front seats 86 1 The vehicle must be locked and unlocked with the same key to save the seat and exterior mirror pos
76. safely Adjust the seats and head restraints page 81 Examples of incorrect seated positions AN Read and observe H on page 9 first Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if seat belts are fastened cor rectly Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing of the seat belt The driver is fully responsible for himself and passengers especially children Never allow a passenger to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is moving The following list contains instructions which if not observed may cause seri ous injuries or death This list is not complete however we would like you to familiarise yourself with this subject Observe the following instructions while driving Do not stand up Do not stand on the seats Do not kneel on the seats Do not tilt the seat backrest too far back Do not lean against the dash panel Do not lie on the rear seats Do not sit only on the front part of the seat Do not sit facing to the side ee ee oS KKK KR KK Do not lean out of the window Do not put your feet out of the window Do not put your feet on the dash panel Do not put your feet on the seat cushion Do not allow anybody to travel in the footwell Do not drive without fastening your seat belt Do not delay in the luggage compartment Passive Safety 11 CQ Introduction
77. service position Service position for changing wiper blades gt Close the bonnet gt Switch the ignition on and off again gt Within 10 seconds press the lever in position 4 and hold it in position for around 2 seconds Fig 63 on page 78 Move the windscreen wiper arms into the service position Removing the wiper blade gt Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen gt Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and unlock the securing mechanism 1 Fig 197 gt Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 2 Fitting the wiper blade gt Push the wiper blade in until it latches on the stop gt Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the wiper arm back to the windscreen gt Turn on the ignition and press the lever into position 4 Fig 63 on page 78 Move the windscreen wiper arms into the home position Replacing the rear window wiper blade Fig 198 Rear window wiper blade QN Read and observe H on page 218 first Removing the wiper blade gt Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen gt Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and unlock the securing mechanism 1 Fig 198 gt Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 2 Fitting the wiper blade gt Push the wiper blade in until it latches on the stop gt Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the wiper arm back to the windscreen Emergency e
78. soon as the engine has started Through this the engine rea ches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower FJ Note The system is protected against inadvertently switching off the engine while driving this means that the engine can only be switched off in an emergen cy page 143 After switching off the ignition the radiator fan can intermittently continue to operate for approx 10 minutes Under certain circumstances e g after switching off the ignition and opening the driver s door the steering is enabled only when the ignition is switched on or the engine is started Steering lock unlock fer A Read and observe H and on page 140 first The steering lock steering lock deters attempted theft of your vehicle Locking gt Stop the vehicle gt Switch off the engine or the ignition by pressing the starter button Fig 135 gt Open the driver door The steering is locked automatically If the driver s door is opened and the ignition is switched off afterwards the steering is only locked after the vehicle is locked Unlocking gt Open the driver s door and get into the vehicle gt Close the driver s door The steering is unlocked within 2 seconds If the system does not unlock the steering at the first time for example when the front wheels are in contact with an obstacle then two more unlocking at tempts are performed automatically If the steering
79. that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head C Fig 1 on page 9 Correctly fasten the seat belt page 12 Adjust the seats and head restraints page 81 In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactiva ted page 20 Deactivating airbags H WARNING s Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard a Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven nev er place your feet on the instrument panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it be comes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If an air bag is deployed you could suffer fatal injuries by adopting an incorrect seated position Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats QN Read and observe H on page 9 first To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following v Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of the head C Fig 10n page 9 Y Correctly fasten the seat belt page 12 v Usea suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehi cle page 22 Transporting children
80. the arrow 1 and remove it from the mounts on the right seat backrests in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 121 Fitting gt Insert the recesses on the housing A Fig 121 into the mounts on the rear seat backrests gt Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 as far as the stop gt Fold the rear seats back into their original positions page 87 CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Attachment points 109 Roof load 109 E WARNING The transported items on the roof rack must be securely attached risk of accident a Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps or tensioning straps E WARNING Continued a Distribute the load evenly over the roof rack system a When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on the roof rack system handling of the car may change as a result of the dis placement of the centre of gravity The style of driving and speed must therefore be adapted to the current circumstances a Avoid abrupt and sudden driving braking manoeuvres Adjust the speed and driving style to the visibility weather road and traf fic conditions The permissible roof load permissible axle loads and permissible total ve hicle weight must not be exceeded under any circumstances risk of acci dent TE CAUTION Only roof racks from the KODA Original Accessories range shou
81. the stored telephones Connect Connection with the telephone Disconnect Disconnection of telephone Rename Rename the telephone Delete Delete the telephone New user Search for new mobile phones that are in the reception range Visibility Switches on the visibility of the hands free system for other devi ces Media player Media player Active device Connected device Paired devices List of paired devices Connect Connection with the device Rename Rename the device Delete Delete the device Authorisation Authorise the device Search Search for available media players a Visibility Switch on the visibility of the hands free system for media play ers in the vicinity Modem overview of the active and paired devices for the connection to the internet Active device Connected device Paired devices List of paired devices Phone name option to change the name of the phone default SKODA_BT WLAN Wi Fi menu item page 131 Use WLAN network in MAXI DOT display Settings The following menu items can be selected from the Settings menu item Phone book Phonebook Update Read in the phone book Select memory Select memory with phone contacts SIM amp phone Download the contacts of the SIM card and the phone SIM card Download the contacts from the SIM card Phone Initial setting to also import contacts from the SIM card it is nec essary to switch to the SIM amp
82. this command a telephone number can be entered to establish a connection with the reques ted party After this command the system calls the last dial led number DIAL NUMBER REDIAL The system reads out contacts from the telephone book The system reads the messages which were re ceived while the telephone was connected to the control unit READ ADDRESS BOOK READ MESSAGES Play music from the mobile phone or another a MUSIC paired device The help is significantly reduced good operating SHORT DIALOGUE knowledge provided After this command the system offers additional context dependent commands Selection for setting Bluetooth dialogue etc FURTHER OPTIONS SETTINGS CANCEL The dialogue is ended a On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system this function can be accessed via the naviga tion system menu refer to the Operating instructions for the Amundsent navigation system If a voice command is not detected the system answers with Pardon anda new entry can be made After the 2nd unsuccessful attempt the system re peats the help After the 3rd unsuccessful attempt the answer Cancelled is given and the dialogue is ended Store voice recording of a contact If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts you can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book Voice tag Record menu item
83. to the P position vehicles with an automatic gearbox CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Manual gear changing 144 Pedals 145 Manual gear changing 2 JEN B Gearshift pattern of 5 gear or 6 gear manual gearbox Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down This prevents uneven wear on the clutch The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear page 43 Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary Depress the clutch pedal and hold it fully depressed Wait a moment before reverse gear is engag ed to avoid any shift noises The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged provided the ignition is on HH WARNING Never engage reverse gear when driving risk of accident EH CAUTION If not in the process of changing gear do not leave your hand on the gearshift lever while driving The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mech anism to wear excessively Pedals The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances In the driver s footwell only a footmat which is attached to the two corre sponding attachment points may be used Only use footmats from the range of KODA Original Accessories which are fit ted to two attachment points EN WARNING No objects are allowed in the driver s footwell risk of obstruction or limi tation in operating the pedals CQ Introduction Th
84. to the neck area The head airbag also offers additional protection in the case of an offset im pact by covering the front door pillar 20 Safety WARNING There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head air bags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing Additionally clothes hangers must not be used to hang up items of clothing The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head airbags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of it being deployed When the deployed head airbag is inflated parts of the fitted accessories could be thrown into the interior of the car and injure the occupants The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the deployment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed There must not be any further persons animals or objects positioned be tween the seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag In ad dition none of the occupants should lean their head out of the window when driving or extend their arms and hands out of the window In vehicles with head airbags the lettering AIRBAG can be seen
85. trims before installing the snow chains page 200 E WARNING Observe the national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chains CAUTION The chains are to be removed when driving on snow free paths They would otherwise cause loss of performance and damage the tyres Wheels 203 Ji Emergency equipment and self help Emergency equipment CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle 204 fire extinguisher 204 Vehicle tool kit 205 Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle B3T 0668 Fig 175 Stowage compartment for the first aid kit Superb Superb Com bi Fig 176 Placing of the warning triangle B3T 0427 204 Do it yourself First aid box The compartment for stowing the first aid box is located in the right of the boot Fig 175 Warning triangle The warning triangle can be attached to the rear wall trim panel with rubber Straps Fig 17 H WARNING The first aid kit and warning triangle must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants FI Note Pay attention to the expiration date of the first aid kit a We recommend using a first aid kit from SKODA Original Accessories which are available from a SKODA Partner fire extinguisher Fig 177 Fire extinguisher The fir
86. type of mobile phone After the telephone s first connection to the hands free system the phone book from the phone and the SIM card loads into the hands free memory Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands free system an update of the relevant phone book is performed The updating can take a few minutes During this period the available phone book is the one stored at the previous update Newly stored telephone numbers are only shown after the updating has ended The update is interrupted if a telephone event e g incoming or outgoing call voice control dialogue occurs during the updating procedure After the tele phone event has ended the updating starts anew GSM Il The internal phonebook provides 2 500 free memory locations Each contact can contain up to 4 numbers On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system a maximum of 1 200 telephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance If the number of loaded contacts exceeds 2 500 the phone book is not com plete GSM Ill The internal phonebook provides 2000 free memory locations Each contact can contain up to 5 numbers On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system a maximum of 1000 telephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance If the mobile phone s telephone book has more than 2 000 contacts the fol lowing message will appear in the MAXI DOTdisplay Phone book not fully loaded 1 Depe
87. use of the cooling system are to be observed a The difference between the indoor temperature and the outdoor air temperature should not be greater than about 5 C The cooling system is to be turned off about 10 minutes before the end of the journey Once a year a disinfection of the air conditioner or the Climatronic is to be carried out by a specialist company 110 Operation EE CAUTION a The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free e g of ice snow or leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly a After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle This is not a leak FI Note The exhaust air streams out through vents at the rear of the luggage com partment We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the interior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air condition ing system This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning sys tem is operating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense replacement of compressor Air outlets Fig 123 Air vents at the front a r I 6 fi 9 V4 Fig 124 Air vents at the rear A Read and observe H and on page 110 first Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the opened a
88. vehicle Only use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power sockets Only use accessories that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with the applicable directives a Switch off the devices connected to the power sockets before you switch the ignition on or off and before starting the engine to avoid damage from voltage fluctuations Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices Storage compartment under the front armrest Fig 88 Armrest Stowage compartment EE AN Read and observe H on page 89 first Opening gt Pull and open the cover of the armrest using the handle A in the direction of the arrow Fig 88 Closing gt Open the lid to the stop only then can it be folded downwards and against the direction of the arrow Fig 88 The sockets marked AUX AUX input and the MDI input are located in the stor age compartment EF Note The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light which illuminates when the parking light is on Storage net in front centre console Fig 89 Front centre console Storage net A Read and observe H on page 89 first E WARNING Only store soft objects with a total weight of 0 5 kg in the storage net Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION Do not place any sharp objects into the net risk of net damage Glasses storage box Fig 90 Opening the glasses storage box LE A a _
89. vehicle from the inside Fig 35 Central locking button ee CQ Read and observe H on page 51 first If the vehicle was not locked from the outside it can also be unlocked and locked with the rocker switch on the door opening lever of the driver or front passenger door Fig 35 even without the ignition switched on While a door is opened the vehicle cannot be locked Locking gt Press the button Fig 35 press The symbol in the button illuminates Unlocking gt Press the button Fig 35 press The symbol in the button goes out The following applies if your vehicle has been locked using the central locking button gt It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside safety feature e g when stopping at traffic lights etc gt The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the opening lever of the respective door gt In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle HE WARNING Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency risk to life a If the safe lock system is switched on page 54 the door opening lever and the central locking buttons do not operate Fig 36 Child safety lock Left rear door A Read and observe H on page 51 first The child safety lock prev
90. whole number at once or in the form of digital blocks sepa rated by short pauses After each order of digits separation through brief voice pause all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system 1 Not valid for vehicles with the Columbus navigation system 132 Operation The digits 0 9 symbols gt are permitted The system detects no continu ous digit combinations such as twenty three but only individually spoken dig its two three Activating voice control GSM II Briefly press button 1 Fig 130 on the multifunction steering wheel Deactivating voice control GSM II If the system is currently playing a message you will need to end the message currently being played by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multi function steering wheel If the system is expecting a voice command you can end the dialogue yourself as follows gt With the CANCEL voice command gt Briefly press button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel Activating voice control GSM III The dialogue can be started at any time by pressing the button 1 Fig 130 on the multifunction steering wheel Deactivating voice control GSM III If the system is currently playing a message the message that is currently be ing played must be terminated by pressing the button 1 Fig 130 on the multi function steering wheel If the system is expecting a voice command you can end the dialogue yourself as foll
91. win dows at the rear doors are activated again by pressing the safety push button S again If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated the warning light 6 in the safety switch S illuminates Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear doors Fig 45 Button in the rear door AN Read and observe H and H on page 62 first There is a button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors for that window Opening gt Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has moved into the desired position Releasing the button causes the window to stop immediately The window can be completely opened automatically by briefly pressing the button as far as the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately Closing gt Pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold until the window has moved into the desired position Releasing the button causes the window to stop immediately The window can also be fully closed automatically by pulling the button up to the stop Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immedi ately Force limit A Read and observe H and M on page 62 first The electrical power window system is fitted with a force limiter It reduces the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres
92. with the ignition off or when the ignition is on and travelling at a speed of more than 5 km h Stopping the ongoing adjustment gt Press any button on the driver s seat or the button 3 on the remote control key Note Each time you store the seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward you also have to restore the setting of the individual exterior mirror on the passenger side for reversing Memory function of the remote control key CQ Read and observe H on page 81 first The automatic storage of the driver s seat and exterior mirror positions when locking the vehicle can be turned on in the memory of the remote control key afterwards only as function of automatic storage Enable automatic storage gt Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key gt Press and hold any memory button B Fig 71 on page 84 gt After the seat has assumed the position stored under this button at the same time press the button 8 on the remote control key within 10 seconds The successful activation of the automatic storage function for each key is confirmed by an acoustic signal Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward gt Enable automatic storage When automatic storage is activated the current positions of the driver s seat and the external mirrors are saved in the memory of the remote control key each time the vehicle is locked When the vehicle is next unlocked using the same key the driver
93. with your fingers On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox the selector lever must be moved into the position P before unlocking Unlocking the boot lid gt Press the button in the handle of the boot lid page 57 If the vehicle is locked via the sensor B it is not possible to unlock it again in the following 2 seconds via the sensor A prevents accidental unlocking EE CAUTION Do not use objects which might prevent direct contact between the hand and the grip sensor Some types of gloves can impair the function of the grip sensor After leaving the car there is no automatic locking The vehicle cannot be locked if the ignition has not been turned off Information messages KESSY N Read and observe H on page 51 first Key in the vehicle The protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle unlocks the vehicle automatically if the following condition is met J The vehicle including the boot lit has been locked The turn signal lights flash four times as confirmation that the vehicle has been unlocked again The following message is shown in the instrument cluster display Key in vehicle 6 KEY IN VEHICLE An audible signal sounds additionally on vehicles which are fitted with the an ti theft alarm system System fault If there is a fault in the system the following message will appear in the dis play of the instrument cluster Keyless access system faulty CHECK KEYL
94. 0 1700 5000 4 1984 Performance and Weights Superb DSG6 Superb Combi DSG6 Top speed km h 240 238 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 7 7 7 8 Operating weight kg depending on equipment 1540 1698 1562 1720 configuration Permissible trailer load braked kg 1600 1800 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Slopes up to 12 b Slopes up to 8 232 Technical data 3 6 Itr 191 kW FSI engine Number of cylinders displacement cm Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm 191 6000 350 2500 5000 6 3597 Performance and Weights Superb DSG6 4 x 4 Superb Combi DSG6 4 x 4 Top speed km h 250 250 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 6 4 6 5 Operating weight kg depending on equipment 1704 1860 1726 1882 configuration Permissible trailer load braked kg 2000 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 750 1 6 1 77 kW TDI CR engine Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 7714400 250 1500 2500 4 1598 Performance and Weights Top speed km h Superb MG6 Superb DSG7 194 197 193 Superb Combi MG6 Superb Combi DSG7 192 195 192 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 12 1 12 2 12 2 12 2 12 3 12 3 Operating weight kg depending on equipment configuration 1512 1670 1519 1615 a 1534 1692 1541 1699 Ae Permissible trailer load braked kg Permissible traile
95. 1 Fig 134 on page 139 For vehicles with automatic transmission the ignition key can only be removed if the selector lever is in position P CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Steering lock unlock 141 Ignition on off 141 Starting the engine 142 Switching off the engine 142 Emergency start up of the engine 142 Emergency ignition shutoff system 143 1 Applies to vehicles with START STOP system 140 Driving The KESSY system Keyless Entry Exit System hereinafter referred to only as system allows the switching on or switching off of the ignition and starting or stopping of the engine without the active use of the key A key must be in the vehicle to unlock the steering switch on the ignition and start the vehicle When travelling the key must be in the vehicle The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after starting the cold engine This is quite normal and is not an operating problem H WARNING Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle Unauthor ized persons such as children for example could lock the car turn on the ignition or start the engine there is a danger of injury and accidents Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running there is a risk of theft etc Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary risk of acci dent E WARNING Never leave the
96. 169 Battery In the remote control key 215 Replace the remote control of the auxiliary heater parking heater 216 Belts 12 Belt tensioners 15 Bonnet Closing 187 Opening 187 Warning light 36 Boot Automatic retraction Superb Combi 101 Extending variable loading floor 105 Folding hook 99 Non closable side pocket Superb Combi 102 Removable Light Superb Combi 103 Roll up boot cover Superb Combi 101 Side compartment with battery 102 Boot cover Superb Combi 101 Boot lid 57 automatic locking 58 Warning light 36 Superb Combi 58 Brake booster 144 Brake fluid 192 Checking 193 Information messages 35 specification 193 Brake linings warning light 41 Brakes Brake assist systems 154 Brake booster 144 Brake fluid 193 Handbrake 144 Information messages 35 Running in 149 Warning light 35 Braking Information on braking 143 Break recommendation See Fatigue detection 165 Button in the driver s door Electrical power windows 61 C Car care 173 Jack 180 Car computer See multifunction display 44 Car park ticket holder 89 Carrier Roof rack 108 Cavity protection 180 CD changer 136 Central locking 50 Central locking button 55 Changing brake fluid 193 bulbs 223 Wheels 205 Changing a wheel Follow up work 206 Preliminary work 206 Remove
97. 4 Entry lighting 73 F Note With the ignition off the light turns off automatically after about 10 minutes Front interior light BS5E 0720 Fig 54 Operation of the front interior light Version 1 version 2 Rocker switch positions Fig 54 7 Switching on 0 Switching off Control with the door contact switch middle position There is no icon available for the center position operation with the door con tact switch in Version 2 Switch for reading lights 7 Switching left reading lamp on off Switching right reading lamp on off Conditions for operation of light with the door contact switch setting The system is turned on when any of the following is present gt The vehicle is unlocked gt One of the doors or the luggage compartment lid is being opened gt The ignition key is removed The system is turned off when any of the following is present gt The vehicle is locked gt The ignition is switched on gt About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed Lights and visibility 73 EF Note Two diffuse lights are integrated in the front interior lighting that illuminates the gearshift lever and the middle of the dash panel These are switched on automatically when the parking light is activated Also after switching on the ignition when the parking lights are switched on the door handle lighting illu minates Applies to vehicles without a panoramic sliding roof F
98. 5 1634 1792 1562 1720 1579 1735 1656 1814 Permissible trailer load braked kg Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 234 Technical data 1800 2000 1800 2000 Multi purpose vehicles AF MG6 1 4 1 92 kW TSI re DSG7 MG64x4 2073 2152 DSG6 2105 DSG6 4x4 2267 MG6 DSG7 2077 2084 2084 2 0 1 103 kW TDI MG6 MG64x4 CR 2097 2174 2 0 1 125 kW TDI MG6 DSG6 4x4 CR 2105 2199 a GreenLine 1 8 1 118 kW TSI 2 0 1 147 kW TSI 3 6 1 191 kW FSI 1 6 1 77 kW TDI CR Technical data 235 A Abroad Driving abroad 153 Unleaded petrol 153 ABS Operation 155 Warning light 38 Accessories 173 Adaptive headlights AHL 70 Adjust Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventila tion 119 Head restraints 83 Adjusting Belt height 15 Exterior mirrors 80 Interior mirror 79 Manual air conditioning 114 Seats 81 82 Steering wheel 10 Adjusting the seats 9 81 Adjustment Range of light 68 Aerial 177 See windows 179 AHL 70 Warning light 38 Airbag 16 Deactivating 21 Deactivating the front passenger airbag lt 21 Deployment 16 Front airbag 17 Head airbag 20 Indicator light 40 Knee airbag 18 Modifications and damage to the airbag system 175 Auto Check Control Side airbag 236 Index
99. 68 Travel mode 71 Light bulbs Rear light Superb Combi 226 Lighting Luggage compartment 97 Lights 67 Adaptive headlights AFS 70 Automatic driving lamp control 70 Daylight running 69 Fog lights 71 Hazard warning light system 72 Headlight flasher 69 Main beam 69 Parking lights 73 Rear fog light 71 Replacing bulbs 223 Tourist lights 71 Turn signal 69 Warning lights 34 Lock Vehicle key 51 Locking Individual settings 54 KESSY 53 Remote control 52 Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the in side 55 Locking the door without a locking cylinder Emergency 217 Long cargo channel 96 Low beam 68 Warning light 41 Low tyre pressure warning refer to the tyre pressure monitoring 165 Luggage compartment J7 Class N1 vehicles 98 Cover 100 Emergency unlocking 217 Fastening elements 99 Fix floor covering 100 Fixing nets 99 Lighting 97 Luggage net 100 see boot lid 57 Side pockets 101 Unlocking the boot lid 217 Variable loading floor 104 Luggage compartment cover 100 Luggage compartment lid 57 Luggage net 100 M Main beam 69 Warning light 41 Maintenance 151 Decorative films 179 Manual air conditioning adjusting 114 Recirculated air mode 114 Manual gear changing see gear changing 144 Manually setting air conditioning Control elements Tz MAXI DOT See MAXI DOT
100. 8 Windscreen washers Windscreen washers 78 Windscreen washer system 188 Windscreen wiper Replacing the rear window wiper blade 219 Windscreen wipers Operating 78 Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 219 Windscreen washer fluid 188 Windscreen wipers and washers 77 Winter De icing windows 179 Winter operation 203 Snow chains 203 Winter tyres 203 Winter tyres See Wheels 203 WLAN 130 MAXI DOT 131 Network connection 130 Switching off 130 Switching on 130 Index 245 246 Index Reprinting reproduction translation or any other use either in whole or in Issued by KODA AUTO a s part is not permitted without the written consent of SKODA AUTO a s KODA AUTO as 2014 SKODA AUTO a s expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws Subject to change SKODA Service App SKODA service in your pocket The application SKODA service is provided for Smartphones with Android or iPhone systems This task is mainly to help you as a customer of SKODA AUTO in difficult situations when on the road My Dealer select your preferred dealer and read about their current offer or SKODA news Assistance Contact a breakdown recovery service find the nearest dealer when on the road and use the service Parking Helper My car the complete operating instructions and a summary list of all the warning lights for a quick overview a guide for med
101. 94 Front passenger airbag 17 Air outlet vent 110 llS a a Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag in front passenger storage compartment 2 Door opening lever Electric exterior mirror adjustment 21 Light switch 68 22 Bonnet release lever 187 23 Regulator for the instrument lighting and regulator for the head light beam range adjustment 68 68 Storage compartment on the driver s side 89 25 Lever for adjusting the steering wheel 10 Driver s knee airbag 18 Ignition lock 139 Pedals 145 Handbrake 144 Bars with buttons depending on the equipment fitted gt amp START STOP 162 gt d Tyre pressure loss indicator 165 gt ASR Traction control ASR 155 gt amp Electronic Stability Control ESC 154 gt Pe Park Assist 157 gt Pw Parking aid 156 gt Tailgate operation Superb Combi 59 31 Depending on equipment fitted gt Gearshift lever manual gearbox 144 gt Selector lever automatic gearbox 145 32 Depending on equipment fitted gt Ashtrays 91 gt Stowage compartment 90 33 Warning light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag __ 21 Depending on equipment fitted gt Operating controls for the air conditioning system 112 gt Operating controls for Climatronic 115 F Note The arrangement of the controls right hand drive models may differ from th layout shown in Fig 20 The symbols
102. Button wheel Action Audio sources DVD video Navigation Fig 131 Turn downwards Decrease volume Skip to next chan nel Skip to next chap without function ter Skip to next track Skip to next channel Press briefly Stop traffic report Press button for a long period of without function Fast forward without function time without function l Switch to previous Switch to start of Switch to previous Switch to previous channel channel track chapter Stop traffic report Press briefly Press button for a long period of without function Fast rewind without function time Switch to the previous station and at the Turn upwards same time display list of saved available stations Switch to the next station and at the same Turn downwards time display list of saved available stations Press briefly Call up the main menu Skip to next chan Skip to next chap Show the option nel ter to stop naviga tion or display Switch to previous Switch to start of Switch to previous the list of recent channel track chapter destinations Skip to next track a To go to the previous track press the adjustment wheel twice or rotate it by two positions AUX and MDlinputs For a description of use refer to the relevant operating instructions for the ra dio or navigation system The AUX and MDI inputs are used to connect external audio sources e g iPod or m
103. Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum speed of 80 km h 50 mph CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Jump starting using the battery from another vehicle 211 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system 212 Jump starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot 212 The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump start your vehicle if the en gine will not start because the battery is flat WARNING Pay attention to the warning instructions relating to work in the engine compartment page 186 a A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be low 0 C If the battery is frozen do not jump start with the battery of an other vehicle there is a risk of explosion Keep any sources of ignition naked flame smouldering cigarettes etc away from the battery risk of explosion Never jump start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels risk of explosion and chemical burns The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly Note We recommend you buy jump start cables from a car battery specialist Jump starting using the battery from another vehicle Fig 184 Jump starting A flat battery B battery providing current AN Read and observe H on page 211 first The starting process using the battery of another vehicle requires the use of jumper cables The j
104. ESS Low voltage of the key battery If the voltage of the battery in the remote control key is too low the following message appears in the display of the instrument cluster Change the key battery KEY BATTERY Unlocking andopening 53 Change the key battery page 215 Safe securing A Read and observe H on page 51 first The door locks are blocked automatically if the vehicle is locked from the out side The vehicle cannot now be opened from the inside This fact is pointed out by the following message on the display of the instru ment cluster after switching off the ignition Check SAFELOCK Owner s manual CHECK DEADLOCK Switching off The safe lock can be switched off in one of the following ways gt By locking twice within 2 seconds gt By disabling the interior monitoring page 56 Interior monitor and towing protection If the vehicle is locked and the SafeLock system is switched off the door can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on the opening lever Switching on The safelock switches on automatically the next time the vehicle is locked and unlocked Switch on display The warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals Switch off display The warning light in the driver door flashes fast for about 2 seconds goes out and starts to flash regularly at longer intervals after about 30 seconds WARNIN
105. G If the car is locked and the SafeLock system activated no one may remain in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or opena window from the inside The locked doors make it more difficult for rescu ers to get into the vehicle in an emergency risk to life 54 Operation Note This function applies only to vehicles with specific equipment or for some countries Individual settings A Read and observe H on page 51 first The following central locking functions can be set via the MAXI DOT dis play page 47 Settings Opening a single door This function makes it possible to only unlock the driver s door The other doors and the boot lid remain locked and are only unlocked after being opened again Unlocking a vehicle side door This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver s side The other doors and the boot lid remain locked and are only unlocked after being opened again Automatic locking unlocking All doors are locked from a speed of around 15 km h The button in the handle of the boot lid is deactivated If the ignition key is withdrawn the car is then automatically unlocked again In addition it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the car by pressing the central locking button Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle The vehicle doors can be unlocked and opened at any time by pulling once on the door opening lever Locking unlocking the
106. N Do not use any insect sponges rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning products risk of damaging the paintwork surface Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned For the sake of the environment Used cans of vehicle care product represent hazardous waste that is harmful to the environment These must be disposed of in accordance with national legislation Note Because of the special tools and knowledge required and to avoid any poten tial problems with the cleaning and care of your vehicle exterior we recom mend that cleaning and care of your vehicle be carried out by a SKODA Service Partner Taking care of your vehicle s paintwork A Read and observe H and on page 177 first Minor paint damage such as scratches scuffs or stone chips should be treated immediately if possible using touch up pens or sprays Preserving the vehicle paintwork A thorough wax treatment provides the vehicle s paintwork with highly effec tive protection against harmful environmental influences The vehicle must be treated with a high quality hard wax polish at the latest when no more drops form on the clean paintwork A new layer of a high quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean body work after it has dried thoroughly Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax Polishing Polishing is necessary if th
107. N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light A is illuminated as a reminder for the driver and front pas senger to fasten their seat belts The warning light 4 goes out after the respective seat belt has been fas tened If the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and the vehicle speed is more than 20 km h the warning light 4 flashes and you will hear an acoustic warning signal The warning signal is switched off and the warning light 4 remains perma nently illuminated if the driver and front passenger have not fastened their seat belts within the next 90 seconds t Generator N Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light is illuminated when the engine is running the vehicle battery is not being charged Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately The electrical system re quires checking CAUTION Do not continue driving if the amp warning light coolant system fault illumi nates in addition to the warning light while you are driving Stop the engine there is a risk of engine damage Seek help from a specialist garage Instruments and Indicator Lights 35 c2 Door open A Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light illuminates if one or several doors are opened s 7 Engine oil pressure A Read and observe H on page 35 first When the warning light is flashing the engine oil pressure is too low The following message is shown i
108. NING Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully responsible for the operation of your vehicle Even at temperatures of around 4 C there may still be black ice on the road surface You should therefore not rely solely on the outside tempera ture display for accurate information as to whether there is ice on the road 44 Operation Note In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of measures a f the display of the second speed is activated in mph the current speed is not indicated in km h on the display a The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated Memory 14 18 Fig 29 Multi function display memory display Rychlost s Om 22 9 kmh 1255 N Read and observe H on page 44 first In memory the values of elements of the multifunction display e g average fuel consumption are recorded The multifunction display is equipped with two memories 1 and 2 Display of the selected memory in the display at position A Fig 29 1 Single trip memory 2 Total trip memory Select memory gt Select the corresponding element of the multifunction display page 45 Confirm the element again to switch between the individual memories Resetting gt Select the corresponding element of the multifunction display page 45 gt Select the desired memory gt Press and hold button B or adjustment wheel D Fig 27 on page 42 Single tri
109. Note The light switch is in position 20 or AUTO and the ignition is turned off the low beam is switched off automatically and the status light is lit The parking light goes out after the ignition key is removed a f there is a fault in the light switch the low beam illuminates automatically Daylight running lights DAY LIGHT N Read and observe H on page 67 first The daytime running lights hereafter only function provide lighting for the front of the vehicle The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met JV The light switch is in the position 0 or AUTO Fig 49 on page 68 v The ignition is switched on v The parking aid is activated Deactivating the function gt Switch off the ignition gt Pull the turn signal and main beam lever Fig 50 on page 69 towards the steering wheel push down and hold in this position gt Switch on the ignition gt Hold the lever in this position for at least 3 seconds after switching on the ignition Activating the function gt Switch off the ignition gt Pull the turning signal and main beam lever towards the steering wheel push it up and hold it in this position gt Switch on the ignition gt Hold the lever in this position for at least 3 seconds after switching on the ignition On vehicles with MAXI DOT display the function can be enabled or disabled in the menu item Dayl dri light page 47 HH WARNING When the daytime
110. Partners are equipped with modern specially developed tools and equipment Here trained specialists have access to a comprehensive range of SKODA Original Parts and SKODA Original Accessories for carrying out modifications repairs and technical alterations All SKODA service partners operate according to the latest guidelines and in structions from KODA AUTO a s All service and repair work is therefore car ried out on time and to the appropriate quality Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition SKODA Service Partners are therefore properly prepared to service your vehicle and to provide quality work We therefore advise you to have all modifications repairs and technical alterations to your vehicle carried out by a SKODA Service Partner SKODA Original parts A Read and observe H on page 173 first We recommend the use of SKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle since these parts are approved by KODA AUTO a s They correspond exactly to KODA AUTO a s specifications in respect of design dimensional accuracy and materi al and are identical to the components used in the batch production 174 General Maintenance SKODA AUTO a s can guarantee the safety suitability and long life of these products We therefore recommend that you only use SKODA Genuine Parts SKODA AUTO a s supplies the market with a complete range of SKODA Genu ine Parts not
111. RNING Information for working in the engine compartment Keep all people especially children away from the engine compartment Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is still warm The fan might suddenly start running Do not touch any hot engine parts risk of burns The coolant is harmful to health a Avoid contact with the coolant a Coolant vapours are harmful to health a Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the engine is still warm The cooling system is pressurized When opening the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir cover it with a cloth to protect your face hands and arms from hot steam or hot Opening and closing the bonnet 187 Engine compartment overview 188 Radiator fan 8B Windscreen washer system 188 WARNING Injuries or scolding or risks of accident or fire may occur when working in the engine compartment For this reason it is essential to comply with the warning instructions outlined below and with the general applicable safety rules The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area E WARNING Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment Turn off the engine and withdraw the ignition key Firmly apply the handbrake 186 General Maintenance coolant a f any coolant splashes into your eyes immediately rinse out your eyes with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible Always keep the coolant in the origi
112. Read and observe H and on page 176 first The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system e g closing the windows and the sliding tilt ing roof etc If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts such as a spoiler roof rack system two way radio aerial etc it is best to consult the operator of the car wash system beforehand After an automatic wash with wax treatment the lips of the wipers should be cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose and then de greased HE WARNING Fold in the exterior mirrors to prevent damage before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system Never manually fold in electric exterior mirrors always use the electric controls Washing with a high pressure cleaner A Read and observe H and 1 on page 176 first When washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner the instructions for use of the equipment must be observed This applies in particular to the pres sure used and to the spraying distance Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft mate rials such as rubber hoses or insulation material H WARNING Never use circular spray nozzles or dirt cutters EE CAUTION f washing the vehicle in the winter using a hose or high pressure cleaner ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or the door panel joints risk of freez
113. SIMPLY CLEVER SKODA Superb Owner s Manual 3T0012720AH You have opted for a KODA our sincere thanks for your confidence in us The description of the vehicle operation important information about safety vehicle care mainte nance and self help as well as technical vehicle data are given in this manual Please read this Owner s Manual carefully because the operation in accordance with these instruc tions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle We hope you enjoy driving your SKODA and wish you a pleasant journey at all times Your KODA AUTO a s hereinafter referred to only as KODA or manufacturer 3T0012720AH Board literature Notes Structure and more information about the Operating Instructions Abbreviations Safety Passive Safety General information Correct and safe seated position Seat belts Using seat belts Inertia reels and belt tensioners Airbag system Description of the airbag system Airbag overview Deactivating airbags Transporting children safely Child seat Fastening systems Operation Cockpit Overview Instruments and Indicator Lights Instrument cluster Warning lights Information system Driver information system Multifunction display MFD 2 Table of Contents CO 0 12 15 16 16 17 20 22 22 25 eo 28 30 30 42 42 44 Unlocking and ope
114. Way 1 2 7 Q mA ESS mee 237 0688 N Read and observe H on page 30 first The fuel gauge Fig 24 only operates if the ignition is switched on The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres If the amount of fuel reaches the reserve area the pointer reaches the red scale range the indicator symbol is illuminated fi page 39 TE CAUTION Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring This can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine and the exhaust system Note After filling up it can occur that during dynamic driving e g numerous curves braking driving downhill and climbing a steep hill the fuel gauge indicates ap prox a fraction less When stopping or during less dynamic driving the fuel gauge displays the correct fuel level again This is not a fault 32 Operation Counter for distance driven Fig 25 96 3 BST 0689 N Read and observe H on page 30 first Display Fig 25 A Trip odometer Odometer Daily trip counter trip The counter indicates the distance you have driven since it was last reset in steps of 100 metres or 1 10 of a mile Reset trip meter gt Press and hold button 7 Fig 21 on page 30 Odometer The odometer indicates the total distance which the vehicle has been driven Note If the second speed display is enabled on vehicles with a segment display this speed will be shown instead of the
115. allows you to lock and unlock all doors the fuel fill er flap and luggage compartment lid at the same time based on the current setting The safe securing system page 54 is integrated in the central locking sys tem Once the car is locked from the outside the door locks are automatically blocked by the safe securing system H The following is true after unlocking gt The doors the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are unlocked gt The interior light which is switched by the door contact illuminates gt The safe securing system is switched off gt The warning icon in the driver door stops flashing gt The anti theft alarm system is deactivated The following is true after locking gt The doors the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are locked gt The interior light switched by the door contact goes off gt The safe securing system is switched on gt The warning light in the driver door begins flashing gt The anti theft alarm system is activated Displaying an error If the warning icon in the driver s door initially flashes quickly for around 2 sec onds and then illuminates for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing again slowly you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage E WARNING Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle Unauthor ized persons such as children for example could lock the car turn on the ignition or start the engine t
116. alues is undertaken as follows gt Inflate all the tyres to the specified pressure gt Switch on the ignition gt Press and hold the symbol button ij Fig 154 The warning light in the instrument cluster illuminates An acoustic signal and the control indicator provide information about the storage of the tyre pressure values gt Release the symbol button The tyre pressure values are always stored in the system if one of the follow ing events occurs gt Change of tyre inflation pressure gt Changing one or more wheels gt Changing position of a wheel on the vehicle gt Illumination of the warning light in the instrument cluster U WARNING Before storing the pressures the tyres must be inflated to the specified in flation pressure page 198 When storing incorrect pressure values the system could possibly not issue any warnings even with a too low tyre pressure EE CAUTION The tyre pressure values are to be saved every 10 000 km or once annually to ensure correct system functioning 166 Driving CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Description 167 Adjusting the ready position 167 Fitting the ball head 168 Check proper fitting 168 Removing the ball head 169 Accessories 169 The maximum trailer drawbar load is 80 kg h H WARNING a Check that the ball head is seated correctly and is secured in the mount ing recess
117. an become damaged and fuel may escape risk of fire TE CAUTION a Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the exhaust system Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle s paintwork risk of paint damage a f the vehicle was not purchased in the country in which it was intended to be operated you should check whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is offered in the country where the vehicle will be operated You should also perhaps check whether the manufacturer has recommended a different fuel for operation of the vehicle in the country concerned If no prescribed fuel is available then you must check whether it is permitted by the manufacturer to operate the vehicle with another fuel type Inspecting and replenishing 183 Refuelling Fig 162 Open fuel filler flap tank cap A Read and observe H and on page 183 first Before refuelling switch off the auxiliary heating system auxiliary heating and ventilation page 119 gt Unlock the vehicle gt Press on the fuel filler flap in the direction of the arrow Fig 162 A gt Unscrew the filler cap by turning it in a counter clockwise direction and place the cap onto the top of the fuel filler flap Fig 162 B gt Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler tube as far as it will go The fuel tank is full jus
118. and stays on there may be a fault in the tyre pressure monitoring system gt Stop the vehicle turn the ignition off and start the engine again If the warning light flashes again after the engine has started there is a system error Seek help from a specialist garage The following reasons can explain the warning light 1 being illuminated gt The vehicle is loaded on one side Distribute loads as evenly as possible gt The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily e g when towing a trailer or when driving uphill or downhill gt Snow chains are mounted gt A wheel has been changed Store the tyre pressure values in the system page 166 EE CAUTION Under certain circumstances e g sporty style of driving wintry or unpaved roads the warning light in the instrument cluster can be delayed or does not light up at all Note The D warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched on if the vehi cle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected If the warning light does not go out after moving a short distance this means that there is an error in the system Seek help from a specialist garage lt gt Windscreen washer fluid level N Read and observe H on page 35 first If the windscreen washer fluid level is too low the warning light lt amp illumi nates The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Top up wash fluid Top up with liquid page 188 Windscreen washe
119. arking Finding a parking space Fig 149 System button display A Read and observe H and on page 158 first Finding a parallel parking space gt Drive past the parking space at up to 40 km h and a distance of 0 5 1 5 m gt Press the symbol buttononce Pe Fig 149 The display shows the following Fig 149 B Finding a perpendicular parking space gt Drive past the parking space at up to 20 km h and a distance of 0 5 1 5 m gt Press the symbol buttontwice Pe Fig 149 The display shows the following Fig 149 c The search area for the parking space on the driver s side is automatically indi cated on the display Activate the turn signal on the driver s side if you wish to park on this side of the road In the display the search area for the parking space is indicated on the driver s side If suitable parking space is found its parameters are stored until another suit able parking space has been found or until a distance of 10 m had been driven after finding the parking space If the driver changes the parking mode while searching for a parking space the symbol button Pe must be pressed again Note If the symbol km h is shown in the display the vehicle speed should be reduced below 40 km hr parallel parking or below 20 km hr Transverse parking Parking 0 eee Fig 150 Display A Read and observe H and M on page 158 first Display A Parking
120. arning light together with the warning light page 35 Brake system illuminates do not continue to drive Seek help from a specialist garage A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi cle s braking distance there is a risk of accident Rear fog light Q Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light 02 illuminates when the rear fog light is switched on 38 Operation Lamp failure A Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light illuminates if a lamp is faulty The warning light illuminates within a few seconds after switching on the ignition or when a light with a faulty lamp is switched on The following message may be shown in the MAXI DOT display for example INFORMATION Check front right low beam Adaptive headlights AHL N Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light flashes for 1 minute while driving or after switching on the ignition there is a problem with the adaptive headlights The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display No bend lighting AHL function Owner s manual When the AHL mode tourist light travel mode is active page 71 the warning light flashes for 10 seconds each time the ignition is switched on Exhaust inspection system N Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light is illuminated there is a fault in the exhaust inspection system The system allows the vehicle
121. as not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks the battery will discharge This is because certain electrical components consume electricity e g control units also in idle state Prevent the battery from discharging by disconnecting the battery s negative terminal or continuously charging the battery with a very low charging current a f the vehicle is frequently used for making short trips the vehicle battery will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge For the sake of the environment A vehicle battery that has been removed is a special type of hazardous waste These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations EF Note You should replace batteries older than 5 years Open cover Fig 169 Polyester cover of the vehicle battery plastic cover of the vehi cle battery N Read and observe H and H on page 194 first The battery is located in the engine compartment with some equipment under a polyester cover Fig 169or in the left side compartment of the luggage com partment page 101 Battery in the engine compartment gt Open the battery cover in the direction of the arrow Fig 169 Alor press the catch on the side of the battery cover in the direction Fig 169 B gt fold the cover up and remove The battery cover is installed in reverse order Battery in the boot The battery is located in the left side compartment with the symbol page 101 Vehicle
122. at is dry or has been moistened with water No objects such as cup hold ers mobile phone mounts etc must be attached to the covers of the air bag modules or be located within their immediate vicinity Never place objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module in the dash panel 18 Safety Note a In vehicles with head airbags the lettering AIRBAG can be seen on the steering wheel In vehicles with front passenger airbags the lettering AIRBAG is located on the dash panel on the passenger side Driver s knee airbag Fig 10 Installation of the airbag Safe distance from the switching panel The driver s knee airbag offers adequate protection for the driver s legs The driver s knee airbag A is located in the lower part of the dash panel below the steering column Fig 10 In the event of a severe frontal collision the driver s knee airbag and front air bags are deployed The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the legs of the driver is thus reduced HN WARNING a Adjust the driver s seat in a forward back direction so that there is a gap of at least 10 cm between the legs B and the dash panel in the vicinity of the knee airbag Fig 10 If itis not possible to meet this requirement due to your body size visit a specialist garage The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel be low th
123. ate deactivate and adjust the light duration of the COMING HOME function Further informa tion page 72 Coming Home Switch on off and adjust the light duration of the LEAVING HOME function Further informa tion page 72 Leaving Home Activate deactivate and adjust the footwell light in Footwell light tensity Activate deactivate DAY LIGHT function Further in formation page 69 Daylight running lights DAY LIGHT Activate deactivate the function of the automatic rear window wiping Further information page 78 Automatic rear window wiper Superb Combi Dayl dri light Rear wiper Activate deactivate the lane ch flash function Fur Lane ch flash ther information page 70 Activate deactivate the travel mode feature Further Travel mode information page 71 Tourist lights Travel mode Factory setting Restore the factory setting for the lighting Time The time time format 12 or 24 hour indicator and the changeover between Summer winter times can be set here Winter tyres Here the speed and the switching on and off of the acoustic signals when ex ceeding this speed can be adjusted This function is for example used for win ter tyres where the maximum permissible speed is lower than the maximum speed of the vehicle page 197 As soon as the parking procedure is completed an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in the information disp
124. ately 12 seconds The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Q Airbag belt tensioner deactivated If the front passenger s front airbag was switched off using the key operat ed switch on the side of the dash panel on the passenger side gt The warning light illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the igni tion is switched on gt The deactivated air bag is indicated by the illumination of the warning light PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF in the middle of the dash panel page 21 H WARNING When a fault in the airbag system occurs there is a risk of the system not being triggered in the event of an accident Therefore this must be checked immediately by a specialized company D Tyre inflation pressure N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light is illuminated If while driving the warning light illuminates a tyre pressure change has oc curred An audible signal sounds as a warning signal gt Immediately reduce speed and avoid sudden steering and braking manoeu vres 40 Operation gt Stop the vehicle turn the ignition off and check the tyres and their inflation pressure page 198 gt Correct the tyre pressure if necessary or replace the wheel page 205 or use the repair kit page 209 gt Store the tyre pressure values in the system page 166 The warning light flashes for about 1 min and remains lit If the warning light flashes for approximately 1 minute
125. ation The range will increase if you drive in a more economical manner If the memory is set to zero after disconnecting the battery a fuel consump tion of 10 I 100 km is calculated for the range afterwards the value is updated according to the style of driving Distance travelled The distance travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed Reset the memory to zero if you want to measure the distance travelled from a particular moment page 44 Memory The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1999 km 8 and 9 999 km Q The indicator is set back to zero when this period is exceeded Information system 45 Average speed The average speed since the memory was last erased is displayed in km hour Set the memory to zero at the start of measurement to determine the average speed over a certain period page 44 Memory After erasing the memory no data will appear for the first 300 m driven The display is updated regularly while you are driving Current driving speed The current speed displayed is identical to the display on the speedometer 2 Fig 21 on page 30 Oil temperature If the engine oil temperature is in the range of 80 110 C the engine operating temperature has been reached If the oil temperature is lower than 80 C or above 110 C avoid high engine revs full throttle and high engine loads If the oil temperature is lower than 50 C or if a fault in the system for check i
126. attery e g with a metal ob ject or cable creates a short circuit risk of melting the lead bars and risk of explosion battery fire and acid splashes a Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices Strong sparking represents a risk of injury Before carrying out any work on the electrical system switch off the en gine the ignition and all electrical components and disconnect the negative terminal on the battery EE CAUTION Improper handling of the battery can lead to damage We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a specialist garage EE CAUTION The vehicle battery must only be disconnected if the ignition is switched off otherwise the vehicle s electrical system electronic components can be dam aged When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system first of all disconnect the negative terminal of the battery and then the positive ter minal a When connecting the battery to the electrical system first of all connect the positive terminal of the battery and then the negative terminal Under no circumstances must the battery cables be connected incorrectly risk of a cable fire Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork risk of damage to the paintwork Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle bat tery housing from the effects of ultra violet light a f the vehicle h
127. ause acci dents and serious injury due to electric shock Work on the electrical system must only be carried out by specialist ga rages Never directly connect the trailer s electrical system with the electrical connections for the tail lights or other current sources After coupling the trailer and connecting up the power socket check the rear lights on the trailer to ensure they are working a The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be applied when coupling and uncoupling the trailer Never use the safety eyelet for towing EH CAUTION Incorrect or improperly connected electrical installations may cause malfunc tion of the entire vehicle electronics Loading a trailer The vehicle trailer combination must be balanced whereby the maximum per missible drawbar load must be utilised If the drawbar load is too low it jeop ardises the performance of the vehicle trailer combination Distribution of the load Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as close to the axle as possible Secure the items from slipping The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trailer is laden Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this combination Tyre pressure Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for a full load page 198 Trailer load The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstan ces
128. ay radio systems mobile phones or mounts must not be installed on airbag covers or within the immediate deployment range of the airbags Communication and multimedia 121 E WARNING Continued Never leave a mobile phone on a seat on the dash panel or in any area where it can become a projectile during a sudden braking manoeuvre an accident or a collision risk of injury Before transport of the vehicle by air the Bluetooth function must be switched off by a specialist company Universal telephone preinstallation hands free The universal telephone preinstallation hands free system includes a con venience mode for the mobile phone via voice control the multifunction steer ing wheel and the radio or navigation system H WARNING Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully responsible for the operation of your vehicle Only use the device in such a way that you are in full control of your vehi cle in every traffic situation there is the risk of accidents The national regulations for using a mobile phone in a vehicle must be observed Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel BIT 0004 Fig 129 Multifunction steering wheel Control buttons for the telephone 122 Operation Note We recommend that mobile phones and two way radio systems be installed in the vehicle by a specialist workshop Not all mobile phones that enable Bluetooth communication a
129. ayer menu The music playback process is performed on the connected device The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ensures that the music played back via the hands free system can be controlled with the remote con trol page 133 Voice commands GSM II EF Note The device being connected must support the Bluetooth A2DP profile refer to the operating instructions for the relevant device being connected Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel a e 8 N B5E 0096 Fig 131 Multifunction steering wheel control buttons Button wheel Fig 131 Action The multifunction steering wheel has buttons for operating the basic func tions of factory fitted radio and navigation system Fig 131 The radio and navigation system can of course still be operated on the devices A description is included in the relevant operating instructions If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio au dio video or navigation system The following functions can be completed by pressing or turning the buttons DVD video Navigation Audio sources 1 Press Change audio source 2 Press Switch tone off on MUTE 4 Interrupt current navigation an nouncement 2 Turn upwards Increase volume 134 Operation
130. battery Electrolyte level indicator ua OT i O S N Read and observe H and H on page 194 first On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator Fig 170 the colouring of the display can indicate the acidic level Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator For this reason carefully knock on the indicator before carrying out the check gt Black colour electrolyte level is correct gt Colourless or light yellow colour electrolyte level too low the battery must be replaced Vehicles with a START STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for checking the energy level for the recurring engine start We recommend that you have the acid level checked regularly by a specialist garage especially in the following cases gt High external temperatures gt Longer day trips gt After each charge Winter time The vehicle battery only has some of its starting power at low temperatures A discharged vehicle battery may freeze at temperatures just below 0 C We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked and if necessary recharged by a specialist garage before the start of the winter Inspecting and replenishing 195 EE CAUTION For technical reasons on vehicles with the description AGM the electrolyte level cannot be checked Note The battery acid level is also checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of the inspection service Charging A Read and
131. before starting any journey Do not use the ball head if it is not correctly inserted into the mounting recess and secured Do not use the towing equipment if it is damaged or incomplete Do not modify or adapt the towing equipment in any way Never release the ball head while the trailer is still coupled Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times Such dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely CAUTION Take care with the ball bar there is a risk of paint damage to the bumper When the tow bar is removed always place the cover onto the mounting re cess there is a danger of soiling the mounting recess FF Note Operation and maintenance of hitch page 180 Tow the vehicle by means of the detachable ball rod page 214 Description Adjusting the ready position Fig 155 Carrier for the towing device tow bar A Read and observe H and H on page 166 first The ball head can be removed and is kept in the spare wheel well or in a com partment for the spare wheel in the luggage compartment Support for the towing device and tow bar Fig 155 13 pin power socket Safety eyelet Mounting recess Cap Dust cap Ball head Operating lever Lock cap Release pin Key locking ball F Note If you lose the key please get in touch with a specialist garage FE Pelee NE Fig 156 Setting the ready position ready position A Read and observe H and H on pa
132. bjects de signed for this purpose e g child seat risk of accident Seats and practical features 81 FI Note After a certain time play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the backrest angle For safety reasons it is not possible to store the seat position in the electric seat memory and remote control key memory if the inclination angle of the seat backrest is more than 102 in relation to the seat cushion Each time you store the position of the electrically adjustable driver s seat and exterior mirrors the existing settings are deleted Manually adjusting the front seats Fig 66 Controls setting N Read and observe H on page 81 first Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction Pull the lever A Fig 66 in the direction of the arrow 1and push the seat in the required direction The lock must click into place after you release the lever Adjusting height of seat Again push pull the lever B in the direction of one of the arrows2 Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest Relieve any pressure from the seat backrest do not lean on it and turn the handwheel C F in the direction of the arrow 3 Adjusting lumbar support Push the lever D ig in the direction of one of the arrows4 82 Operation Electric front seat adjustment Fig 68 Setting Seat pad backrest N Read and observe H on page 81 first Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction Push the switch B Fig 67 i
133. ble in exceptional cases It must be completed slowly and without sudden movements as close to the centre of the lid as possible F E WARNING a Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid Otherwise the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving even if the lid was locked risk of accident Never drive with the lid open or unlatched as otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning EE CAUTION The movement of the lid can be stopped by applying an abrupt and quick force against the lid Do not attempt to close the door manually during electrical closing process there is a risk of damaging the system of an electric valve operation a f the lid is closed manually it must be ensured that when moving the lid into the lock pressure is applied to the centre edge of the lid above the SKODA logo Handling the sides of the lid can damage the electric lid EE CAUTION Before opening or closing the lid check if there are any objects in the open ing or closing range which could obstruct the movement e g a load on the roof rack or on the trailer etc risk of causing damage to the lid a Ensure that there is at least 10 cm of clearance above the opened lid e g dis tance from the garage ceiling Otherwise it may happen that the clearance above the opened lid is no longer sufficient after relieving the vehicle of a load e g after unloading risk of
134. by a specialist garage after replacing a bulb in the main beam low beam or fog lights In case of failure of a xenon gas discharge lamp or an LED diode visit a spe cialist garage 224 Do it yourself Headlights Fig 202 Bulb arrangement Headlight with halogen bulb with Xenon bulb AN Read and observe H and H on page 224 first Headlight with halogen bulb 1 Low beam 2 Main beam separate daytime running lights and parking light Headlights with Xenon light 3 Xenon gas discharge bulbs 4 Main beam Replacing the low beam bulb Fig 203 Halogen headlight Changing the bulb for the low beam AN Read and observe H and H on page 224 first gt Remove the protective cap 1 Fig 202 on page 224 gt Turn the plug with the bulb A Fig 203as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow gt Change the bulb gt Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in an anti clockwise direc tion as far as the stop gt Fit the protective cover 1 Replacing bulb for main beam and daytime running lights Fig 204 Halogen headlight Replacing the bulb for main beam and sep arate daytime running lights H A Read and observe H and on page 224 first gt Remove the protective cap 2 Fig 202 on page 224 gt Turn the bulb holder A Fig 204in the direction of the arrow as far as the stop gt Replace the bulb insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in the op
135. by switching on the heater a Do not sit on wet seats risk of seat deformation Always clean the seats from seam to seam Seat belts N Read and observe H and H on page 181 first The belt webbing must always be kept clean Wash dirty seat belts with mild soapy water Remove coarse dirt with a soft brush Dirty belt webbing may impair the correct functioning of the inertia reel EN WARNING a The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could destroy the fabric The seat belts must not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liquids e g acids a Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis If any damage to the belt webbing seat belt connections inertia reel or lock is detected the seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage a The seat belts must be fully dried before being rolled up CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Refuelling 184 Unleaded petrol 184 Diesel fuel 185 The correct grades of fuel for your vehicle are stated on a sticker affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 162 on page 184 B H WARNING The national legal requirements must be observed if carrying a spare canis ter in the vehicle We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for safety reasons in the event of an accident these canisters c
136. cal reasons trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the anti theft alarm system General Maintenance CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Vehicle operating under different weather conditions 173 Statutory checks 173 SKODA Service Partners 174 SKODA Original parts 174 SKODA Original accessories 174 Spoiler 175 Airbags 175 The instructions and guidelines from SKODA AUTO a s must be observed when carrying out all modifications repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition After carrying out modifi cations repairs or technical alterations the vehicle will comply with German road transport regulations StVO Always consult a SKODA Partner page 174before buying accessories or parts or before carrying out any modifications repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle E WARNING Works on your vehicle which have been carried out unprofessionally can cause operational faults risk of accident a Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to operational faults This interference can also impair not directly affected systems because of the networking of the electronic components The op erational safety of the vehicle may be at significant risk and can lead to in creased wear of par
137. cated at the lower right side Chapter e g Airbag Overview A Introduction to the topic Module Overview within the chapter intro ductory information about the chapter content if necessary valid for the entire chapter notes Module e g Front Airbags Information Search When searching for information in the operating instructions we recommend using the Index at the end of the manual Direction indications All direction indications such as left right front rear relate to the for ward direction of travel of the vehicle Units of measurement The volume weight speed and length data are given in metric units unless otherwise indicated Display In this owner s manual the screen on the MAXI DOT display is used as the dis play illustration provided nothing is otherwise stated 6 Structure and more information about the Operating Instructions a digital network of mobile devices for the transmission of GSM voice and data Connection of a mobile device by means of its Bluetooth profile Kilowatt measuring unit for the engine output Manual gearbox Multifunction display NI Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transporta tion of goods Newton meter measuring unit for the engine torque personal identification number Remote transmission of the SIM data Connect two devices using Bluetooth profile Diesel engine with turbo charging and common rail injection TDI CR system
138. ccur gt The interior lighting illuminates if the switch for the interior light is in the door contact position gt The hazard warning lights are switched on gt All the doors are unlocked gt The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front airbags 17 Driver s knee airbag 18 Side airbags 19 Head airbags 20 Front airbags Fig 8 Driver airbag in the steering wheel front passenger airbag in the dashboard Fig 9 Safe distance to steering wheel gas filled airbags In the event of a severe frontal collision the front airbag system offers addi tional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel Fig 8 A The front airbag for the front seat passenger is located in the dash panel above the glove compartment Fig 8 B The airbags inflate in front of the driver and front passenger when they are deployed Fig 9 D The forward movement of the driver and of the front passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced Airbag system 17 WARNING Information on correct seated position For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dashboard A Fig 9 No
139. ch as a coin into the gap of the battery cover gt Turn the cover against the direction of the arrow up to the mark to open the cover gt Replace the battery gt Return the battery cover gt Turn the cover in the direction of the arrow up to the initial marking engage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Unlocking locking the driver s door 216 Locking the door without a locking cylinder 217 Unlocking the boot lid 217 Selector lever emergency unlocking 217 216 Do it yourself Unlocking locking the driver s door Fig 192 Handle on the driver s door cov ered key cylinder B3T 0596 The driver s door can be unlocked or locked in an emergency gt Pull on the door handle and hold it pulled gt Insert the vehicle key into the slot on the underside of the cover in the re gion of the arrow Fig 192 gt Fold the cover upwards gt Release the door handle gt Insert the remote control key into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the ve hicle gt For vehicles with LHD insert the remote control key with the buttons facing up into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the vehicle gt For vehicles with RHD insert the remote control key directed with buttons down into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the vehicle Pull on the door handle and install the cover to the original location EE CAUTION Make sure you do not damage the paint when perf
140. ck in fully CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Capacity 191 Checking the coolant level 192 Replenishing 192 The coolant consists of water with coolant additive This mixture guarantees antifreeze protection protects the cooling heater system against corrosion and prevents lime formation Vehicles exported to countries with a mild climate are already factory filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about 25 C In these countries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 40 Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate are already factory filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about 35 C In these countries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50 If a higher concentration of antifreeze is required for climatic reasons the con centration of coolant additive can be increased up to a maximum of 60 anti freeze protection down to approx 40 C When refilling only use the same antifreeze identified on the coolant expan sion vessel Fig 167 on page 192 1 The coolant capacity is approximately 1 Litre greater on vehicles that are fitted with an auxiliary heater auxiliary heating and ventilation E WARNING The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en gine compartment pag
141. ck mark appears in the MAXI DOT display Fig 152 on page 163 Automatic engine start gt Release the brake pedal The automatic start procedure takes place again Further information on automatic transmission The automatic engine shut down takes place when the selector lever is in po sitions P D S and N and in Tiptronic mode When the selector lever is in position P the engine remains shut down even after you release the brake pedal The engine starts automatically by pressing the gas pedal or by moving the selector lever into a different mode and releas ing the brake pedal If the engine is off due to the automatic and the selector lever is put to the R position then the automatic start up of the engine If the gear selector is moved from position R to the position D S or N the vehi cle must reach a speed of more than 10 km h before the automatic engine shutdown starts There is no automatic engine shutdown when the system detects a vehicle moving due to a large steering angle No automatic engine shutdown takes place when the vehicle is moving at low speed e g during a traffic jam or when turning and remains stationary after pressing the brake pedal lightly Automatic engine shutdown takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force System related automatic start up A Read and observe H on page 162 first When the engine is off the system can automatically start the engine before the desired jo
142. ctivated by very quick operation of the brake pedal In order to achieve the shortest possible braking distance the brake pedal must be ap plied firmly until the vehicle has come to a standstill The HBA function is automatically switched off when the brake pedal is re leased Assist systems 155 The ABS is activated faster and more effectively with the intervention of the HBA Hill Hold Control HHC AN Read and observe H and on page 154 first When driving on slopes HHC allows you to move your foot from the brake ped al to the accelerator pedal without having to use the handbrake The system holds the brake pressure produced by the activation of the brake pedal for approx 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator ped al If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds it starts to roll back HHC is active on slopes of gt 5 when the driver door is closed HHC is always only active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off When driving down hill it is inactive CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Function 157 Activation deactivation 157 E WARNING The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention and it is always the driver s responsibility to take care when reversing the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres Pay particular attention to small children
143. ctly on the operating part of the air conditioning Climatronic CQ Read and observe H and on page 119 first The auxiliary heating can be switched on off as follows Manually switching on using the button on the operating part of the manual air conditioning Cli matronic The warning light in the button illuminates Fig 127 ON by using the radio remote control page 120 Manually switching off 8 using the button on the operating part of the manual air conditioning Cli matronic The warning light in the button goes out Fig 127 OFF by using the radio remote control page 120 After switching off the auxiliary heating the coolant pump still runs for a short period Automatic switching on off The following menu items can be selected from the Aux heating menu item in the information display page 47 depending on the vehicle equipment Day of the week set the current day of the week Running time Set the required running time in 5 minute increments The running time can be 10 to 60 minutes Mode Set the desired heating ventilation mode Air conditioning system 119 Starting time 1 Starting time 2 Starting time 3 for each pre set time the day and the time hour and minute can be set for switching on the auxiliary heating An empty position can be found between Sunday and Monday when selecting the day If this empty position is selected the activation is per formed without taking into acc
144. d Superb Combi 59 Power windows 63 Sliding tilting roof 64 Sliding tilting roof Superb Combi 66 Front airbag 17 Front door warning light 74 Front interior light 73 Fuel 183 Diesel 185 Fuel gauge 32 refer to Fuel 183 Refuelling 184 Unleaded petrol 184 Fuel consumption 149 229 Fuel reserve Warning light 39 Fuses Assignment 220 Colour coding 220 Fuse assignment in the engine compartment 222 Replacing 220 G Gearbox Warning messages 33 Gear change Gear recommendation 43 Information on the selected gear 43 Gear changing Gear stick 144 General view Cockpit 29 Generator Indicator light 35 Genuine parts 174 Glasses storage box 93 Glow plug system Warning light 38 GSM 124 126 H Handbrake 144 Warning light 35 Hands free system Voice control 131 Hazard warning light system 72 Index 239 HBA 155 Head airbag 20 Headlight cleaning system Headlight cleaning system 79 Headlights Driving abroad 153 Headlight cleaning system 79 Replacing a bulb 224 Head restraint 83 Head restraints 83 Heater Windscreen and rear window 75 Heating Exterior mirrors 80 Seats 85 HHC 156 Hill Hold Control HHC 156 Hitch 166 Accessories 169 Drawback load 166 Horn 29 Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA 155 Ignition 139 Immobilizer 139 Individual settings Locking 54 Un
145. d Weights Su supero MGG perb MG6 4x4 Superb DSG7 Superb Combi MG6 4x4 Superb Combi DSG7 Superb Combi MG6 Top speed km h 219 218 215 217 216 213 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 8 8 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 8 B 9 Operating weight kg depending on equipment configuration 1496 1654 1508 1666 1587 1745 1518 1676 1530 1688 1609 1767 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1500 1700 1600 1800 1500 1700 1600 1800 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Slopes up to 12 b Slopes up to 8 750 231 Technical data 1 8 1 118 kW TSI Motor Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 118 4500 6200 250 1500 4500 4 1798 Superb Combi Superb Combi Superb Combi Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb DSG7 Superb MG6 4x4 MGE DSG7 MG6 4x4 Top speed km h 222 222 219 221 221 218 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 8 2 8 4 8 4 8 3 8 5 8 5 cua a a pein One eo teinet 1496 1654 1508 1666 1587 1745 1518 1676 1530 1688 1609 1767 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1500 1700 1600 1800 1500 1700 1600 1800 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 750 a Slopes up to 12 b Slopes up to 8 2 0 1 147 kW TSI Motor Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 147 5100 6000 28
146. d gasoline is not available with the octane number 95 RON in an emergency petrol with the octane rating of 91 or 92 or 93 RON can be used to fill the tank but this leads to a slight loss of performance and a slightly in creased fuel consumption H Prescribed fuel unleaded fuel 98 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON or higher Unleaded petrol 95 RON can also be used but results in a slight loss in performance In an emergency if unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 98 RON or 95 RON is not available you may refuel with petrol with an octane rating of 91 or 92 or 93 RON gt F Fuel additives Unleaded petrol complying with EN 228 meets all the conditions for a smooth running engine We therefore recommend that no fuel additives are used This can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust sys tem EE CAUTION a Even one filling of the tank with petrol that does not meet the standards can lead to serious damage to parts of the exhaust system a If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned standards e g leaded petrol is used by mistake do not start the engine or switch on the ignition Engine parts could be significantly damaged EH CAUTION a f in an emergency the vehicle has to be refuelled with petrol of a lower oc tane number than the one prescribed the journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a low engine load Driving
147. d kilometres remain ing until the next service page 48 Coolant temperature gauge page 31 Display page 31 Fuel gauge page 32 Button for gt Reset trip meter page 32 gt Setting the time page 32 gt Enable disable the mode selected by means of button 3 Revolution counter N Read and observe H on page 30 first The red scale of the revolution counter 1 Fig 21 on page 30 indicates the range in which the system begins to limit the engine speed The system auto matically restricts the engine speed to a steady limit You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolu tion counter is reached or select mode D on the automatic gearbox Follow the recommended gear to prevent engine speeds that are too high or too low page 43 Speedometer N Read and observe H on page 30 first Warning against speeding An audible warning will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km h The audible warning is switched off once the vehicle speed falls below 120 km h Coolant temperature gauge Fig 22 yA Ep ON 17 Coolant temperature gauge N S 90 0 130 z N Read and observe H on page 30 first The coolant temperature gauge Fig 22 only operates when the ignitions is switched on 1 This function is only valid for some countries Cold range The pointer in the left of the scale indicates that the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature A
148. d may only be resumed if it is not too high for the current traffic conditions Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the sys tem being switched on unintentionally CAUTION The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving in areas with steeper gradients The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which it travels In such cases select a lower gear or slow the vehicle using the footbrake The cruise control system cannot be activated when first gear or reverse gear is selected vehicles with manual transmission a The cruise control system cannot be activated when the selector lever is in positions P N or R vehicles with automatic transmission The Cruise Control System may automatically switch off when some brake assist systems e g ESC intervene when the speed exceeds maximum permis sible engine speed or a similar event takes place Activating deactivating Fig 151 Operating lever Cruise control system controls ON CANCEL OFF RES aa EDIAN O DA T SET ONY pe A Read and observe H and M on page 161 first Activating gt Move switch A Fig 151 into the ON position Deactivating gt Move switch A Fig 151 into the OFF position Assist systems 161 Storing and maintaining speed A Read and observe H and M on page 161 first gt Activate the cruise control system page 161 gt Drive at the desired speed gt Push
149. d seat with the TOP TETHER system Only use child seats with the TOP TETHER system on the seats with the lock ing eyes Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye On no account should you equip your vehicle e g mount screws or other anchorage points Transporting children safely 27 y 314 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 D i L i a i b A x e a Po V s a TA s lt C amp kR Fig 20 Cockpit 28 Operation Operation eo o gt gt 4 fs SI N kakel kelle Overview Electrical power windows 61 Door opening lever 52 Central locking button 55 Air outlet vent 110 Parking ticket holder Operating lever gt Turn signal light headlight and parking light headlight flasher 69 gt Speed regulating system 161 Steering wheel gt with horn gt with driver s front airbag 17 gt with pushbuttons for radio navigation system phone and in formation system 122 134 Instrument cluster Instruments warning lights and display _ 30 Operating lever gt Information system 42 gt Windscreen wiper and wash system 77 Air outlets in the central part of the dash panel 110 Regulator for left seat heating 85 Button for hazard warning light system 72 Regulator for right seat heating 85 Depending on equipment fitted gt Radio gt Navigation system Storage compartment on the front passenger side
150. ding children The seatbelt must not be placed over a child who is sitting on the lap of another passenger E WARNING Continued The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct one for your seat Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to protect and the risk of injury increases The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly s Many layers of clothing and loose clothing e g a winter coat over a jack et do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts Do not use clamps or similar items which prevent the lash lock function of the safety belt from operating A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then suddenly held firm by the belt The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position page 87 EN WARNING Information on the care and maintenance of the safety belts The belt webbing must always be kept clean Soiled belts may impair proper operation of the inertia reel page 183 The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way Do not at tempt to repair the seat belts yourself Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis If any damage to the seat belts seat belt conn
151. display 46 MAXI DOT display 46 Main menu 47 Operation 42 Settings 47 maximum allowable weights 228 MDI Installation in the storage compartment 92 Media see radio navigation system 4 MFD See multifunction display 44 Mirror Exterior mirrors 80 Mirrors Interior mirror 79 Vanity 76 Mobile phone 121 124 126 Connecting to the hands free system 124 127 Modifications 173 Modifications and technical alterations Airbags 175 Service 174 Spoiler 175 Multifunction display Functions 44 Information 45 Memory 44 Operation 42 Multimedia 134 AUX 135 MDI 135 N N1 98 nameplate Navigation system 228 Net partition Behind the front seats Behind the rear seats Removing and refitting the housing Nets Non closable side pocket Superb Combi Notes for driving with tyre repaired O Oil Note messages 107 108 107 108 99 102 211 36 See Engine oil Oil pressure 190 36 Note messages On board computer See multifunction display 44 Operating the sun screen Operating weight Operation in winter Diesel fuel Vehicle battery Original accessories 66 229 185 195 174 45 Outside temperature Overview Engine compartment 188 34 Warning lights P Paintwork See Paintwork care Paintwork care Park assist Departing from a parallel parking space Finding a parking space Inf
152. dreplenishing 191 Petrol engines Capacity 2 0 1 147 kW TSI 8 6 3 6 1 191 kW FSI 9 0 Diesel engines Capacity 1 6 1 77 kW TDI CR 2 0 1 103 kW TDI CR 2 0 1 125 kW TDI CR Checking the coolant level Fig 167 Engine compartment Coolant expansion reservoir A Read and observe H and on page 191 first The coolant expansion reservoir is located in the engine compart ment Fig 167 Explanation of graphic Fig 167 A Mark for the maximum permissible coolant level Mark for the lowest permissible coolant level The coolant level should be kept between the marks A and B If the coolant level is above the mark a no coolant may be topped up If the coolant level is below the mark 8 the coolant must be topped up Checking the level gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle Fig 167 Check the coolant level only when the engine is cold 192 General Maintenance If the engine is warm the test result may be inaccurate The level can also be above the mark A Fig 167 If the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank is too low this is indicated by the warning light illuminating in the instrument cluster page 36 Cool ant We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time Loss of coolant A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a lea
153. drive vehicle Shifting up gears gt Press the selector lever forwards Fig 141 gt Pull the right hand paddle Fig 141 briefly towards the steering wheel Shifting down gears gt Press the selector lever backwards Fig 141 gt Pull the left hand paddle Fig 141 briefly towards the steering wheel Temporarily switching to manual gear shifting in mode D or S gt Pull one of the paddles Fig 141 briefly towards the steering wheel Manual gear shifting is deactivated if more than 1 minute passes after either of the paddles was pulled The temporary switch to manual gear shifting can also be deactivated by pulling the right hand paddle towards the steering wheel for more than 1 second When accelerating the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached If a lower gear is selected the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine over revving Note It may be beneficial for example when travelling downhill to use manual shifting of gears Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and hence brake wear page 143 Starting off and driving A Read and observe H and on page 145 first Starting off gt Start the engine gt Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal gt Press the lock button in the direction of the arrow Fig 140 on page 146and keep pressing gt Mo
154. driver from the tool kit to unscrew the fog lamp Fig 206 B gt Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 2 The lamp comes loose gt Remove the connector gt Turn bulb holder A Fig 207 in an anti clockwise direction up to the stop and remove gt Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb into the headlight and turn ina clockwise direction as far as the stop gt Attach the connector gt Swivel out the lamp in the direction of the arrow 2 and remove it gt Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow 3 gt Insert a new bulb into the holder gt Reinsert the lamp in the opposite direction to the arrow 1 gt Push on the light until the spring clicks into place gt Replace the fog lamp by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow Check that the light is securely inserted 2 Fig 206 B and screw tight l gt Insert the protective grille and carefully press it in Rear light Superb Combi The protective grille must engage firmly piss A B3T 0565 Fig 209 Removing Cover light 226 Do it yourself B3T 0566 Fig 210 Seal expand lighting connector A Read and observe H and M on page 224 first Removing gt Open the boot lid gt Insert the clamp for removing the wheel trims page 205 Vehicle tool kit into the hole at the position indicated by the arrow Fig 209 a gt Remove the cover in the directio
155. dspeakers Resulting damage can have a negative impact on the function of the airbag system Any work on the front doors and door panels must be carried out by a specialist ga rage The following guidelines must be observed a Never drive with inner door panels removed a Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the resulting openings have not been properly sealed Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed unless the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional loudspeakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner door panels CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Washing by hand 176 Automatic car wash systems 177 Washing with a high pressure cleaner 177 The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is frequent washing How often the vehicle should be washed depends on factors such as gt Frequency of use gt Parking situation garage under trees etc gt Season gt Weather conditions gt Environmental influences The longer insect residues bird droppings tree sap road and industrial dust tar soot particles road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paintwork of your vehicle the more detrimental their destructive effect can be High temperatures such as those caused
156. e E WARNING a Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver s responsi bility Too low or too high inflation pressure impairs handling a If the inflation pressure is too low the tyre will have to overcome a higher rolling resistance This will cause a significant increase in the temperature of the tyre especially at higher speeds This can result in tread separation and a tyre blowout a In the event of very fast tyre inflation pressure loss such as a sudden tyre failure an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop without sudden steering movements and without any hard braking EE CAUTION f a spare wheel is used that is not identical to the fitted tyres the following must be observed page 200 Spare and temporary spare wheel The tyres must be protected from contact with substances such as oil grease and fuel which could damage them If the tyres come into contact with these substances then we recommend you have this checked out in a special ist workshop a If in the case of puncture occurring the spare tyre with a non bound direc tion or an opposite direction of rotation must be mounted then drive carefully The best properties of the tyre are no longer present in this situation For the sake of the environment a Old and unserviceable tyres are classified in a special environmentally haz ardous category These must be disposed of in accordance with national legis la
157. e sponding vehicle side will flash E WARNING Switch on the hazard warning light system if for example the following oc curs a You encounter a traffic jam The vehicle has broken down Parking lights A Read and observe H on page 67 first The parking light is designed for temporary lighting of the parked vehicle Switching on the parking light P lt gt Switch off the ignition gt Place the control lever into position A or B as far as it can go Fig 50 on page 69 the parking light on the right left hand side of the vehicle is switched on If the right or left turn signal light has been switched on and the ignition is switched off the parking light PS is not automatically switched on Switching on the side lights on both sides 2 gt Switch off the ignition gt Turn the light switch A to position Fig 49 on page 68 and lock the ve hicle After pulling out the ignition key and opening the driver s door an audible warning sounds After a few seconds or after closing the driver s door the au dible alarm is turned off but the parking lights will remain switched on EE CAUTION Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded especially over short distances CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front interior light ZB Rear interior light Variant 1 74 Rear interior light Variant 2 74 Front door warning light 7
158. e you must secure the vehicle from rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks the car jack is not sufficient risk of injury EE CAUTION Always top up using the correct specification of fluids This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle damage For the sake of the environment In view of the requirements for the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids and the special tools and knowledge required for such work we recommend that fluids be changed by a specialist garage FF Note a Please consult a specialist garage for any questions relating to fluids a Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the SKODA Origi nal Accessories or from the SKODA Genuine Parts ranges Opening and closing the bonnet Fig 163 Bonnet release lever release lever N Read and observe H and H on page 186 first Open flap gt Pull the release lever under the dash panel in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 163 Before opening the bonnet ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place against the windscreen otherwise the paintwork could be damaged gt Press the release lever in the direction of the arrow 2 to unlock the bonnet gt Grasp the bonnet and lift up until it is held open by the pressurised gas spring Close the flap gt Pull the bonnet down far enough to overcome the force of the pressurised gas spring gt Close the bonnet from a height of app
159. e 186 EE CAUTION Do not continue if for some reason it is not possible to fill with coolant un der the current circumstances Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage f the expansion tank is empty do not top up with coolant The system could ventilate there is a risk of engine damage do not continue driving Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must never be under 40 Over 60 of coolant additive in the coolant reduces the antifreeze protec tion and cooling effect A coolant additive that does not comply with the correct specifications can significantly reduce the corrosion protection Any faults resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can con sequently result in major engine damage a Do not fill the coolant above the mark A Fig 167 on page 192 a If a fault causes the engine to overheat we recommend visiting a specialist garage as otherwise serious engine damage may occur Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant Never cover the radiator there is a risk of the engine overheating Capacity QO Read and observe H and H on page 191 first Coolant capacity in litres Petrol engines Capacity 1 4 1 92 kW TSI dil 1 8 1 112 kW TSI 1 8 1 118 kW TSI 8 6 Inspecting an
160. e and stable base Use a non slip base e g a rubber foot mat if the surface is smooth such as cobbled stones tiled floor etc a Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this pur pose a Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed Never position any body parts such as arms or legs under the vehicle while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack When the vehicle is raised never start the engine EE CAUTION It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly attached to the web of the lower fork leg otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle occurring 208 Do it yourself Anti theft wheel bolts Fig 182 Principle sketch Anti theft wheel bolt with adapter N Read and eene B on page 206 6 first The anti theft wheel bolts protect the wheels from theft These can only be loosened or tightened with the use of adapter B Fig 182 gt Remove the full wheel trim or the caps of the wheel bolts gt Insert adapter B Fig 182 with the toothed side all the way into the inner teeth in the head of the anti theft wheel bolts A gt Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter B up to the stop gt Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt page 207 gt Remove the adapter gt Replace the wheel trim or the caps To be equipped for a possible wheel change the adapter for the anti theft wheel bolts must always be kept in the vehicle The adapte
161. e arrow Closing gt Pull the lid down with the handle C Fig 41 and close with a slight swing Delayed locking of the boot lid N Read and observe H and H on page 57 first If the boot lid is unlocked with the symbol button s on the remote control key then the door is automatically locked after closing The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by a specialist garage After activation of delayed locking the boot lid can be opened again after clos ing within a limited period Delayed locking can be deactivated by a specialist garage at any time EE CAUTION There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked automatically We therefore recommend locking the vehicle with the symbol button amp on the remote control key CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operating description 59 Acoustic signals 61 Adjusting deleting the top lid position 61 Malfunctions 61 Force limiter The electric luggage compartment lid hereinafter referred to only as a lid is equipped with a force limiter If the lid hits an obstacle when closing it stops and an audible signal sounds If you rapidly enter the vehicle during the opening or closing process of the boot lid the whole vehicle may jerk and as a result the movement of the lid can be interrupted Manual operation Manually opening and closing the lid is only possi
162. e designa tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb gt A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the boot EN WARNING a Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment page 186 a Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not suffi ciently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficul ty by other road users a Bulbs H7 H8 and H15 are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb risk of injury We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety glasses when changing a bulb Gas discharge bulbs xenon bulbs operate with a high voltage professio nal knowledge is required risk of death Switch off the respective vehicle light when changing the bulb CAUTION Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers even the smallest amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb Use a clean cloth napkin or similar Note This Owner s Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is pos sible to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising Other bulbs must be replaced by a specialist garage a We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the ve hicle Replacement bulbs can be purchased from SKODAOriginal Accessories a We recommend having the headlight settings checked
163. e established with the help of the following profiles of Blue tooth technology rSAP Remote SIM access profile After connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the rSAP pro file the telephone deregisters from the GSM network and communication with the network is only enabled by the hands free system via the vehicle s external aerial In the telephone only the interface for Bluetooth remains ac tive In this case you can only use the mobile phone to disconnect from the hands free system deactivate the Bluetooth connection or dial the emergen cy number 112 only valid in some countries HFP Hands Free Profile After connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the HFP pro file the telephone continues to use its GSM module and the internal antenna to communicate with the GSM network Note The following guidelines must be observed page 121 Mobile phones and two way radio systems Connecting the phone to the hands free system To connect a mobile phone with the hands free system it is necessary to in terconnect the telephone and hands free system Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone The following steps must be carried out for the connection Connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the rSAP profile gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele phone For certain mobile phones it is neces
164. e extinguisher is attached by two straps in a bracket under the driver s seat Removing attaching Loosen the two straps by pulling the buckles in the direction of the ar row l Remove the fire extinguisher For mounting fit the fire extinguisher back into the holder and secure it with straps Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extin guisher The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person once a year National legal requirements must be observed Towing eye Clamps for removing the wheel trims Depending upon vehicle equipment Jack with sign puncture repair kit Wheel wrench Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps Replacement bulb set E WARNING The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants lelle SI le HE WARNING The factory supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle Under no circumstances attempt to lift heavier vehicles or other loads Note a The fire extinguisher must comply with national legal requirements Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher Proper function ing of the fire extinguisher is not assured once it has passed its expiry date The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only CAUTION a Screw the jack back into the startin
165. e is a viable alternative solution to using the towing eye If the towing device is removed completely it must be replaced with the standard reinforcement of the rear bumper which is part of the mount for the towing eye If this procedure is not observed the vehicle may not meet the national legal provisions EE CAUTION The detachable ball rod and or the vehicle can be damaged if an unsuitable tow bar is used F Note The detachable ball rod must always be in the vehicle so that it can be used for towing if necessary CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Replacing the battery in the remote control key 215 Synchronising the remote control 25 Replace the battery in the remote control of the auxiliary heater parking heater 216 TE CAUTION The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original battery a We recommend having faulty batteries replaced by a KODA service partner Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery For the sake of the environment Dispose of the used battery in accordance with national legal provisions Replacing the battery in the remote control key Fig 190 Remove cover take out battery A Read and observe M on page 215 first The battery change is carried out as follows gt Flip out the key gt Press off the battery cover A Fig 190 with your thumb or by using a screwdriver release in th
166. e maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower load carrying capacity is used In this case the roof rack system must only be loaded up to the maximum weight limit specified in the fitting instructions Seats and practical features 109 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Air outlets 110 Using the air conditioning system economically 111 Operational problems 112 The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature thus full heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature If the cooling system is switched on the temperature and air humidity drops in the vehicle The cooling system prevents the windows from misting up during winter months It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode to enhance the cooling effect Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode for the air con ditioning system page 114 or for Climatronic page 117 H WARNING For your own safety and that of other road users ensure that all the win dows are free of ice snow and misting Please familiarize yourself about how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems how to de mist and defrost the windows as well as with the cooling mode a To reduce health risks e g common colds the following instructions for the
167. e memory to zero at that point in time page 44 Memory 1 On some models in certain countries the display appears in kilometres litre 2 On some models in certain countries km ltr is displayed when the vehicle is stationary The maximum time indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes 8 and 99 hours and 59 minutes The indicator is set back to zero when this period is exceeded Current fuel consumption The current fuel consumption level is displayed in litres 100 km You can use this information to adapt your driving style to the desired fuel consumption The display appears in litres hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low speed Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is displayed in litres 100 km Set the memory to zero at the start of a new measurement if you wish to de termine the average fuel consumption over a certain period page 44 Memo ry After erasing the memory no value is displayed until you have driven ap prox 300 m The display is updated regularly while you are driving Range The range indicates the distance you can still drive with your vehicle based on the level of fuel in the tank and with the same style of driving as before The display is shown in steps of 10 km The value is displayed in steps of 5 km after the fi has come on The fuel consumption over the preceding 50 km is used to calculate the infor m
168. e re spective number of warning lights illuminate E WARNING Stale air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants reduce atten tion levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an ac cident increases Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist up Defrosting windscreen Switching on gt Press the maxq button Fig 126 on page 115 gt Press the button Fig 126 on page 115 Switching off gt Press the symbol button max again or press the symbol button AUTO gt Press the button again More air flows out of the air outlet vents 1 Fig 123 on page 110 The tempera ture control is controlled automatically 118 Operation CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Switching on off 119 Radio remote control 120 Functional requirements of the auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventila tion V The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient v The fuel supply is adequate the warning icon is not lit in the display of the instrument cluster Auxiliary ventilation The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by switching off the engine whereby the interior temperature is effectively de creased e g with the vehicle parked in the sun Additional heating hereinafter only as a aux heati
169. e region of arrow 1 gt Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down in the region of the arrow 2 gt Insert the new battery gt Insert the battery cover A and press it down until it clicks audibly into place The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked with the remote control key after replacing the battery page 215 Note If a key has an affixed decorative cover this will be destroyed when the bat tery is replaced A replacement cover can be purchased from a SKODA Partner Synchronising the remote control CQ Read and observe M on page 215 first If the vehicle does not unlock when the remote control is pressed the key may not be synchronised This can occur when the buttons on the remote control key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or the battery in the remote control key has been replaced Synchronise the key as follows Emergency equipment and self help 215 gt Press any button on the remote control key gt Unlock the door with the key in the lock cylinder within 1 minute of pressing the button Replace the battery in the remote control of the auxiliary heater parking heater Fig 191 Radio remote control Battery cover N Read and observe M on page 215 first The battery is located under a cover on the back of the radio remote con trol Fig 191 gt Insert a flat blunt object su
170. e steering column not have stickers attached be covered or modified in any other way This part should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or has been moistened with water No objects must be attached to the cover of the airbag module or located within the immediate vicinity Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects bunch of keys etc to the igni tion key These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and can cause injuries Note In vehicles with a driver s knee airbag a symbol with AIRBAG is located on the side panel on the driver s side Side airbags B3T 0547 Fig 11 Location of the side airbag in the driver s seat or gas filled side air bag In the event of severe side collisions the side airbag system provides addition al protection for the upper body chest stomach and pelvis of passengers in the vehicle The front side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of the front seats Fig 11 A The rear side airbags are located between the entrance area and the seat backrest The head airbag and belt tensioner on the relevant side are also automatically deployed when the side airbags Fig 11 B are deployed The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body chest stomach and pel vis is reduced on the side facing the door WARNING Information on correct
171. e the nozzles from the headlight cleaning system by hand there is risk of damage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Interior mirror 79 Exterior mirrors 80 a WARNING Make sure that the mirror is not covered by ice snow condensation or other objects a Convex curved outward or aspheric exterior mirrors increase the field of vision They do however make objects appear smaller in the mirror These mirrors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the fol lowing vehicles Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to the following vehicles E WARNING The mirrors with automatic dimming contain an electrolyte liquid which can escape if mirror glass is broken The leaking electrolytic fluid can irritate the skin eyes and respiratory system Immediately seek out fresh air and leave the vehicle If this is not possible at least open the window f you swallow electrolytic fluid seek medical assistance immediately f your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid immedi ately wash the affected area for several minutes plenty of water Then con sult a doctor immediately Interior mirror Fig 64 Interior mirror manual dimming auto dimming light sensor Q Read and observe H on page 79 first Mirrors with manual dimming Fig 64 1 Basic position of the mirror 2 Mirror dimming
172. e top po sition of the lid Symbol explanation in the operating description Feasible action O sCNon feasible action Movement in the opposite direction to the previous movement 60 Operation Lid operation with the handle A Range Fig 43 The operation of the lid using the handle A is only possible when the vehicle is unlocked Lid operation with the button B Operating the lid with the button B is only aE when the lid is open Lid operation with the symbol button lt s on the remote control key and the button When the ignition is switched on the operation of the lid does not function us ing the remote control key Operating the lid with the button C does not work if the vehicle was locked from the outside Operating the lid with the symbol button s on the remote control key and the button C does not work when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle Acoustic signals CQ Read and observe H and F on page 59 first The acoustic signals serve as a safety function and provide information about the success of a performed action Signals Meaning Open using the button lt gt on the remote control key or the button C Fig 43 on page 60 Interrupted tone Automatic closing of the lid page 59 M in section In troduction Force limiter Confirmation of the storage of the lid position fault 1 continuo
173. e vehicle s paintwork has become unattractive and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives If the polish does not contain any preserving elements the paint must be trea ted with a preservative afterwards 178 General Maintenance EE CAUTION Never apply wax to the windows Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or hard waxes Do not polish the paintwork in a dusty environment risk of paint scratches Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides If possible do not apply any paint care products to parts of the bodywork that come into contact with door seals or window guides Plastic parts A Read and observe H and on page 177 first Clean plastic parts with a damp cloth If this method does not completely clean the plastic parts use cleaning prod ucts specially designed for this purpose EE CAUTION Do not use paint care products on plastic parts Rubber seals A Read and observe H and on page 177 first All door seals and window guides are factory treated with a colourless matt varnish layer to prevent the freezing of painted body parts and to protect against driving noise Do not treat the door seals and window guides with any products CAUTION Applying additional treatments to the seals can corrode the protective coating and driving noise may occur Chrome parts CQ Read and observe H and on page 177 first
174. e wheel y y Fig 173 Fixing the spare or temporary spare wheel A Read and observe H and 1 on page 197 first The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and is fixed in place with a special bolt Fig 173 Taking the wheel out gt Open the boot lid gt Raise the floor covering in the boot page 100 gt Remove the box with the tool kit gt Unscrew the nut Fig 173 anti clockwise gt Take out the wheel Stowing the wheel gt Place the wheel into the spare wheel well with the wheel rim pointing down ward gt Screw on the nut Fig 173 clockwise until the wheel is safely secured gt Replace the box with the tool kit into the spare wheel and secure it with the tape gt Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment gt Close the boot lid Fit a wheel in the appropriate dimensions and design as soon as possible If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted to the vehicle e g winter tyres or low profile tyres it must only be used briefly in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of driving is adopted H Temporary spare wheel A warning label is displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel 200 General Maintenance Please note the following if you intend to use the temporary spare wheel gt The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel gt Be particularly observant when dri
175. e windows are frozen first of all eliminate the ice page 179 Windows and exterior mirrors and only then operate the elec trical power windows Otherwise the window sealing and the electrical power window mechanism could be damaged a In the winter ice accumulating on the surface of the window may cause there to be more resistance when closing the window The window will stop and move back several centimetres a It is necessary to deactivate the force limiter to close the win dow page 63 Always make sure that the windows are closed when you leave the locked vehicle For the sake of the environment At high speeds you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily high fuel consumption 62 Operation AT Note a After switching the ignition off it is still possible to open or close the win dows for approx 10 minutes After the driver s or front passenger s door has been opened the windows can only be operated by using button A Fig 44 on page 62 a When driving always use the existing heating air conditioning and ventila tion system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle If the windows are opened dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds a The window lift system is equipped with protection against overheating Re peated opening and closing of the window can cause this mechanism to over heat If this happens it will not be pos
176. eat belt QJ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Attachment points of the ISOFIX system 25 Use of child seats with the ISOFIX system 26 Attachment points of the TOP TETHER system 27 Attachment points of the I 0FIX system Fig 18 ISOFIX system label ISOFIX represents a system for a fast and secure child seat mounting There are two locking eyes between the seat backrest and the seat cushion of the outer rear seats and front passenger seat for fixing the ISOFIX system child seat in place On the rear outside seats the fixing eyes are located below the upholstery The places are marked with labels with the ISOFIX logo Fig 18 H WARNING a Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the ISOFIX system Never attach other child seats belts or objects to the attachment points eyes intended for the installation of a child seat with the ISOFIX system risk of death Transporting children safely 25 Note A child seat fitted with the ISOFIX system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit ted with an ISOFIX system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve hicle Further information is available from a SKODA Partner a Child seats with the ISOFIX system can be purchased from SKODA Original Ac cessories Use of child seats with the ISOFIX system Overview of the usefulness of child seats fa
177. ecialist garage immediately Electronic Stability Control ESC N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light flashes to show that the ESC is currently operating If the warning light amp illuminates there is a fault in the ESC The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Fault Electronic Stability Control ESC Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately Instruments and Indicator Lights 37 If the warning light amp illuminates immediately after you start the engine the ESC might be switched off due to technical reasons gt Switch the ignition off and on again If the warning light does not illuminate again after the engine is switched on again the ESC is fully functional again Further information page 154 Note The amp warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched on if the vehi cle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected If the warning light amp does not go out after moving a short distance this means there is an error in the system Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately Anti lock brake system ABS N Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light is illuminated there is a fault in the ABS The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Fault ABS The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately U WARNING a f the w
178. ected accidentally and setting the vehicle in motion The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster page 41 The selector lever is released by depressing the brake pedal while simultane ously pressing the lock button in the direction of the arrow Fig 140 The selector lever is not locked when shifted quickly through N e g from R to D This for example helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck e g in a bank of snow The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in position N for more than approximately 2 seconds without the brake pedal being depressed The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds up to 5 km h FI Note If you want to move the selector lever from mode P to mode D or vice versa move the selector lever quickly This prevents modes R or N from being selec ted accidentally Manual gear shifting Tiptronic Fig 141 Selector lever multi function steering wheel A Read and observe H and on page 145 first Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lev er or multifunction steering wheel This mode can be selected both while hal ted and while driving The currently selected gear is indicated in the Fig 139 on page 145 display The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear page 43 Switching to manual shifting gt Push the gear selector from position D towards the right or left in a right hand
179. ection of the arrow 2 until it engages in the opening c The variable loading floor which is pulled out in such a way is solely used as a seat for example for changing shoes gt To push in the rear section of the variable loading floor grasp by the handle and lift slightly in the direction of the arrow 1 gt Push the variable loading floor against the arrow 2 to the stop When pulling out the variable loading floor the front edge close to the rear seats is lifted at the same time Thus small objects can no longer fall into the space between the boot floor and the variable loading floor CAUTION Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged Divide boot Fig 114 Dividing the boot AN Read and observe M on page 105 first The boot can be divided with the variable loading floor gt Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle and lift in the direc tion of the arrow 1 Fig 113 on page 105 gt Insert the trailing edge in one of the openings A Fig 114 The variable loading floor is secured in the openings A against movement Seats and practical features 105 The variable loading floor can be pulled out a little more before dividing the boot with the variable loading floor This enlarges the space be tween the rear seats and the separation CAUTION Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged Fit and
180. ection with an already paired mobile phone After switching on the ignition the connection is automatically established for the already paired mobile phone Check on your mobile phone if the automatic connection has been established Disconnecting the connection gt By withdrawing the ignition key gt By disconnecting the hands free system in the mobile phone gt By disconnecting the user in the Bluetooth Users menu item in the MAXI DOT display 1 Depending on the Bluetooth version on the mobile phone an automatically generated 6 digit PIN SSP is either displayed or the PIN 1234 has to be entered manually Some mobile phones have a menu in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth connection is completed by inputting a code If the authorisation input is required it must always be performed when re establishing the Bluetooth connection On vehicles fitted with the Amundsent navigation system this function can be accessed via the naviga tion system menu refer to the Operating instructions for the Amundsent navigation system This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Amundsent navigation system 2 Ww S Solving connection problems If the hands free system reports No paired phone found check the operating status of the mobile phone gt Is the mobile phone switched on gt Is the PIN code entered gt Is Bluetooth active gt Is the visibility of the mobile phone ac
181. ections inertia reel or the lock is detected the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident and were therefore stretched must be replaced this is best done by a specialist garage The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspec ted The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked Note The national legal requirements must be observed when using seat belts The physical principle of a frontal collision Fig 4 Driver without a fastened seat belt rear seat passenger without a fastened seat belt A Read and observe H on page 12 first Motion energy so called kinetic energy is produced as soon as the vehicle is moving both for the vehicle and its occupants The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the occupants The greater the speed and weight increase the greater the amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident The speed of the vehicle is the most important factor Doubling the speed of the vehicle from 25 km h up to 50 km hour increases the kinetic energy four times The idea that it is possible to support your body with your hands in a minor ac cident is incorrect Even in a collision at only a low speed the forces acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your b
182. ed in the menu of the MAXI DOT display page 71 IJ Note You can find out more information on adjusting the headlights at a specialist garage Starting off and Driving 153 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Electronic Stability Control ESC 154 Antilock brake system ABS 155 Traction Control System ASR 155 Electronic Differential Lock EDL 155 Driver Steering Recommendation DSR 155 Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA 155 Hill Hold Control HHC 156 E WARNING a A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to shut down The brake assist systems would then fail to function risk of accident Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility weather road and traffic conditions The increased safety provided by the brake assist systems must not tempt you to take safety risks risk of accident a In the event of an ABS fault visit a specialist garage immediately Adjust your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS as you will not know the exact extent of the damage or the extent to which this is limiting the braking efficiency EE CAUTION All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by the manufac turer to ensure the brake assist systems operate correctly Changes to the vehicle e g to the engine brakes chassis can influence the functionality of the brake assist systems page 173 Service
183. embled Always store wheels or tyres in a cool dry place that is as dark as possible Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright Wear indicators The base of the tread of the tyres contains has a 1 6 mm high wear indica tor Fig 171 A In some countries different tyre wear rates may apply Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters TWI triangular sym bols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators Tyre age Tyres age and lose their original characteristics even if they are not being used The service life of the tyres is 6 years Therefore we recommend not us ing tyres that are older than 6 years Wheel bolts Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design We rec ommend that you use wheel rims and wheel bolts from SKODA Original Acces sories Note In some countries the vehicles have a sticker with tyre inflation pressure val ues without pictograms Unidirectional tyres A Read and observe H and on page 197 first The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre The indicated direction of rotation must be adhered to in order to ensure the optimal characteristics of these tyres These characteristics mainly relate to the following gt Increased driving stability gt Reduced risk of aquaplaning gt Reduced tyre noise and tyre wear Wheels 199 Spare and temporary spar
184. emove the ball head from the mounting recess by turn ing the lever downwards as far as it will go Clean the tapered surfaces on the ball head and the mounting recess gt Turn the key 3 180 to the right so that its green marker points upward gt Remove the key in the direction of the arrow gt Insert and press the cap 4 onto the lock in the direction of the arrow iJ gt Check the ball head for secure mounting page 168 Ey WARNING Keep your hands outside the lever s range of motion when attaching the ball head there is a risk of fingers being injured Never attempt to pull the operating lever upwards forcibly to turn the key Doing so would mean the ball head is not attached correctly 168 Driving TE CAUTION After removing the key always replace the cover on the lock there is a risk of the lock getting dirty Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times Such dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely Check proper fitting Fig 158 Correctly secured ball head A Read and observe H and M on page 166 first Check that the ball head is fitted properly each time before use Correctly secured ball head Fig 158 s Lever is up as far as it will go Fig 158 V The release pin 2 is completely exposed both its red and green parts are visible v The key is removed v Cap 3 is on the lock J The ball head does not come out of the mounting recess
185. en and the ignition switched off the light will extinguish auto matically after around 1 minute CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Windscreen and rear window heater 75 Sun visors 76 Sun screen 76 Sun screen in the rear doors 76 Windscreen and rear window heater PASSENGER AIR BAG a _ a Raa gt Fig 58 Buttons for the rear and front window heating Climatronic man ual air conditioning B3T 0697 Buttons for the heating in the centre console Fig 58 G Switching the rear window heater on off Switching the windscreen heater on off When the heater is switched on a lamp illuminates inside the button The heater only works when the engine is running The heater automatically switches off after approximately 10 minutes For the sake of the environment The heating should be switched off as soon as the window is de iced or free from mist The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel economy page 151 Saving electrical energy FF Note a f the on board voltage drops the heater switches off automatically in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control page 197 Auto matic load deactivation a If the light is flashing inside the button the heater is off due to low battery Lights and visibility 75 Sun visors B3T 0722 Fig 60 Sun visor Auxiliary panel fold down makeu
186. ency equipment and self help 209 Tyre inflation pressure indicator Air release valve ON and OFF switch 12 volt cable connector Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent Replacement valve core 5 fe N The valve remover 1 has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compart ment This contains a sealing means and an air compressor Note The declaration of conformity is included with the air compressor or the log folder Preparations for using the breakdown kit CQ Read and observe H on page 209 first The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the puncture repair kit gt Have all the occupants get out The passengers should not stand on the road instead they should remain behind a crash barrier for instance while the wheel is being changed gt Switch off the engine gt Select the Ist gear or place the selector lever of the automatic transmission in the P position gt Apply the handbrake firmly gt Check that you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit page 209 gt Uncouple a trailer gt Remove the breakdown kit from the boot gt Stick the appropriate sticker 2 Fig 183 on page 209 onto the dashboard in the driver s field of view gt Unscrew the valve cap gt Use the valve remover 1 to unscrew the valve core and place it on a clean surface rag paper etc
187. engine running in unventilated or closed rooms The en gine s exhaust gases also contain the odourless and colourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas risk of death Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death EE CAUTION The system can recognize the valid key even if it has been forgotten for ex ample in the front of the vehicle roof D Fig 34 on page 53 There is danger of loss or damage to the key It is therefore not always necessary to know where the key is The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the vehicle is at a standstill The starter or engine may be damaged if the starter is activated when the engine is running Do not tow start the engine there is a risk of damaging the engine and the catalytic converter The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump Start aid page 211 Jump starting EE CAUTION a Avoid high engine revolutions full throttle and high engine loads before the engine has reached its operating temperature risk of damaging the engine Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to run at an idling speed for about 1 minute This prevents any possible accumula tion of heat when the engine is switched off For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary If possible start your journey as
188. ents the rear door from being opened from the in side The door can only be opened from the outside You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key Switching on gt Turn the slot of the safety lock in the direction of the arrow Fig 36 the other way around on the right hand door Switching off gt Turn the slot of the safety lock in the opposite direction to the ar row Fig 36 the other way around on the right hand door CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Activating deactivating 56 Interior monitor and towing protection 56 The anti theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people trying to break into the vehicle The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle hereafter referred to only as alarm Triggering the alarm The alarm is triggered when the following unauthorized actions are carried out on the locked vehicle Unlocking and opening 55 gt Opening the bonnet gt Opening the boot lid gt Opening the doors gt Manipulation of the ignition lock gt Towing the vehicle page 56 gt Movement in the vehicle page 56 gt Sudden and significant voltage drop of the electrical system gt Uncoupling the trailer page 170 Attaching and detaching trailers If the driver s door of a vehicle with a remote control is unlocked and opened by the lock
189. er s footwell as these may get caught in the pedal apparatus when driving or braking You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch brake or acceleration pedals Adjusting the steering wheel position Fig 2 Adjustable steering wheel Lever underneath the steering wheel Sag B 837 0571 N Read and observe H on page 9 first The height and forward back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted gt Swivel the lever underneath the steering wheel downwards Fig 2 gt Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position with regard to the height and forward back position gt Push the lever upwards to the stop 10 Safety E WARNING The lever for adjusting the steering wheel must be locked while you are driving so that the position of the steering wheel cannot accidentally change during the journey there is the risk of an accident a Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when the vehicle is stationary Correct seated position for the front passenger A Read and observe H on page 9 first For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident the follow ing instructions must be observed v v v Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible The front pas senger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed Adjust the head restraint so
190. er vehicle can be used as a jump Start aid page 211 Jump starting a f the gearbox no longer contains any oil your vehicle must only be towed with the front axle raised clear of the ground or on a breakdown vehicle or trailer To protect both vehicles when tow starting or towing the tow rope should be elastic Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a similarly elastic material Emergency equipment and self help 213 There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to towa vehicle which is not standing on a paved road Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes page 214 Front towing eye or page 214 Rear towing eye to the detachable ball head of the towing equipment page 166 EF Note We recommend using a tow rope from SKODA Original Accessories which is available from a SKODA Partner Front towing eye _ BST 0590 Fig 188 Removing the cap installing the towing eye N Read and observe H and H on page 213 first gt Remove the cap from the front bumper Fig 188 A gt Screw in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop Fig 188 and tighten as much as possible For tightening purposes we recommend for example using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye gt After unscrewing t
191. erating weight and payload Operating weight This value represents the minimum operating weight without additional weight increasing equipment such as air conditioning system spare wheel or trailer hitch The specified operating weight is for orientation purposes only The operating weight also contains the weight of the driver 75 kg the weight of the operating fluids the tool kit and a fuel tank filled to 90 capacity Operating weight of the vehicle page 231 Vehicle specific information de pending on engine type Payload It is possible to calculate the approximate maximum payload from the differ ence between the permissible total weight and the operating weight The payload consists of the following weights gt The weight of the passengers gt The weight of all items of luggage and other loads gt The weight of the roof including the roof rack system gt The weight of the equipment that is excluded from the operating weight gt Trailer drawbar load when towing a trailer max 80 kg Note If required you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist garage Measurement of fuel consumption and CO emissions according to ECE Regulations and EU Directives The data on fuel consumption and CO emissions were not available at the time of going to press The data on fuel consumption and CO gt emissions are given on the KODA websites or in the sales and technical vehicle documentatio
192. ere is sufficient bright sunlight the solar cells in the sliding tilting roof de liver the electrical power for the fresh air blower Further informa tion page 115 Climatronic automatic air conditioning system The operation of the sliding tilting roof with solar cells is the same as of a nor mal sliding tilting roof oramic sliding tilting roof Superb CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation 66 Opening closing the sun screen 66 Convenience operation of sliding tilting roof 67 The panoramic sliding tilting roof abbreviated in the following as sliding tilt ing roof can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the outdoor temperature is higher than 20 C The sliding tilting roof can still be operated for approx 10 minutes after switching the ignition off However as soon as the driver or front passenger s door is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding tilting roof TE CAUTION a Always close the sliding tilting roof before disconnecting the battery If for example the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is pos sible that the sliding tilting roof does not operate correctly Next move the ro tary switch into position A Fig 47 on page 66 pull the recess firmly Unlocking and opening 65 downwards and hold forwards firmly The sliding tilting roof opens and closes again after around 10 seconds Do
193. ering lights The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted to the steering angle so that the road in the curve is illuminated This function is active at speeds greater than 10 km h and in all AHL modes Tourist lights Travel mode This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system driving on the left right without dazzling the oncoming vehicles When this mode is active the above mentioned modes and the side swivel of the headlights are deactivated This mode can be enabled or disabled via the MAXI DOT display in the Travel mode page 48 Lights and visibility menu option H WARNING If the AHL system is defective the headlights are automatically lowered to the emergency position which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming traffic This reduces the cone of light in front of the vehicle Drive carefully and visit a specialist garage as soon as possible Note When the tourist light mode is active the warning light flashes for 10 sec onds each time the ignition is switched on Fog lights Fig 52 Light switch Turn on front and rear fog light N Read and observe H on page 67 first Switching on off gt Turn the light switch to position 20 or 2 Fig 52 gt Pull the light switch to position 1 The fog light is switched off in the reverse sequence 1 If both switch on conditions are conflicting for example if the front wheels are turned to the left and the rig
194. es if the airbag system is deployed a Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in mi nor accidents a Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp edged fit tings The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat Further information page 23 Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat EE CAUTION When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward adjust the head restraints so that they are as high as possible a f the head restraints still prevent the child seat from being installed even in the highest position you will need to remove them page 83 After remov ing the child seat reinstall the head restraints FJ Note We recommend that you use child seats from SKODA Original Accessories These child seats were developed and also tested for use in SKODA vehicles They meet the ECE R 44 standard Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat Does not apply to Taiwan Fig 14 Sticker on the B column on the front passenger side B3T 0672 Fig 15 Front passenger sun visor label CQ Read and observe H and on page 22 first Never use a rearward facing child restra
195. es 97 gt Place heavy objects as far forward as possible gt Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or using the nets page 99 In the event of an accident even small and light objects gain so much kinetic energy that they can cause severe injuries The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object Example In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km h an object weighing 4 5 kg produces energy corresponding to 20 times its own weight This means that it results in a weight of approx 90 kg Luggage compartment light The light switches on off when the luggage compartment lid is opened or closed If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off the light will extinguish automatically after around 10 minutes Boot light for Superb Combi vehicles page 103 H WARNING Always store transported objects in the boot and attach them to the lash ing eyes Loose objects can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other road users Loose objects could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants there is a risk of death Please note that transporting heavy objects alters the handling proper ties of the vehicle due to the displacement of the centre of gravity risk of accident The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly a If the items of
196. ese may get damaged Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush risk of damage to the surface of the panelling Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product For the sake of the environment Used cans of vehicle care product represent hazardous waste that is harmful to the environment These must be disposed of in accordance with national legislation Note Because of the special tools and knowledge required and to avoid any poten tial problems with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle we rec ommend that cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle be carried out by a SKODA Service Partner Natural leather N Read and observe H and H on page 181 first Leather is a natural material with specific properties and requires regular cleaning and maintenance The leather should be cleaned on a regular basis depending on the amount of Wear and tear Dust and dirt in the pores and folds act as abrasive materials This leads to se vere corrosion and the premature brittleness of the leather surface We recommend that you remove dust regularly and at short intervals using a cloth or vacuum cleaner Clean soiled leather surfaces with a water dampened cotton or woollen cloth and then dry with a clean dry cloth H Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth soaked in a mild soap solution 2 ta blespoons of neutral soap to 1
197. esel engine Front right main headlight right tail light Horn Audio amplifier sound system Windscreen wipers Valve for metering fuel coolant pump high pressure pump Lambda probe Clutch pedal switch Coil of the coolant pump relay valves high pressure pump Radiator fan Pump for ABS Front left main headlight left tail light Control unit for glow plug system Windscreen heater Power to the internal fuse carrier Power supply for terminal 15 ignition on a In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine the electrical components of this terminal are automatically switched off CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Headlights 224 Replacing the low beam bulb 224 Replacing bulb for main beam and daytime running lights 225 Replacing bulb for main beam 225 Replacing the bulb for the fog light 225 Fuses and light bulbs 223 Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light 226 Rear light Superb Combi 226 Replacing bulbs in rear light Superb Combi 227 Some manual skills are required to change a bulb For this reason we recom mend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other expert help in the event of any uncertainties gt Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb gt Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs Th
198. ess and hold the lower part of the central locking button page 55 in the driver s door gt Hold button A Fig 44 on page 62 in the closing position gt In the KESSY system hold a finger on the sensor B Fig 34 on page 53 The speed limit for winter tyres can be set in the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Window op page 47 The prerequisite for ensuring that the convenience operating feature correctly is the automatic opening closing of all windows is operational Convenience opening or closing the window using the key in the driver s lock is only possible within 45 seconds after locking the vehicle The movement of the window is stopped immediately when the key or the re spective button is released Operational faults I Read and observe H and on page 62 first The automatic power windows do not work if the vehicle battery has been dis connected and connected again while a window was open The system must be activated Activation sequence gt Switch on the ignition gt Pull the top edge of the button and close the window gt Release the button gt Drag and drop the button upwards again and hold for about 1s 64 Operation CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation 64 Convenience operation of sliding tilting roof 65 Electric sliding tilting roof with solar cells 65 The electric sliding tilting roof abbreviated in the following a
199. est gear As a result the braking effect of the engine will be used reducing the load on the brakes Any additional braking should be completed intermittently not continuously Wear and tear The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driv ing style The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted Under these severe conditions the thickness of the brake pads must also be checked by a specialist garage between services Wet roads or road salt The performance of the brakes can be delayed as the brake discs and brake pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times Corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the brake pads occur if the vehicle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system The brakes are cleaned by applying the brakes several times Starting off and Driving 143 Faults in the brake surface If it is found that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the brake pedal can be depressed further the brake system may be faulty Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropri ately as you will not know the exact extent of the damage Low brake fluid level An insufficient level of brake fluid may
200. f individual vehicle systems are checked continuously when the ignition is switched on Some error messages and other information are displayed in the MAXI DOT display The messages are displayed simultaneously with the icons in the MAXI DOT display or with the warning lights in the instrument cluster page 34 Warning lights The Vehicle status menu item is shown in the main menu of the MAXI DOT display whenever at least one fault message is present The first of the fault messages is displayed after this menu item is selected Several error messages are shown on the display under the message e g 1 3 This indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is being displayed Warning symbols in the MAXI DOT display Engine oil pressure too low page 36 Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are too hot Check engine oil level engine oil sensor defective page 33 page 37 Thickness of brake pads page 41 Problem with engine oil pressure page 33 lA Problem with the engine oil pressure If the A symbol is shown in the MAXI DOT display you must have your vehicle checked immediately by a specialist garage The information about the maxi mum permissible engine speed is displayed together with this symbol i Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are too hot If the lt symbol appears in the MAXI DOT display this indicates that the tem perature of the automatic DSG gearbox clutches i
201. f the sliding tilting roof 217 Replacing windscreen wiper blades 218 Fuses and light bulbs 220 Fuses 220 Replacing bulbs 223 Technical data 228 228 Table of Contents 3 You always find these Operating Instructions and the Service Plan in the on board literature for your vehicle Depending on the equipment the on board literature can also contain The ra dio instruction manual or Manual of the navigation systemand in some coun tries also the brochure On the road Owner s Manual These operating instructions apply to all body variants of the vehicle and all related model versions as well as all equipment levels This owner s manual describes all possible equipment variants without identi fying them as special equipment model variants or market dependent equip ment Consequently this vehicle does not contain all of the equipment com ponents described in this Owner s Manual The scope of equipment on your vehicle depends on your purchase contract for the vehicle For questions regarding the scope of equipment please con tact a SKODA Partner if required The Pictures in this manual are for illustrative purposes only The illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle they are only intended to provide general information KODA AUTO a s pursues a policy of constant product and model develop ment Changes in terms of supply scope are possible at any time with regard to design equipmen
202. fly push the stalk to the upper or low er pressure point and release again The Lane ch flash can be activated or deactivated via the MAXI DOT display in the Lane ch flash page 47 menu item E WARNING Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will not be dazzled Automatic driving lamp control o we ly 1 P m mE E i yee l t a es Fig 51 Light switch AUTO position Q Read and observe H on page 67 first If the light switch is in position AUTO Fig 51 the parking lights low beam and number plate lights are switched on or off automatically The light on off switching is controlled by a sensor mounted under the wind screen in the holder of the inside mirror If the light switch is in position AUTO the lettering AUTO illuminates next to the light switch If the light is switched on automatically the symbol 2 next to the light switch also illuminates Automatic driving light control during rain The low beam lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met v The light switch is in position AUTO Fig 51 V Automatic wiping with rain position 1 or wiping position 2 or 3 is turned on page 78 Windscreen wipers and washers J The windscreen wipers are on for more than 15 s The light turns off about 4 minutes after turning off the wipers 70 Operation EE CAUTION Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front
203. formation on the following subjects Using the net partition behind the rear seats 107 Using the net partition behind the front seats 108 Removing and refitting the net partition housing 108 E WARNING The belt locks and the belts must be in their original position after folding back the seat cushions and backrests they must be ready to use The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so that no ob jects from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compart ment under sudden braking risk of injury a Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged Only then can the seat belt for the middle seat reliably fulfil its function Make sure that the transverse rod is inserted into the mounts Fig 119 on page 107 or Fig 120 on page 108 in the forward position Using the net partition behind the rear seats va BA tt Ree I ma LA a An yd A eine aaa Net partition behind the rear seats in the pulled out state A i A Read and observe H on page 107 first Extending gt Pull the net partition by the tab A Fig 119 in the direction of the fasteners E gt Insert the transverse rod into one of the mounts C and push forwards gt Insert the transverse rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle in the same way Seats and practical features 107 Retracting gt Pull the transverse rod back slightly first on one side and then on the ot
204. ft open for more than 30 sec onds If no engine oil has been replenished the warning light will come on again after driving about 100 km The warning light flashes engine oil level sensor faulty The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Oil sensor Workshop If the engine oil level sensor is faulty the warning light flashes several times and an audible signal sounds when the ignition is turned on Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately 2 Traction Control System ASR N Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light flashes the ASR is currently operating If the warning light illuminates there is a fault in the ASR The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Fault Traction control ASR Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately If the warning light illuminates immediately after you start the engine the ASR might be switched off due to technical reasons gt Switch the ignition off and on again If the warning light does not illuminate any more after the engine is switch ed on again then the ASR is fully functional again Further information page 155 Note The amp warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched on if the vehi cle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected If the warning light does not go out after moving a short distance this means there is an error in the system Seek assistance from a sp
205. fully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 1 Fig 13 ON gt Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch H gt Close the storage box on the front passenger s side gt Check that warning light OFF 3 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF illuminates after the ignition is switched on Airbag system 21 U WARNING The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switch ed off Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off Otherwise a fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag a If the warning light OFF is flashing the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in an accident Have the airbag system checked by a specialist ga rage immediately The key cannot be inserted in the key switch while driving Shocks can cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the airbag a The airbag could be triggered unexpectedly in an accident it may result in injury or death CAUTION An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch 22 Safety CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat 23 Use of the child seat in the front passenger seat 24 Child safety and side airbag 24 Classification of child seats 25 Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt 25 Children are gene
206. g position before storing in the box with Vehicle tool kit the tool kit a Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the boot a Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap FF Note The declaration of conformity is included with the jack or the log folder CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Preliminary work 206 Changing a wheel 206 Follow up work 206 Fig 178 Vehicle tool kit Loosening tightening wheel bolts 207 Raising the vehicle 207 The vehicle tool kit is housed in a box in the spare wheel or in the compart Antthatewheel bolt 208 ment for the spare wheel underneath the floor covering in the luggage com partment The box is attached with a strap on the spare wheel Depending on the equipment not all the components listed in the on board tool kit have to be contained in it 1 Screwdriver 2 Spanner for removing and installing the tail light 3 Adapter for anti theft wheel bolts Emergency equipment and self help 205 E WARNING f you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning light system and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance The national le gal requirements must be observed a Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible The following instructions must be followed if the vehicle is subsequently fitted with tyres or rims tha
207. g wheel can be reached with your arms at a slight angle Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance A between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm Fig 1 Adjust the steering wheel page 10 Adjusting the steering wheel position v Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head C Fig 1 Y Correctly fasten the seat belt page 12 Adjust the seats and head restraints page 81 Passive Safety 9 WARNING Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not change this position while driving Also advise your passengers to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is moving a Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and a dis tance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the out er edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o clock position or in any other way e g in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel In such cases you could severely injure your arms hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed a Ensure that there are no objects in the driv
208. ge The engine must be topped up with oil so that the oil level at least reaches range B The engine burns some oil The oil consumption may be as much as 0 5 1 000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you op erate your vehicle Consumption may be slightly higher than this during the first 5 000 kilometres The oil level must be checked at regular intervals We recommend it be checked after each time you refuel or prior to making a long journey We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range A but not above if the engine has been operating at high loads for example during a lengthy motorway trip during the summer months towing a trailer or negotiating a high mountain pass The warning light in the instrument cluster will indicate whether the oil level is too low page 37 Engine oil level Check the oil level using the dipstick as soon as possible Add oil accordingly E CAUTION The oil level must never be above the A range Fig 166 there is a risk of damaging the exhaust system Replenishing N Read and observe H and on page 189 first gt Check the oil level page 190 gt Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening Fig 164 on page 188 gt Replenish the oil in portions of 0 5 litres in accordance with the correct speci fications page 189 gt Check the oil level page 190 gt Carefully screw on the oil filler opening cap and push the dipsti
209. ge 166 first The coupling ball bar must be set prior to installation in the standby position If this is not in the ready position then this must be set to the standby posi tion as follows gt Grip the ball head below the protective cap 2 gt Remove the cap from the lock gt Insert the key into the lock so that its green marking is pointing upwards gt Turn key 1 in direction of the arrow so that the red marking is facing up wards Fig 156 gt Press the release pin 3 as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow and at the same time push the lever 4 downwards as far as it will go in the di rection of the arrow The operating lever remains locked in this position EE CAUTION In the ready position the key cannot be removed nor turned to a different po sition Hitch and trailer 167 Fitting the ball head Fig 157 Insert the ball head lock the lock and put the lock cover on A Read and observe H and on page 166 first gt Pull cap 4 Fig 155 on page 167 downwards gt Adjust the ball head to the ready position page 167 gt Grip the tow bar from underneath Fig 157 and insert into the mounting re cess until you hear it click into place H The operating lever 1 automatically turns upwards and the release pin 2 pops out its red and green parts are visible H If the operating lever 1 does not automatically emerge or if the release pin 2 does not pop out r
210. gt Push the switch B in the direction of one of the arrows 2 Fig 74 Front armrest Fig 75 Adjusting armrest The armrest is adjustable for height and length Setting height gt First of all fold the cover downwards and then lift it in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 75 to one of the 4 fixed positions Move gt Move the cover into the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 75 The armrest includes a storage compartment underneath page 92 EF Note Push the armrest cover all the way back to the stop before applying the hand brake Rear armrest Fig 76 Fold the armrest forwards B3T 0643 Folding forward gt Fold down the armrest in the direction of the arrow Fig 76 A cup holder may be located in the armrest page 90 Seat backrests Fig 77 Pull seat back seat belt to the side panel to unlock The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backr ests forward The seat backrests can be folded forward individually on vehicles with divided rear seats Before folding the seat backrests forwards adjust the position of the front seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests Seats and practical features 87 If the front seats are too far back we recommend taking out the rear head re straints before the seat backrests are folded forward to achieve a loading space that is as horizontal as possible M Fold
211. h on Opening a We recommend that you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity levels This can result in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 Fig 123 on page 710 in Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution con the opened position trol C Fig 125 on page 112 is turned to the position TEU Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by pressing Recirculated air mode the lt button again N Read and observe H on page 112 first Fi WARNING Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting in Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as to the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an acci SEN dent increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows Switching on off start to mist up gt Press the button a traffic jam The warning light in the button illuminates gt Press the amp button again The warning light in the button goes out 114 Operation CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Control elements 115 automatic mode 116 Switching the coo
212. he engine or the exhaust system Inspecting and replenishing 185 EE CAUTION a just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the standard can cause severe damage to parts of the engine the fuel and ex haust system a If a different fuel other than diesel fuel which complies to the above men tioned standards e g petrol is used do not start the engine or switch on the ignition Engine parts could be significantly damaged a Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults CAUTION a The vehicle cannot be operated with biofuel RME therefore this fuel must not be filled in the tank and used for driving the vehicle The use of biofuel RME can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or fuel system Do not mix any fuel additives so called flow improvers petrol and similar agents into the diesel This can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust system CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects E WARNING Continued a f the vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox move the gearshift lever in to Neutral or if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox move the selector lever into position P Allow the engine to cool Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment risk of scalding Wait until no more steam or coolant is escaping HE WA
213. he ignition is switched on In certain accident situations the several airbags may be deployed simultane ously The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions rear end collisions tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover Deployment factors It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to the airbag system in every situation An important role is played by factors such as the type of object that the vehicle hits hard soft the impact angle vehicle speed etc A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which occurs The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the relevant restraint system If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe dam age to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal collision gt Driver s front airbag gt Front passenger airbag gt Driver s knee airbag The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision gt Front side airbag on the side of the accident gt Rear side airbag on the side of the accident gt Head airbags on the side of the accident When an airbag is deployed the following events o
214. he interior monitor is however not acti vated CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Twindoor open close small boot lid 57 TwinDoor open close large boot 58 Open close Superb Combi 58 Delayed locking of the boot lid 58 H WARNING a Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid Other wise the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving even if the lid was locked risk of accident Never drive with the luggage compartment lid open or ajar as otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid as otherwise this could crack there is a risk of injury Make sure that when closing the boot lid no body parts are crushed there is danger of injury EE CAUTION If the vehicle was locked before the boot lid was closed the lid is immediately locked automatically when closed page 58 FF Note The function of the button in the grip above the licence plate is deactivated when starting off or at a speed of 5 km hour or more for vehicles with central locking The function is restored after the vehicle stops and the door is opened Repeated opening and closing of the boot lid can lead to a temporary failure of the function due to the overheating protection of the motors of the Twin door system Twindoor open close small boot lid F
215. he lamp housing gt Push the faulty bulb into the holder turn in anti clockwise direction up to the stop and remove gt Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the stop gt Replace the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn in a clock wise direction to the stop Fuses and light bulbs 227 Technical data CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Vehicle identification data 228 Operating weight and payload 229 Measurement of fuel consumption and CO2 emissions according to ECE Regulations and EU Directives 229 Dimensions 230 Vehicle specific information depending on engine type 231 Multi purpose vehicles AF 235 The details given in the vehicle s technical documentation always take prece dence over the details in the Owner s Manual The listed performance values were determined without performance reduc ing equipment e g air conditioning system Vehicle identification data SIKODA AUTO a s XXXXXKXXXXXXXXX NBXXXXXXXXXXXXX JSST OPTIONS XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX Fig 212 Vehicle data sticker type plate 1 For vehicles with a factory fitted towing device and sports suspension the value is reduced by 25 kg 228 Technical data
216. he light goes out after 60 seconds LEAVING HOME The light turns on automatically after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control 72 Operation The light turns off after 10 seconds or after a pre set time or after the vehicle is locked Activate deactivate the function The functions and settings of the illumination time can be activated deactiva ted via the MAXI DOT display in the menu items Coming Home or Leaving Home page 47 TE CAUTION Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on the windscreen This can impair its function or reliability a If this function is activated constantly the battery will be heavily discharged particularly in short haul travel Hazard warning light system Fig 53 Button for hazard warning light system AN Read and observe H on page 67 first Switching on off gt Press the A Fig 53 button All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard warning light system is switched on The warning light for the turn signals and the warning light in the button also flash at the same time The hazard warn ing light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off The hazard warning light system will switch on automatically if one of the air bags is deployed If the turn signal light is switched on when the hazard warning light and the ignition are both switched on then only the turn signal light on the corr
217. he prescribed distance observe the national legal provisions when doing SO a The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en gine compartment page 186 Engine compartment Handbrake N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light illuminates if the handbrake is applied An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km h for at least 3 seconds while the handbrake is applied The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Release parking brake Brake system N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light illuminates if the brake fluid level in the braking system is too low or there is a fault in the ABS The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Brake fluid Owner s manual gt Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the brake flu id page 193 H E WARNING a f the warning light together with the warning light page 38 Anti lock brake system ABS illuminates do not continue to drive Seek help from a specialist garage A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi cle s braking distance there is a risk of accident The following guidelines should be observed when opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level page 186 Engine compartment A Seat belt warning light
218. he sun screen from the handle A Fig 62 and hold it in sucha Way that it can roll up slowly without being damaged CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Windscreen wipers and washers 78 Headlight cleaning system 79 The wiper and washer system provide a good view through the windscreen or rear window The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is switched on and the bonnet is closed Top up with windscreen wiper fluid page 188 H WARNING Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visi bility and safe driving page 219 Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea sons These can be purchased from a SKODA Partner Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures without heating the windscreen beforehand The window washer fluid could other wise freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front s Automatic wiping during rain is only a support The driver is still responsi ble for setting the function of the windscreen wipers manually depending on the visibility conditions EE CAUTION a f the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are switched on the windscreen wipers will continue wiping in the same mode after the igni tion is turned back on The windscreen wipers could freeze up in cold tempera tures between the time the ignition was turned off
219. he towing eye put the cap on and press into place The cap must engage firmly WARNING The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened oth erwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow starting 214 Do it yourself Rear towing eye B3T 0591 Fig 189 Removing the cap installing the towing eye N Read and observe H and on page 213 first gt Press onto the bottom part of the cap in the rear bumper Fig 189 A and remove it gt Screw in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop Fig 189 and tighten as much as possible For tightening purposes we recommend for example using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye gt After unscrewing the towing eye put the cap on and press into place The cap must engage firmly On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device there is no mount for the screw in towing eye behind the cap page 214 Vehicles with a tow hitch EE CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened other wise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow starting Vehicles with a tow hitch A Read and observe H and M on page 213 first On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device there is no mount for the screw in towing eye behind the cap Use the built in detachable ball rod for towing page 166 Hitch Towing the vehicle using the towing devic
220. he tyre gt Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose 5 back onto the tyre valve and repeat the inflation process gt If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either this means the tyre has sustained too much damage You cannot seal with tyre with the breakdown kit H gt Switch off the air compressor gt Remove the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve Once a tyre pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is reached the journey may be continued at a maximum speed of 80 km h 50 mph E WARNING a If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2 0 bar this means the damage sustained was too serious The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre Do not continue to drive Seek help from a specialist garage The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is be ing inflated there is a risk of burning TE CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest there is a risk of overheating Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before switching it on again Notes for driving with tyre repaired N Read and observe H on page 209 first The inflation pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked after driving for 10 minutes If the tyre pressure is 1 3 bar or less gt Do not continue to drive You cannot properly seal with tyre with the breakdown kit If the tyre pressure is 1 3 bar or more gt Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value gt
221. her and remove it from the mounts C Fig 119 gt Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged Note If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment the roll up luggage com partment cover can be removed page 101 Using the net partition behind the front seats Fig 120 Net partition behind the front seats in the pulled out state QN Read and observe H on page 107 first Extending gt Fold the rear seats forward page 87 gt Pull the net partition by the tab A Fig 120 gt First of all insert the cross rod into the mount C on one side and push it for ward gt Insert the transverse rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle in the same way Retracting gt Pull the transverse rod back slightly first on one side and then on the other and remove it from the mounts C Fig 120 gt Hold the transverse rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged gt Fold the rear seats back into their original positions page 87 108 Operation Removing and refitting the net partition housing v A Xe T Fig 121 Rear seats Removing the net partition housing N B3T 0663 AN Read and observe H on page 107 first Removing gt Fold the rear seats forward page 87 gt Open the rear right door gt Push the housing A in the direction of
222. here is a danger of injury and accidents When leaving the vehicle never leave people who are not completely in dependent such as children unattended in the vehicle The children might for example release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear The ve hicle could then start to move risk of injury and accidents These individu als might also not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help themselves Can be fatal at very high or very low temperatures a If the car is locked from the outside and the safe lock system is switched on no one must be in the car as it is then not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency risk to life Note When leaving the vehicle always check if it is locked a In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle Upon failure of the central locking system the key can only be used to unlock and lock the driver s door The other doors and the boot lid can be emergency opened or emergency released Emergency locking of the door page 216 Emergency unlocking of the boot lid page 217 Vehicle key Fig 31 Remote control key AN Read and observe H on page 51 first Two remote control keys are provided with the vehicle Fig 31 The transmitter
223. hese substances may ignite risk of fire CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Natural leather 181 Synthetic leather fabrics and Alcantara 182 Seat covers 182 Seat belts 183 Regular and proper care helps to ensure efficiency and maintain the value of your vehicle We recommend using vehicle care products from SKODA Original Accessories These are available from SKODA Partners The usage instructions on the pack age must be observed EN WARNING a Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not com pletely independent e g children there is a danger of poisoning EE CAUTION Be sure to check clothing for colourfastness to avoid any damage or visible stains on the material leather panels and textiles Remove fresh stains such as those from ball point pens ink lipstick shoe polish etc from the material leather panels and textiles as quickly as possi ble a Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the temperature inside the vehicle is high Do not attach scent dispensers or air fresheners to the dash panel risk of damage to the dash panel Do not stick any stickers on the inside of the rear windows the rear side win dows and in the vicinity of the heating elements on the windscreen or near the window aerial Th
224. hicles with the START STOP system the pole terminal of the charger must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth page 212 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system Note We therefore recommend that vehicle batteries be rapid charged by a special ist garage Replacing A Read and observe H and F on page 194 first The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity voltage current and size as the original battery Suitable vehicle battery types can be purchased from a specialist garage We recommend having the battery replaced by a specialist garage where the new vehicle battery will be installed properly and the original battery will be disposed of in accordance with national regulations Disconnecting or reconnecting A Read and observe H and F on page 194 first The following functions are initially deactivated or are no longer able to oper ate faultlessly after the vehicle battery has been disconnected and reconnec ted Function Operating measure Electrical power window operational faults page 64 Panoramic sliding roof operational faults page 218 User manual of the radio or user manual of the naviga tion system Enter the radio navigation system code number Setting the clock page 32 Data in the multifunction display are de lated page 44 EF Note We recommend having the vehicle checked b
225. how menu If no data connection via WLAN is available the display will show the message Data connection not available This can be caused by a weak GSM signal for example Try to establish the connection again at a location with stronger sig nal reception Switching off gt Select the Wi Fi Off menu item in the Phone menu The display shows the message Switch off Wi Fi gt Select the OK menu item The display shows the message Wi Fi switch off Connecting an external device to the WLAN network Connecting using the Wi Fi network search gt Switch on the Wi Fi network page 130 Switching Wi Fi network on off gt On the device to be connected search for available WLAN networks Wi Fi see operating instructions for the device to be connected gt Select the appropriate Wi Fi network connection in the menu of the net works found e g Wi Fi SK_WLAN 1234 If menu item WPA2Z is set in the Phone Wi Fi Settings Encryption menu then the password displayed when the Wi Fi is switched on must be entered in the device to be connected The password can be found in the Phone Wi Fi Password Show menu If menu item Open is set in the Phone Wi Fi Settings Encryption menu the connection is made automatically Connecting using WPS service for easy connection gt Switch on the Wi Fi network page 130 Switching Wi Fi network on off gt Open the Phone Wi Fi WPS config menu in the instrument cluste
226. ht 2 in the instrument cluster page 40 When the airbags are deployed they fill with gas and inflate A grey white or red non harmful gas is released when the airbag is inflated This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle Depending on the vehicle equipment the airbag system consists of the following modules gt Electronic control unit gt Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger page 17 gt Driver s knee airbag page 18 gt Side airbags page 19 gt Head airbags page 20 gt Airbag warning light in the instrument cluster page 40 gt Key switch for the front passenger airbag page 21 gt Warning light for the front passenger airbag deactivation activation in the middle of the dash panel page 21 Note The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life f you sell your vehicle provide the complete vehicle documentation to the new owner Please note that the information relating to the possibility of de activating the front passenger airbag must be included When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system it is important to comply with the national legal requirements Airbag deployment QN Read and observe H on page 16 first The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer additional protection in the event of an accident The airbag system is only functional when t
227. ht turn signal light is switched on the turn signal light has the higher priority The warning light 20 illuminates in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are switched on page 34 Fog lights with the CORNER function N Read and observe H on page 67 first The CORNER function lights the front fog lamp on the relevant side of the ve hicle to illuminate the area around the vehicle when turning parking etc The CORNER function is switched on automatically if the following conditions are met vV The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply to the right or left vV The engine is running v The vehicle is stopped or moves at a speed of no more than 40 km h J The low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position AUTO and the low beam is switched on v The daytime running lights are not switched on JV The fog lights are not switched on Note The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear Rear fog light CQ Read and observe H on page 67 first Switching on off gt Turn the light switch to position 20 or Fig 52 on page 71 gt Pull the light switch to position 2 The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse sequence The warning light 0 illuminates in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light is switched on page 34 When in reverse gear only the rear fog lamp illuminates on the driver s side Lights and visibility 71 Only
228. i network connection using WPS Pushbutton Automatic connection WPS PIN PIN entry for the connection Data counter Display information about the volume of data transferred Current Connection display of the volume of data transferred for the cur rent connection Total Display of the total volume of data transferred Reset Resetting of the information about the volume of data transferred Settings WLAN network settings Access point Access point settings Settings Access point management APN Change the access point name User name User Name Password Password Reset Reset access point factory settings Prioritisation Set the connection priority Calls Set the connection priority for calls Data Set the connection priority for data transfer Encryption Set the encryption WPA2 Enable WPA 2 encryption Open No encryption a Visibility Set the WLAN network visibility Visible WLAN network is visible to other devices Invisible WLAN network is not visible to other devices Data roaming Set the data roaming No roaming Data roaming is not allowed Allow Data roaming is allowed Always ask Question setting for data roaming Wi Fi Channel Select WLAN network channels preferably set to channel 11 Channel 1 Channel 11 Display the WLAN network channels Reset Reset Wi Fi network factory settings CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the follo
229. ia systems and Quick Tips SKODA Manual App get to know your vehicle The application SKODA Manual is designed for tablet users with the systems Android and iOS who have an interest in getting to know the SKODA vehicle brand or already have one The application contains the complete version of the electronic manual for all current models of the SKODA brand Furthermore it contains a list of all warning lights a guide for media systems as well as a picture diagram of the Quick Tips Some of the main functions of the application include gt Easy content navigation gt Easy content reading gt Full text search through the entire manual gt Tab for quick access to favourite chapter Ready for download in the AppStore for iOS and Google Play for Android www skoda auto com You also can do something for the environment The fuel consumption of your SKODA and the related pollutant emissions are determined crucially on how you drive The noise and the wear of the vehicle depend on the way how you deal with your vehicle This Owner s Manual shows you how to use your SKODA vehi cle with utmost care for the environment while driving eco nomically at the same time Also please pay attention to those parts in the Owner s Manual that are marked amp below Work with us for the sake of the environment Navod k obsluze Superb anglicky 11 2014 74 5610 19 20 3T0012720AH 3T0012720AH
230. icle when driving in wintry road conditions To get best possible handling winter tyres must be fitted to all four wheels The minimum tread depth must be 4 mm Winter tyres marked with M S and a peak snowflake symbol of a lower speed category can be used provided that the permissible maximum speed of these tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is higher Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved by SKODA for your model of vehicle The speed limit for winter tyres can be set in the MAXI DOT display in the Win ter tyres menu item page 47 For the sake of the environment Re fit the summer tyres at an appropriate time as they provide better handling properties a shorter braking distance less tyre noise and reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 C The fuel consumption is also lower Snow chains When driving in wintry road conditions snow chains improve not only traction but also the braking performance Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 9 mm For technical reasons it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the follow ing wheel tyre combinations Tyre size 205 55 R16 205 55 R16 205 50 R17 Wheel size 7J x 162 6J x 16 6J x 17 a Not valid for vehicles with 3 6 1 191 kW FSI engine Remove the full wheel
231. icult to heal If the seat heating is used we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the jour ney Please consult your doctor who can evaluate your specific condition CAUTION Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them The seat heater in the following cases will not turn on there is a risk of damaging the seat covers and seat heater a The seats are not occupied Items are fastened to or stored on the seats e g child seat bags etc a Additional seat covers or protective covers are fixed to the seats Clean the seat covers page 182 Seat covers Note a If the rear seat heating is set to the highest intensity level 3 it is automati cally switched over to level 2 after 10 minutes two warning lights are illumina ted on the switch f the on board voltage drops the heater switches off automatically in order to provide sufficient electrical power for the engine control page 197 Ventilated front seats Fig 73 Rocker switch for the seat venti lation 86 Operation Heat and condensation can be removed from the seat cushions and seat backrests on the front seats The ventilation is operated using the rocker switch Fig 73 in the front part of the seat cushion in front of the seat control elements for the electric front seat adjustment Switching on gt Switch the rocker s
232. ies te RUSSI 4 6 SAE OW 30 VW 502 00 505 00 3 6 1 191 kW FSI VW 502 00 5 5 Diesel engines Specification Capacity 1 6 1 77 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 4 3 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 4 3 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 4 3 a Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without DPF TE CAUTION a f the above engine oils are not available a different engine oil can be used in an emergency To prevent damage to the engine a maximum of 0 5 litres only of the following engine oils may be used until the next oil change For petrol engine models ACEA A3 ACEA B4 or API SN API SM For diesel engine models ACEA C3 or API CJ 4 Checking the oil level Fig 166 Principle sketch Dipstick 190 General Maintenance N Read and observe H and on page 189 first The dipstick indicates the engine oil level Fig 166 Checking the oil level Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has reached its operating temperature gt Switch off the engine Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the sump gt Open the bonnet gt Pull out the dipstick gt Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop gt Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level Oil level within range A No oil must be refilled Oil level within range Oil can be refilled The oil level may lie in range A Oil level within ran
233. ig 38 Handle of boot lid opened small boot lid A Read and observe H and on page 57 first After unlocking the vehicle the boot lid can be opened with the button in the handle above the number plate Opening gt Press the button in the handle at the lower edge of the boot lid 1 Fig 38 and lift the boot lid Closing gt Pull down and strike the lid with the handle 2 Fig 38 The small boot lid can also be opened by pressing the symbol s button on the remote control key page 52 Unlocking andopening 57 TwinDoor open close large boot Fig 39 Handle of boot lid opened large boot lid N Read and observe H and H on page 57 first After unlocking the vehicle the boot lid can be opened with the button in the handle above the number plate Opening gt Press the button in the handle at the lower edge of the boot lid 1 Fig 39 gt Wait until the brake light 2 in the rear window flashes twice and then lift the lid Closing gt Pull down and strike the lid with the handle 3 Fig 39 Open close Superb Combi B3T 0581 Fig 40 Boot lid handle opening the boot lid 58 Operation Fig 41 Handle in the inner panelling of the boot lid N Read and observe H and M on page 57 first After unlocking the vehicle the boot lid can be opened with the button in the handle above the number plate Opening gt Press the handle A Fig 40 and raise the lid in the direction of th
234. ig 55 Interior light and rear reading lights Switch for reading lights Fig 55 7 Switching left reading lamp on off Switching right reading lamp on off The rear interior light is operated together with the front interior light page 73 1 In this position apply the same rules to the rear interior light as for the front interior light page 73 74 Operation Applies to vehicles with a panoramic sliding roof Fig 56 Interior lights at the rear The light is operated by moving the lens into one of the following posi tions Fig 56 7 Switching on Control with the door contact switch middle position 0 Switching off The warning light Fig 57 turns on when the front door is opened The warning light turns off when the front door is closed In vehicles without a warning light only a reflector is installed at this point gt EF Note If the door is open and the ignition switched off the light extinguishes auto matically after around 20 minutes Entry lighting The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror and illumi nates the entry area of the front door The light illuminates after the vehicle has been unlocked or on opening the front door The lighting goes out about 30 seconds after the doors are closed or if the ignition is switched on HH WARNING If the entry light is on do not touch its cover risk of burns EF Note If the door is op
235. ilation 26 Power socket in the boot Fuses and light bulbs 221 Fuses in the engine compartment Fig 200 Cover for the fuse box in the en gine compartment Sat A Read and observe H and M on page 220 first On some vehicles the battery cover must be removed before removing the cover for the fuse box page 195 Replacing fuses gt Move the safety catch of the cover of the fuse box A Fig 200in the direc tion of the arrow The symbol is displayed behind the catches gt Remove the cover gt Replace the appropriate fuse gt Place the cover on top of the fuse box gt Turn the securing bracket A in opposite direction of the arrow The symbol is displayed behind the catches 8 The cover is locked into position EE CAUTION The cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be applied correctly Water may get into the fuse box if the cover is not replaced properly there is a risk of damage to the vehicle 222 Do it yourself Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment B3T 0534 Fig 201 Fuses Type A Type B N Read and observe H and F on page 220 first Fuse assignment in the engine compartment version A i Consumer 1 Front right main headlight right tail light 2 Valves for ABS 3 4 Not assigned 5 Horn 6 12 Not assigned 13 Control unit for automatic gearbox 14 Not assigned 15 Coolant pump 16 Not a
236. in the direction of the arrow Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder Closing takes place in reverse order Cup holder at the front On vehicles that are fitted with a cover for cup holders you can cover the cup holder by pulling on the handle A in the direction of the arrow 90 Operation Rear cup holder gt Press on the front end of the armrest in the direction of the arrow Fig 84 A the cup holder comes out gt To slide the cup holder in again press the middle part of the cup hold er Fig 84 B and slide it into the armrest in the direction of the arrow E WARNING Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder They may spill if the vehicle moves there is a risk of scalding Do not use any cups or beakers made of fragile material e g glass porce lain This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident CAUTION Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey There is a risk of spilling e g when braking which may cause damage to the electrical components or seat upholstery a Slide in the cup holder before raising the rear armrest Cigarette lighter B3T 0692 Fig 85 Centre console Cigarette lighter front rear N Read and observe H on page 89 first Operation gt Press the button of the cigarette lighter A or B Fig 85 gt Wait until the button pops forward gt Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and
237. ing a To avoid damaging the parking aid sensors while cleaning with high pressure cleaners or steam jets the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short pe riods while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 C risk of damaging the vehicle See also Washing cars with decorative films using a high pressure clean er page 179 CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Taking care of your vehicle s paintwork 178 Plastic parts 178 Rubber seals 178 Chrome parts 178 Decorative films 179 Windows and exterior mirrors 179 Headlight lenses 179 Door lock cylinders 179 Cavity protection 180 Jack 180 Wheels 180 Towing device and mounting recess 180 Underbody protection 180 We recommend using vehicle care products from SKODA Original Accessories These are available from SKODA Partners The usage instructions on the pack age must be observed E WARNING a Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not com pletely independent e g children there is a danger of poisoning Protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts when clean ing the underfloor the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims risk of cuts Car care 177 CAUTIO
238. ing a CD gt Press the button A Fig 132 to eject a CD For assigned memory spaces the warning lights now illuminates in the but tons D gt Press the corresponding button D The CD is ejected Ejecting all CDs gt Press and hold the button A Fig 132 for more than 2 seconds to eject the CDs 136 Operation All CDs in the CD changer are ejected consecutively EF Note a Insert a CD with the labelled side facing up into the CD slot B Fig 132 until it is automatically drawn in The play function will start automatically After loading a CD into the CD changer wait until the warning light of the corresponding button D is illuminated Then the CD case B is free to load the next CD a If a position is selected on which a CD is already located this CD is ejected Remove the ejected CD and load the desired CD DVD preinstallation B3T 0521 Fig 133 Seat backrest left front seat right front seat DVD preinstallation Fig 133 A Openings for attachment of DVD player holder Audio video input Connection input DVD player Only one DVD preinstallation is factory installed in the seat backrest of the front seat The DVD player holder and DVD player can be purchased from SKODA original accessories For a description of the use refer to the operating instructions for these devices and equipment E WARNING a f there are passengers on the rear seats the DVD player holder must not be u
239. ing hook an ee Fig 101 Folding hooks Superb Superb Combi N Read and observe H and H on page 98 first Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage such as bags etc are pro vided on both sides of the boot Folding forward Superb Press on the lower portion of the hook A and fold down direction of the arrow 1 Fig 101 Superb Combi Take hold of hook B in the area of the arrow and fold down in the direction of arrow 2 Fi CAUTION The maximum permissible hook load is 7 5 kg 99 Seats and practical features Floor covering KG Fig 102 Fixing the floor covering Superb Superb Combi N Read and observe H and M on page 98 first The raised floor covering of the luggage compartment can be fixed e g when handling the spare wheel gt Superb With the loop on a hook on the luggage compartment cov er Fig 102 A gt Superb combi With the hook on the frame of the luggage compartment lid Fig 102 B Luggage net Fig 103 Luggage net A Read and observe H and M on page 98 first The luggage net is located on the underside of the luggage compartment cov er The net is designed for transporting lighter objects 100 Operation SA WW 531 0499 HD WARNING Only store soft objects with a total weight of 1 5 kg in the net Heavy ob jects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury EI CAUTION Do not place any sharp objects into the net risk
240. ing recirculated air mode on gt Repeatedly press the button z until the warning light on the left side of the button is illuminated Switch on automatic air distribution control gt Repeatedly press the button lt until the warning light on the right hand side of the button illuminates Switch off automatic air distribution control temporarily If the air quality sensor does not switch on automatic recirculated air mode when there is an unpleasant smell you can switch in on manually gt Press the button The warning light illuminates in the button on the left side Switching recirculated air mode off gt Press the button AUTO or press the symbol button lt again until the warning lights in the button go out E WARNING Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an acci dent increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows Start to mist up Note a As soon as the windscreen mists up press the symbol button max Press the AUTO button once the windscreen has demisted a The automatic air distribution control operates only if the outside tempera ture is higher than approx 2 C Recirculation mode Version 2 Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting in to the vehicle for example when d
241. ing to the seat Fig 5 A until it you hear it click into place gt Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy to get hold of It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the maximum protection The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis must not be lie across the stomach and must always fit snugly Fig 6 c Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt This is the only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child The lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis on expectant mothers to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdo men Fig 6 D Release Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary gt Press the red button in the belt buckle Fig 5 B the lock tongue pops out gt Manually guide the belt back so that it is easier to fully roll up the webbing the seat belt does not twist EE CAUTION When releasing the seatbelt ensure that the tongue of the lock does not dam age the door trim or other parts of the interior Belt height adjustment on the front seats Fig 7 Front seat Seat belt height ad juster
242. int system on a seat which is protec ted by an active airbag installed in front of it This could cause serious injury to the child even death For safety reasons we recommend that you install child seats on the rear seats whenever possible The following instructions must be followed when using a child seat on the front passenger seat gt The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child seat H gt If possible adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical SO as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the back of the child seat Transporting children safely 23 gt If possible move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no con tact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it gt With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3 make sure that the loop around fit tings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the same height as the loop around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side gt Set the height adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible gt Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible gt Place and fasten the child seat on the seat and the child in the child seat ac cording to the specifications in the manufacturer s user manual of the child Seat E WARNING The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child seat on the front
243. ion of a cer tain severity Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions side and rear end collisions in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced from the front U WARNING Any work on the belt tensioner system including removal and installation of system components because of other repair work must only be carried out by a specialist garage The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single acci dent If the belt tensioners have been deployed it is then necessary to re place the entire system AF Note Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed This is not an in dication of a fire in the vehicle When disposing of the vehicle or parts of the belt tensioner system it is im portant to comply with national legal requirements SKODA service partners are familiar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with de tailed information Seat belts 15 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects System description 16 Airbag deployment 16 The airbag system provides as a supplement to the seat belts additional oc cupant protection during severe frontal and side collisions H WARNING An airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a fastened seat belt The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt but instead forms part of the
244. ion on the following subjects Using the information system 42 Display a low temperature 43 Gear recommendation 43 Door boot or engine compartment warning 44 The information system provides the driver with alerts and messages about in Fig 27 Buttons wheel on the operating lever on the multifunction dividual vehicle systems steering wheel This information and advice is shown in the instrument cluster display or indi cated by the illumination of the corresponding warning light in the instrument cluster Some functions of the information system can be operated using the buttons The information system provides the following information and instructions on the multifunction steering wheel Fig 27 depending on vehicle equipment gt Data relating to the multi function display MFD page 44 I Read and observe H on page 42 first Description of the operation gt Data relating to the MAXI DOT display page 46 Button Action Punetion gt Service interval display page 48 wheel gt Auto Check Control page 33 Briefly push up or down Select data set data values gt Selector lever positions for an automatic transmission page 145 e on Display main menu of the Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re Press briefly View information eaii specification sponsible for the operation of your vehicle To return up one level in the menu of Press briefly
245. ir outlet vents according to the setting of control dial and the outside atmospheric conditions The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 2 3 Fig 123 and 5 Fig 124 the outlets can be opened and closed individually Set the air flow direction gt To adjust the height of the air flow turn the horizontal vanes up or down with the movable adjuster A Fig 123 Fig 124 gt To change the lateral direction of the air flow turn the vertical fins with the movable adjuster A Fig 123 or Fig 124 to the left or right Setting the amount of airflow gt Turn the knob B Fig 123 and Fig 124 to position 24 to fully open the air outlet gt Turn the knob B Fig 123 and Fig 124 to position O to close the air outlet The knob can be adjusted to any position in between An overview of the available settings for adjusting the direction of the air outlet Set the direction of the air Active air outlet vents outlet BP 3 12 v5 1 2 4 6 2 3 5 25 25 o pA 4 6 F Note Do not cover the air outlet vents with objects of any kind Using the air conditioning system economically A Read and observe H and H on page 110 first The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine when in cooling mode which will affect the fuel consumption It is recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the interior has been
246. is chapter contains information on the following subjects Modes and use of selector lever 145 Manual gear shifting Tiptronic _ Ci Starting off and driving 147 Malfunction 148 WARNING Do not depress the accelerator if the forward driving mode is changed when the vehicle is halted and the engine is running there is a risk of an accident Never shift the selector lever to R or P modes when driving there is a risk of an accident a The vehicle must be held on the brake pedal in D S or R modes if the ve hicle is halted and the engine is running Even when the engine is idling power transmission is never completely interrupted the vehicle will creep CAUTION a f the selector lever is shifted to N while the vehicle is being driven you must lift off the accelerator pedal and you will need to wait until the engine has reached its idling speed before shifting the selector lever to a forward driving mode again At temperatures below 10 C the engine can only be started in selector lev er position P a Never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal when stopping ona hill this may lead to transmission damage FF Note After the ignition is switched off the ignition key can only be withdrawn when the selector lever is in position P Modes and use of selector lever 10 14 D4 1 Consumption E H J 100km 125 4 km trip 12440 1253 2 Fig 139 Selector lever display Starting
247. is not possible because a fault exists in the system Seek help from a specialist garage ASR intervention Take over steering The parking procedure is terminated by an ASR intervention PARK ASSIST Turn on turn signal and select reverse gear The prerequisites for manoeuvring out of a parking space using the system have been met Switch on the turn signals and shift into reverse Automatic space departure not possible Space too small The manoeuvring procedure using the system is not possible The parking gap is too small Q Park Assist Brake interv Speed too high The speed was too high during the parking and was automatically reduced CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Activating deactivating 161 Storing and maintaining speed 162 Changing the stored speed 162 Switching off temporarily 162 The Cruise Control System CCS maintains a set speed more than 25 km h without you having to actuate the accelerator pedal This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output and braking power of the engine The warning light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the cruise con trol system is switched on WARNING For safety reasons the cruise control system must not be used in dense traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces such as icy roads slippery roads loose gravel there is a risk of an accident The saved spee
248. itch recirculation on off page 114 Control the seat heater on the front left seat page 85 t Control the seat heater on the front right seat page 85 Note The warning light in the symbol button A C illuminates after activation even if not all of the conditions for the function of the cooling system are met page 112 The operational readiness of the cooling system is indicated by the warning light in the button illuminating Air conditioning system 113 adjusting A Read and observe M on page 112 first Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning system for the respective operating modes dial i Fig 12 112 Fig 12 112 Control dial settings Fig 125 on page Button Fig 125 on page Air outlet vents 2 Fig 123 Settings A A Ic mow on page 710 Defrost defog windscreen and Desired tempera Automatically l Open and align with the i i Do not switch on side windows ture switched on side window To the stop to the Switched off right Desired tempera ture The fastest cooling Tone ce toine A e Activated Briefly switch on Opening The fastest heating Briefly switch on Opening Comfortable heating 2or3 A Switched off Do not switch on Opening Desired tempera 12o0r3 ture Comfortable cooling Activated Do not switch on Open and align to the roof To the stop to the left Fresh air mode ventilation Desired position Switched off Do not switc
249. ition to the key Convenience features of passenger seat 87 Front armrest 87 Rear armrest 87 Seat backrests 87 Rear seat folded forward Superb Combi 88 Seat heaters B3T 0493 Fig 72 Heating Front seats rear seats The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the outer rear seats can be heated electrically The seat heating can only be switched on when the engine is running Switching on the front seat heater gt Press the controller in the area of the symbols and amp Fig 72 A Switch on rear seat heater gt Press the symbol button or Fig 72 B By pressing the button once the heating is switched to the highest intensity level 3 which is indicated by all three of the warning lights in the switch illumi nating With repeated pressing of the switch the heating is turned down until it goes off The seat heating level is indicated by the number of illuminated warning lights in the respective control Seats and practical features 85 If the engine is switched off and then turned on again within 10 mins with the rear seat heating switched then each rear seat heating is automatically turned on again WARNING If you have a subdued pain and or temperature sensitivity e g through medication paralysis or because of chronic illness e g diabetes we rec ommend not to use the seat heating This can lead to burns on the back the posterior and the legs which are diff
250. k in the system Do not merely top up the coolant Have the cooling system checked by a specialist garage Replenishing A Read and observe H and on page 191 first The coolant expansion tank must always contain a small amount of cool ant page 191 H in section Introduction gt Switch off the engine gt Allow the engine to cool gt Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and carefully un screw the cap gt Replenish the coolant gt Turn the cap until it clicks into place FE CAUTION Only top up with new coolant Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available In this case use only water and have the correct mixing ratio of water and cool ant additive restored by a specialist garage as soon as possible CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Checking the brake fluid level 193 Changing 193 E WARNING The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en gine compartment page 186 Do not continue your journey if the fluid level has fallen below the MIN marking Fig 168 on page 193 there is a risk of an accident Seek help from a specialist garage Do not use used brake fluid the function of the brake system may be im paired risk of accident CAUTION Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the
251. king 217 Sliding tilting roof 218 Start engine KESSY 142 Switching off the ignition KESSY 143 Towing the vehicle 213 Towing the vehicle using the tow hitch 214 tyre repair 209 Unlocking the boot lid 217 Unlocking the driver s door 216 Emergency equipment Fire extinguisher 204 First aid kit 204 Jack 205 Vehicle tool kit 205 Warning triangle 204 Emissions 229 Engine Running in 148 Engine compartment 186 Brake fluid 193 Coolant 191 Overview 188 Vehicle battery 193 Engine number 228 Engine oil 189 Capacity 189 Checking 190 Note messages 36 Replenishing 191 Specifications 189 Engine oil level Warning light 37 Engine oil pressure Warning light 36 Entry lighting 75 Environment 149 Environmental compatibility 151 Environmentally friendly driving 149 EPC Warning light 39 ESC Function 154 Warning light 37 Exhaust inspection system Warning light 38 Extendable variable loading floor Fixing set 106 Extending variable loading floor 105 Divide boot 105 Movable lashing eyes 107 Partial extension 105 F Fastening elements 99 Fatigue detection 165 Function 165 Information messages 165 Films 179 Fire extinguisher 204 First aid kit 204 Floor covering Fixing 100 Fog lights 71 Warning light 41 Fog lights with CORNER function 71 Folding hook 99 Fold in passenger s mirror 80 Footmats 145 see Footmats 145 Force limit Electric boot li
252. l the following instructions must be followed gt Remove the full wheel trim or the caps of the wheel bolts gt First of all slacken the anti theft wheel bolt and then the other wheel bolts gt Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the ground gt Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface cloth paper etc gt Remove the wheel carefully gt Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts gt Lower the vehicle gt Tighten the opposite wheel bolts alternately cross wise with the wheel wrench Tighten the anti theft wheel bolt last gt Replace the wheel trim or the caps When fitting unidirectional tyres ensure that the indication is cor rect page 197 E WARNING If it is established when changing a wheel that the wheel bolts are corro ded and difficult to move then these must be replaced Follow up work AN Read and observe H on page 206 first After changing the wheel the following work must be carried out gt Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special bolt page 200 gt Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the strap gt Check the tyre pressure on the installed spare wheel as soon as possible gt Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible After changing the wheel the tyre pressure should be adjusted In vehicles with tyre
253. l SKODA Genuine Parts KODA partner A company that has been authorised by the manufacturer KODA AUTO a s or its sales partner to sell new KODA vehicles and when applicable to service them using SKODA Genuine Parts and sell SKODA Genuine Parts Explanation of symbols An overview of the symbols used in the instruction manual and a brief explan ation of their meaning Reference to the introductory module of a chapter with important infor mation and safety warnings gt Continuation of the module on the next page Situations where the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possible Trademark Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display Text display in the segment display H WARNING Texts with this symbol draw attention to threats of a serious accident in jury or loss of life EE CAUTION Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible inoperability of some systems For the sake of the environment Texts with this symbol contain information on environmental protection as well as tips for economical operation EF Note Texts with this symbol contain additional information Notes 5 Structure of the manual The operating manual is hierarchically divided into the following areas Section e g Safety the title of the Section is always indicated at the lower left side Main chapters e g Airbag System the title of the main chapter is always indi
254. l temperature of the vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the sys tem a f the driver s seat belt is removed for more than approx 30 seconds or the driver s door is opened during stop mode the engine will have to be started manually After the manual engine start and with a manual gearbox the automatic en gine shutdown can take place only when a minimum distance required for the system function has been covered Operation in vehicles with manual gearbox AN Read and observe H on page 162 first In compliance with the operating conditions automatic engine shutdown au tomatic engine start takes place as described Automatic engine shutdown gt Stop the vehicle gt Shift the gear lever to Neutral gt Release the clutch pedal Automatic engine shutdown takes place segment display shows START STOP ACTIVE or a check mark appears in the MAXI DOT display Fig 152 on page 163 Automatic engine start gt Depress the clutch pedal The automatic start procedure takes place again Operation in vehicles with automatic gearbox QI Read and observe H on page 162 first In compliance with the operating conditions automatic engine shutdown au tomatic engine start takes place as described Automatic engine shutdown gt Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal Assistsystems 163 Automatic engine shutdown takes place segment display shows START STOP ACTIVE or a che
255. lay Winter tyres max speed km h 1 On models on which the speedometer indicates mph the second speed is displayed in km h 48 Operation Units of measurement The units for the temperature consumption and distance driven can be set here Assist systems The tones of the audible signals for the parking aid can be adjusted here Alt speed dis Display of the second speed in mph can be activated here Further information page 33 Display of the second speed Service The days and kilometres remaining until the next service can be displayed here Further information page 48 Service interval display Factory setting The display functions can be restored to their factory settings here Compass point display A Read and observe H on page 47 first For vehicles with a factory fitted navigation system an abbreviation for each point of the compass depending on the current direction of travel is shown on the top left hand corner of the display The compass point display only operates when the ignition is switched on CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Display in the MAXI DOT display 49 Prompt in the segment display 49 Resetting the service interval display 50 The service interval display shows the time and mileage to the next service event The service due date is automatically displayed on the display and this infor mation can be displayed manua
256. ld be used a The fitting instructions supplied with the roof luggage rack system must be observed when handling roof racks On models fitted with a power sliding tilting roof or a panoramic sliding roof ensure that the opened sliding tilting roof or the panoramic sliding roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof a Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system and the load that is secured to it Compare the vehicle height with available clearances such as underpasses and garage doors a Always remove the roof luggage rack system before entering an automated car wash a Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the secured load For the sake of the environment The increased aerodynamic drag results in higher fuel consumption Attachment points Does not apply to the Superb Combi Fig 122 Attachment points for roof bars N Read and observe H and H on page 108 first Installation position of the attachment points for roof bars Fig 122 A Forward attachment point Rear attachment point Perform the assembly and disassembly according to the enclosed instructions TE CAUTION Observe the information regarding the assembly and disassembly in the en closed instructions Roof load N Read and observe H and H on page 108 first The maximum permissible roof load including roof rack system of 100 kg and th
257. least 70 km h J Engine speed between 1 800 2 500 rpm If the filter is properly cleaned the warning light goes out If the filter is not properly cleaned the warning light does not go out and the warning light 0 begins to flash The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Diesel particulate filter Owner s manual The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode After switching the ignition off and on again the warning light also illuminates Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately E WARNING The diesel particulate filter reaches very high temperatures there is a fire hazard and serious injury could be caused Therefore never stop the vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come into contact with flammable materials such as dry grass undergrowth leaves spilled fuel or such like a Always adjust your speed to suit weather road region and traffic condi tions The recommendations indicated by the warning light must not tempt you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic EE CAUTION As long as the warning light illuminates one must take into account an increased fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine a Using diesel fuel with increased sulphur content can significantly reduce the service life of the diesel particle filter A SKODA Partner will be able to tell you which countries use diesel fuel with
258. limiter The sliding tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter If an obstacle e g ice pre vents closing the sliding tilting roof stops and opens completely The sliding tilting roof can be closed completely without the force limiter by pushing the switch in position A Fig 46 forwards until the sliding tilting roof is com pletely closed E WARNING When operating the tilt slide sunroof and the sunshade proceed with cau tion to avoid causing crushing injuries risk of injury EE CAUTION During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicin ity of the sliding tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism Convenience operation of sliding tilting roof AN Read and observe M on page 64 first The sliding tilting roof can be operated by locking unlocking using the key or using the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor B Fig 34 on page 53 gt Press and hold the symbol button amp on the remote control key gt In the KESSY system hold a finger on the sensor B Fig 34 on page 53 By releasing the lock or lifting your finger off the sensor B when using the KESSY system the closing process is immediately interrupted E WARNING Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury The force limiter does not operate with the convenience closing Electric sliding tilting roof with solar cells AN Read and observe M on page 64 first If th
259. ling system on off 116 Setting the temperature 116 Recirculation mode Version 1 117 Recirculation mode Version 2 117 Controlling blower 118 Defrosting windscreen 118 The Climatronic in automatic mode ensures the best possible setting for the temperature of the air flowing out the blower stage and air distribution The system also takes sunlight into account which eliminates the need to al ter the settings manually The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met v The cooling system is switched on page 112 J The engine is running The outside temperature is above approximately 2 C vV The blower is switched on The cooling system is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to provide cooling at a high load of the engine Aeration of the vehicle when ignition is switched off On models fitted with power sliding tilting roof with solar cells the fresh air blower is automatically switched over to solar mode if the sun rays are suffi cient after switching off the ignition The solar cells on the sliding tilting roof deliver power for the fresh air blower This supplies the interior of the car with fresh air For an optimum ventilation the air outlet vents 2 and 3 must be opened Fig 123 on page 710 The ventilation functions only when the sliding tilting roof is fully closed FF Note We recommend that you have Climatronic cleaned by a specialist garage once every yea
260. litre of water To remove stains use a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose Treat the leather regularly and at suitable intervals using a suitable leather care product EE CAUTION Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and that no water gets into the seams Otherwise the leather could become brittle or cracked Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the leather from bleaching If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it Carcare 181 Sharp edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners rivets sharp edged belts jewellery and pendants may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface Such damage cannot be subsequently recognised as a justified complaint The use of an additional mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the leather surface of the steering wheel Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect on a regular ba sis and each time after cleaning The cream nourishes the leather allows it to breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture It also creates surface protection Some clothing materials e g dark denim do not have sufficient colour fast ness This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers even when used correctly This applies particularly to light coloured seat cov ers This
261. lly if necessary The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or days until the service due date is reached The information regarding the service intervals can be found in the service schedule Note Information is retained in the Service Interval Display even after the vehicle battery is disconnected Display in the MAXI DOT display Oil change service If an oil change service is due the following message appears Oil change in km or days As soon as the service interval date has been reached the message Oil change now appears once the ignition has been switched on Inspection If an inspection is due the following message appears Inspection in km or days As soon as the service interval date has been reached the message Inspec tion now appears once the ignition has been switched on Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval You can view the remaining distance and days until the next service appoint ment at any time when the ignition is switched on by going to the Service menu item page 47 Settings or from the Vehicle status in the main menu of the MAXI DOTdisplay page 47 Main menu The following message is displayed for 10 seconds Oil change km days Inspection km days 1 The kilometres remaining until the next service are displayed instead of the odometer Prompt in the segment display Fig 30 Segment display Exa
262. lock cylinders EE CAUTION When washing your vehicle ensure as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinders Carcare 179 Cavity protection A Read and observe H and on page 177 first All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory This wax protection does not need to be inspected or re applied If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures these must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petrole um cleaner H WARNING Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to re move wax risk of fire Jack A Read and observe H and H on page 177 first The jack is maintenance free If necessary the moving parts of the jack should be lubricated with a suitable lubricant Wheels A Read and observe H and H on page 177 first Wheel rims Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular basis Regularly remove salt and brake abrasion otherwise the rim material will be corroded Damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediately Light alloy wheels After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product for light alloy wheels Products which cause abrasion must not be used to treat the wheel rims 180 General Maintenance EE CAUTION Severe layers of dirt on the wheel
263. lock position or for the KESSY system keep your finger on the sensor B Fig 34 on page 53 H By releasing the lock or lifting your finger off the sensor B when using the KESSY system the closing process is immediately interrupted Tilting roof gt Press and hold the symbol button 3 on the remote control key U WARNING Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury The force limiter does not operate with the convenience closing CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operating the lights and the instrument illumination 68 Daylight running lights DAY LIGHT 69 Turn signal and main beam 69 Automatic driving lamp control 70 Adaptive headlights AHL 70 Fog lights 71 Fog lights with the CORNER function 71 Rear fog light 71 COMING HOME LEAVING HOME 72 Hazard warning light system 72 Parking lights 73 Unless otherwise stated the lights only work when the ignition is on The arrangement of the controls right hand drive models may differ from the layout shown in Fig 49 on page 68 The symbols which mark the positions of the controls are identical Keep the headlights lenses clean The following guidelines must be ob served page 179 Headlight lenses U WARNING The activation of the lights should only be undertaken in accordance with national legal requirements The driver is always responsible for the correct se
264. locking 54 Inertia reels 15 Information messages see KESSY 53 Information system 42 Compass point display 48 Display a low temperature 43 Door warning 44 Gear recommendation 43 MAXI DOT display 46 Multifunction display 44 240 Index Operation Service interval display 48 instrument cluster Auto Check Control 33 Instrument cluster 30 Counter for distance driven 32 Display 31 Display of the second speed 33 Fuel gauge 32 Overview 30 Revolution counter 31 see instrument cluster 30 Speedometer 31 Temperature gauge 31 Warning lights 34 Interior monitor 56 Internet connection 129 ISOFIX 25 J Jack 205 Maintenance 180 Jacking points Raise vehicle 207 Jump starting 211 K KESSY Information messages 53 Lock unlock the steering 141 Locking 53 Starting the engine 142 Switching off the engine 142 Switch off ignition 141 Switch on ignition 141 Unlocking 53 Key Starting the engine 139 Stopping the engine 140 Knee airbag 18 L Lamp failure Warning light 38 Lamps Warning light 38 LEAVING HOME 72 Lever Main beam 69 Turn signal 69 Windscreen wipers 78 Light Cockpit 73 COMING HOME LEAVING HOME 72 Fog lights with CORNER function 71 Headlight range control 68 Instrument illumination 68 Low beam 68 Parking light 68 switching on and off
265. long as the warning light flashes the steering lock cannot be released If the warning light amp flashes a signal tone sounds and the following mes Sage appears in the MAXI DOT display Steering column lock Workshop ap pears the electrical steering lock is faulty Seek assistance from a specialist ga rage immediately If the warning light flashes a beep will sound and a message Steering lock defective appears in theMAXI DOT display this indicates that the electric steering lock is broken Park the vehicle do not continue your journey Af ter switching off the ignition it is then no longer possible to lock the steering to activate the electrical components e g radio navigation system to switch on the ignition again and to start the engine Seek help from a specialist ga rage Note The warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched on if the vehi cle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected If the warning light does not go out after moving a short distance this means there is an error in the system Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately Engine oil level N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light illuminates oil quantity too low The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Check oil level gt Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the engine oil lev el page 190 The warning light will go out if the bonnet is le
266. luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with unsuitable or damaged lashing straps injuries can occur in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents To prevent items of luggage from moving around always use suitable lashing straps that are firmly attached to the lashing eyes The transported items must be stowed in such a way that no objects are able to slip forward on sudden driving or braking manoeuvres risk of in jury 98 Operation E WARNING Continued a When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en larged by folding the rear seats forward ensure the safety of the passen gers transported on the other rear seats page 11 a If the rear seat next to the folded forward seat is occupied ensure maxi mum safety e g by placing the goods to be transported in such a way that the seat is prevented from folding back in case of a rear collision Do not drive with the luggage compartment lid open or unlatched other wise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poison ing Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the vehicle risk of accident Do not transport people in the boot EE CAUTION It is important to ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heat er the threads of the integrated antenna in the rear window as well as the threads of the integrated antenna Superb Combi in the rear side windows are not da
267. lways wear a seat belt This is the only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child page 14 Fastening and unfastening seat belts Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seat ed page 9 a The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness H WARNING Information on the correct routing of the belt Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder on no ac count across your neck A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then suddenly held firm by the belt The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects e g specta cles ball point pens bunches of keys etc Such objects can cause injury WARNING Information on dealing with the safety belts The belt webbing must not be jammed in between at any point or twis ted or chafe against any sharp edges Make sure you do not catch the seat belt when closing the door WARNING Information on the proper use of the safety belts a Never use one Seat belt to secure two persons inclu
268. m the windscreen For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wip ers in winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily gt Switch on the windscreen wipers gt Switch off the ignition The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which they were when switching off the ignition The service position can also be used as a winter position page 219 Note a If the operating lever is in the position 2 or 3 and the speed of the vehicle drops below 4 km h the wiping speed is switched to a lower wiping level The original setting is restored step by step when the speed of the vehicle exceeds 8 km h a The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on when reverse gear is selected Headlight cleaning system CQ Read and observe H and on page 77 first After the ignition is switched on the headlights are always cleaned at the first and after every tenth spray of the windscreen setting 5 Fig 63 on page 78 when the low beam or main beam is switched on You should remove stubborn dirt such as insect residues from the headlight lenses at regular intervals for example when refuelling The following guide lines must be observed page 179 Headlight lenses To ensure the proper operation of the cleaning system during the winter any snow should be removed from the washer nozzle fixtures and ice should be cleared with a de icing spray EE CAUTION Never remov
269. m is pressurized risk of scalding It is therefore best to allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap Do not touch the radiator fan The radiator fan may switch itself on auto matically even if the ignition is off a danger of injury is present TE CAUTION Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant Never cover the radiator there is a risk of the engine overheating lt gt Bonnet N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light 25 illuminates if the bonnet is unlocked lt Boot lid N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light lt illuminates if the boot lid is opened Power steering steering lock system KESSY N Read and observe H on page 35 first Power steering If the warning light is illuminated this indicates a partial failure of the Pow er Steering and the steering forces can be greater If the warning light is illuminated this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the steering assist has failed significantly higher steering forces gt Stop the car turn the ignition off and on again The powered steering is fully functional again if the or warning light does not illuminate after you switch the engine back on If the warning light or illuminates again then immediately obtain help from an authorised dealer Steering lock KESSY system A
270. m the ball head Permissible total weight of the ac cessory including load HU WARNING Never exceed the permissible gross weight of the accessory including load there is a risk of damaging the ball head of the towing hitch Never exceed the permissible overhang of the ball head of the towing hitch there is a risk of damaging the ball head of the towing hitch EF Note We recommend that you use accessories from SKODA Original Accessories CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Attaching and detaching trailers 170 Loading a trailer 171 Towing a trailer 171 Trailer stabilisation TSA 172 Anti theft alarm system 172 If your vehicle has already been factory fitted with towing equipment or is fit ted with towing equipment from SKODA Original Accessories then it meets all of the technical requirements and national legal provisions for towing a trailer F Note If there is an error in the trailer lighting system check the fuses in the fuse box in the dashboard page 220 170 Driving Attaching and detaching trailers Fig 161 Swivel out the 13 pin power socket safety eyelet B5E 0230 Coupling gt Install the tow bar gt Grip the 13 pin socket at point A and swing out in the direction of ar row Fig 161 gt Lift off protective cap 5 Fig 155 on page 167 towards the top gt Place the trailer onto the ball gt I
271. m the vehicle tank and auto matically controls the filling level If only a low quantity of fuel is present in the fuel tank the auxiliary heating switches off a The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating which is located on the underside of the vehicle must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must not be blocked a f the auxiliary heating is running the vehicle battery discharges If the auxili ary heating and ventilation has been operated several times over a longer peri od the vehicle must be driven a few kilometres in order to recharge the vehi cle battery a The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free e g of ice snow or leaves to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly F Note The auxiliary heating switches on the blower B Fig 125 on page 112 or Fig 126 on page 715 only if it has achieved a coolant temperature of ap prox 50 C a At low outside temperatures this can result in a formation of water vapour in the area of the engine compartment This is quite normal and is not an operat ing problem So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the aux iliary heating you must maintain the comfort temperature normally selected by you leave the fan switched on and leave the air outlet vents in an open po sition It is recommended to put the air flow in the position 2 or 5 Switching on off B3T 0631 Fig 127 Button for switching on off the system dire
272. maged by abrasive items Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load page 198 Class N1 vehicles N Read and observe H and H on page 98 first On class N1 vehicles which are not fitted with a protective grille a lashing set which complies with the standard EN 12195 1 4 must be used for fastening the load The proper functioning of the electrical system is essential for the safe opera tion of the vehicle It is important to ensure that it is not damaged during mod ifications or when loading or unloading the luggage compartment Fastening elements Fig 99 Lashing eyes and fastening elements Superb Superb Combi A Read and observe H and H on page 98 first The following fastening elements are found in the luggage compart ment IC A Lashing eyes for fastening items of luggage and fixing nets B Fastening elements for fastening fixing nets CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the lashing eyes is 3 5 KN 350 kg Fixing nets Fig 100 Fastening examples for nets B3T 0496 CQ Read and observe H and MH on page 98 first Examples for attaching the fixing nets A Vertical pocket B Horizontal pocket C Floor net U WARNING Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the fixing nets Heavy ob jects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the fixing nets is 1 5 kg Do not place any sharp objects in the nets risk of net damage Fold
273. mounting new tyres the tyres have to be replaced axle by axle The information listed in the table corresponds to the information available at the time of going to press The approved tyre rim combinations for your car are given on the sales and technical vehicle documentation Explanation of the tyre labelling Explanation of tyre markings For example 225 50R 17 91 Tmeans Tyre width in mm Height width ratio in Code letter for the type of tyre Radial Diameter of wheel in inches Load index Speed symbol The date of manufacture is stated on the tyre wall possibly on the inside For example DOT 1114 means for example that the tyre was manufac tured in the 11th week of 2014 The marking M Smeans that the associated tyre is suitable for winter use Load index The load index indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual tyre Wheels 201 Load index Load In kg Speed symbol The maximum speed symbol indicates the maximum permissible vehicle speed with fitted tyres in each category Maximum speed in km h EE CAUTION The information about load index and speed symbol can be found in the vehi cle sales and technical documentation Superb Minimal elaine Motorisation oad index Speed icon 205 55 R16 91 H 205 50 R17 H 1 4 1 92 kW TSI e ze 225 45 R17 91 H 225 40 R18 92 Y 205 55 R16
274. mple of a message trip 4 el km Explanation of graphic Fig 30 Service due A Differentiating between types of service Days remaining until the next service interval Kilometres remaining until the next service interval Differentiating between types of service The service type is determined by the number in position A Fig 30 1 Oil change service 2 Inspection Service due If a service becomes due then the following information is displayed for about 10 seconds Fig 30 gt The number 1 or 2 is displayed in position A gt The symbol and the number of days remaining until the next service inter val are displayed in position B gt The symbol and the number of kilometres remaining until the next service interval are displayed in position C As soon as the due date for the service has been reached the flashing icon amp and the message OIL CHNG or INSPEC_ appear in the display for about 20 sec onds after the ignition has been switched on Display the days and distance until the next service You can press button 3 Fig 21 on page 30 repeatedly to display the remain ing distance and time to until the next service whenever the ignition is switch ed on Information system 49 Information on the oil change service is displayed at first followed by informa tion on the inspection when button 3 is pressed again gt The number 1 or 2 is displayed in position A gt The
275. n If not all fields around the vehicle are shown after the system is activated the vehicle will need to be moved a few metres forwards or in reverse The sound of the park assist can be adjusted via the MAXI DOT display in the Assistants menu option page 47 f the system is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is in position P the vehicle cannot move the warning tone is interrupted and no obstacles are displayed Function Fig 148 Range of sensors system button A Read and observe H and on page 156 first The parking aid referred to below solely as system only works when the igni tion is switched on The system supports the driver via audible signals via the display on the radio or via the factory installed navigation system when parking and manoeu vring Radio user guide Navigation system user guide The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the bumper and an obstacle The ultrasound sensors are located on the front rear bumper Image description approximate range of the sensors Range Fig 48 a Applies only for vehicles with 12 sensors The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is reduced A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx 30 cm danger area From this moment on do not continue driving The length of the vehicle can be increased with an installed detachable towing device The danger
276. n The measurement of the intra urban cycle begins with a cold start of the en gine Afterwards urban driving is simulated In the extra urban driving cycle the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in all gears corresponding to daily routine driving conditions The driving speed varies between 0 and 120 km h The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of about 37 for the intra urban cycle and 63 for the extra urban cycle Note The fuel consumption and emission levels given on the KODA websites or in the commercial and technical vehicle documentation have been established in accordance with rules and under conditions that are set out by legal or techni cal rules for the determination of operational and technical data of motor vehi cles Depending on the extent of the equipment the driving style traffic condi tions weather influences and vehicle condition consumption values can in practice result in fuel economy figures in the use of the vehicle that differ from the fuel consumption values listed on the SKODA websites or in the commer cial and technical vehicle documentation Technical data 229 Dimensions Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver in mm Superb GreenLine Superb Combi Superb Combi GreenLine 4833 4833 4833 Width including exterior mirror 2009 1817 2009 1817 2009 1817 2009 Height 1462 1482 1447 1464 1449
277. n Austria NORM C 1590 in France EN 590 Diesel fuel N Read and observe H and H on page 183 first The vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel that meets the EN 590 standard All diesel engines can be operated using diesel fuel with a maximum of 7 bi odiesel B7 On the Indian market your vehicle will only be able to run on diesel fuel com pliant with standard IS 1460 Bharat IV If diesel fuel which complies with this Standard is not available you can refuel with diesel fuel according to standard IS 1460 Bharat III in case of emergency Operation in winter Winter grade diesel fuel In the cold season only use winter grade diesel fuel which will still operate properly even at a temperature of 20 C It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels available have a different temperature characteristic SKODA Partners and filling stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with in formation regarding the diesel fuels available Preheating fuel The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter preheating system This secures opera tion of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of 25 C Diesel fuel additives The diesel fuel in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all the con ditions for a smooth running engine We therefore recommend that no diesel fuel additives are used This can result in considerable damage to parts of t
278. n of the arrow Fig 209 A gt Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the lamp Fig 209 B gt Grasp the rear light and carefully remove away from the direction of travel gt Remove the rubber seal in the direction of arrow 1 Fig 210 C gt Pull off the cable bundle with the plug cap Fig 210 D gt Press together the interlocks on the connector in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 210 D gt Carefully remove the connector from the tail lamp assembly in the direction of the arrow 3 Fitting gt Insert the connector into the lamp and lock it securely gt Install the rubber seal in the body in the opposite direction to arrow 1 in stall Fig 210 c gt Insert the tail lamp with the holes 1 Fig 211 on page 227 into the bolts on the body Fig 210 D gt Carefully press the tail light into the bolts on the bodywork Ensure that the wiring harness does not become pinched between the body and the lamp gt Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover gt Ensure that the cover engages firmly TE CAUTION Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when re moving and installing the tail lamp Replacing bulbs in rear light Superb Combi Fig 271 Replacing the light bulb A Read and observe H and on page 224 first gt Turn the bulb holder 2 Fig 211 in an anti clockwise direction and remove it from t
279. n re filling as this may cause contamination of the liquid transportation system leading in turn to a windscreen washer system malfunction CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Specifications and capacity 189 Checking the oil level 190 Replenishing 191 The engine has been factory filled with a high grade oil that can be use throughout the year except in extreme climate zones The engine oils are undergoing continuous further development Thus the in formation stated in this Owner s Manual is only correct at the time of publica tion KODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by the manu facturer We therefore recommend that the oil change be completed by a SKODA Service Partner The specifications VW standards stated in the following can be indicated sep arately or together with other specifications on the bottle The oil capacities include oil filter change Check the oil level when filling do not over fill The oil level must be between the markings page 190 E WARNING a The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en gine compartment page 186 Stop driving if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil under the current conditions Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage Do not drive
280. n system a f the display is not activated at that moment the menu always shifts to one of the higher levels after approx 10 seconds a Using the factory fitted radio or navigation system Radio operating instruc tions or Navigation system operating instructions Window op Mirror down Only convenience mode for the driver window or for all of the windows can be adjusted here Further in formation page 63 Window convenience opera tion Activate deactivate the function for mirror lowering on the front passenger side when in the reverse gear Further information page 80 Fold in pas senger s mirror Settings N Read and observe H on page 47 first Mirror adjust You can change certain settings yourself through the MAXI DOT display The Activation deactivation of the synchronous exterior mirror function settings Further informa tion page 80 Synchronous adjustment of the mir ror current menu item is shown in the top of the display under a line Factory setting The following information can be selected depending on the equipment in stalled in the vehicle Restore the Convenience factory setting a This function is only available on vehicles with a rain sensor b This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable driver seat Information system 47 Lights and visibility The following functions can be activated deactivated or adjusted here Activ
281. n the MAXI DOT display Oil pressure Engine off Owner s manual gt Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the engine oil lev el page 190 If the warning light flashes do not drive any further even if the oil level is correct Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed Seek help from a specialist garage Coolant N Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light illuminates or flashes either the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Check coolant Owner s manual gt Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the coolant lev el page 192 gt If the coolant level is too low top up coolant page 192 If the warning light does not illuminate after adding coolant and switching on the ignition you may continue your journey If the coolant level is within the specified range and the warning light Eis still illuminated then there may be a malfunction of the cooling fan gt Check the fuse for the radiator fan replace if necessary page 222 Fuses in the engine compartment 36 Operation If the coolant level and fan fuse are both OK but the warning light is never theless still illuminated do not continue your journey Seek help from a specialist garage E WARNING a Carefully open the coolant expansion bottle If the engine is hot the cool ing syste
282. n the direction of one of the arrows 3 Set the height of the seat cushion Push the switch B ig in the direction of one of the arrows 5 Adjust the angle of the seat cushion Push the switch B ig in the direction of one of the arrows 4 Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest Push the switch C Fig 67 in the direction of one of the arrows 6 Reducing or increasing the curvature of the lumbar support Push the switch A in the region of one of the arrows2 Fig B3T 0680 Raising or lowering the curvature of the lumbar support gt Push the switch A in the region of one of the arrows Fig 67 The adjusted driver s seat position can be set in the memory of the seat page 84 or the remote control key page 84 EF Note If the setting procedure is interrupted you will need to press the button again Head restraints Fig 70 Rear centre head rests in vehi cles with the TOP TETHER sys tem af eT B3T 0645 N Read and observe H on page 81 first Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head rest is at the same level as the upper part of your head Setting height gt Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it upwards as required Fig 69 A gt To move the head restraint downwards press and hold the safety but ton Fig 69 B with one hand and push the head restraint down with the other hand The head restraints and the front seats must be adjusted
283. n un locked If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safe lock system or anti theft alarm system will be switched on This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally The seat and mirror are adjusted after the vehicle is unlocked page 84 Locking The turn signal lights flash once as confirmation that the vehicle has been locked If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed The current position of the seat and mirror after the vehicle is locked page 84 1 This function applies only to vehicles with specific equipment or for some countries 52 Operation Checking the battery condition If the red warning light B Fig 32 does not flash when you press a button on the remote control key the battery is dead Replace the battery page 215 TE CAUTION Only operate the remote control when the doors and boot lid are closed and the vehicle is in your line of sight a f the driver door is open the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote con trol key Operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by signal inter ference from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same fre quency range FI Note For vehicles with anti theft alarm the acoustic signals can
284. nal container safe from people who are not completely independent especially children there is a danger of poisoning Consult a doctor immediately if coolant is swallowed Never spill fluids on the hot engine Such fluids e g the antifreeze con tained in the coolant may ignite WARNING Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine run ning a Pay particular attention to rotating engine parts e g V ribbed belt gen erator radiator fan and the high voltage ignition system risk to life Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system E WARNING Continued a Avoid short circuits in the electrical system particularly on the vehicle s battery a Always make sure that no jewellery loose clothing or long hair can get caught in rotating engine parts risk to life Always remove any jewellery tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clothing before completing any work H WARNING Information for working on the fuel system or the electrical system a Always disconnect the vehicle battery from the electrical system Do not smoke a Never work near open flames Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby EN WARNING Read and observe the information and warning instructions on the fluid containers Keep the working fluids in sealed original containers and safe from peo ple who are not completely independent e g children f you intend to work underneath the vehicl
285. ncorrect seated position of a child who is not properly secured risk from the side airbag Child properly protected by safety seat N Read and observe H and H on page 22 first The child must not be positioned in the area into which the side airbag will de ploy Fig 17 A There must be sufficient room between the child and the area into which the side airbag will deploy to allow the airbag to provide as much protection as possible Fig 17 B E WARNING a Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of the side airbag risk of injury Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags risk of injury Classification of child seats A Read and observe H and on page 22 first Classification of child seats according to the ECE R 44 standard erup Weight ofthe cil up to 10 kg up to 13 kg up to 9 months up to 18 months up to 4 years 9 Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt A Read and observe H and on page 22 first Overview of the usability of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE R 16 standard Rear seat Center Rear seats external Front passenger seat 0 up to 10 kg O up to 13 kg 1 9 18 kg 2 15 25 kg 3 22 36 kg U Child seat category Universal a child seat designed to be attached to the seat using the s
286. nction of the remote control key Fold in passenger s mirror Valid for vehicles with electrically adjustable driver s seat The passenger side mirror can tilt down to improve the view to the kerb when reversing The mirror will be folded automatically if the following conditions are met JZ The function is activated via the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror down page 47 Settings JV The knob for the mirror control is in the position for the passenger mirror adjustment J The reverse gear is engaged v The mirror setting was previously stored page 84 Memory function of the electrically adjustable seat or page 84 Memory function of the re mote control key EN WARNING Do not touch the exterior mirror surfaces if the exterior mirror heater is switched on risk of burns EE CAUTION The exterior mirrors with fold in function amp never mechanically fold by hand there is a risk of damaging the electric mirror actuator a When the mirror is swung by external influences due to impact during ma noeuvring for example then first fold in the mirror by turning the knob and wait for a loud clapping noise EF Note a The mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and up to an outside temperature of 35 C a f the electrical mirror setting fails at any time the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface CQ Introduction This chapter contains info
287. nding on the Bluetooth version on the mobile phone an automatically generated 6 digit PIN SSP is either displayed or the PIN 1234 has to be entered manually 124 Operation CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Connecting the mobile phone to the hands free system 124 Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display 125 The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II comprises the following func tions gt Phone Phonebook page 124 gt Convenience operation of the telephone via the multifunction steering wheel page 122 gt Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display page 122 gt Voice control of the telephone page 131 gt Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units page 134 All communication between a mobile phone and your vehicle s hands free sys tem is established with the help of Bluetooth technology Note The following guidelines must be observed page 121 Mobile phones and two way radio systems Connecting the mobile phone to the hands free system To connect a mobile phone with the hands free system the two devices must be paired Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone The following steps must be carried out for the connection gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele phone gt Switch on the ignition gt Select the Phone
288. ner Saving electrical energy N Read and observe on page 149 first When the engine is running the alternator generates and supplies electrical power If more electrical components of the electrical system are switched on more fuel is needed to operate the alternator We therefore recommend switching off electrical components if these are no longer required Environmental compatibility AN Read and observe M on page 149 first Environmental protection has played a major role in the design material selec tion and production of your new SKODA Particular emphasis has been placed on the following points Design measures gt Joints designed to be easily detached gt Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system gt Improved purity of different classes of materials gt Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation 260 gt Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO2 gt Minimum fuel leakage during accidents gt Reduced noise Choice of materials gt Extensive use of recyclable material gt Air conditioning filled with CFC free refrigerant gt No cadmium Starting off and Driving 151 gt No asbestos gt Reduction in the vaporisation of plastics Manufacture gt Solvent free cavity protection gt Solvent free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production plant to the customer gt The use of solvent free adhesives
289. ng Starting and stopping the engine using the key Starting and stopping the engine KESSY ___ Brakes Manual gear changing and pedals Automatic transmission Running in Economical driving and environmental sustainability Avoiding damage to your vehicle Driving abroad Brake assist systems Parking aid Park assist Cruise Control System START STOP Fatigue detection break recommendation Tyre pressure monitoring Hitch Trailer 115 118 121 121 124 126 130 131 134 138 138 140 143 144 145 148 149 152 153 154 154 156 157 161 162 165 165 166 166 170 General Maintenance Car care 173 Technical data Services modifications and technical Vehicle data alterations 173 Washing vehicle 176 Index Taking care of your vehicle exterior _ 177 Taking care of the interior 181 Inspecting and replenishing 183 Fuel 183 Engine compartment 186 Engine oil 189 Coolant 191 Brake fluid 192 Vehicle battery 193 Wheels 197 Tyres and wheel rims 197 Manufacturer approved tyre variants 201 Winter operation 203 Do it yourself Emergency equipment and self help 204 Emergency equipment 204 Changing a wheel 205 Puncture set 209 Jump starting 211 Towing the vehicle 213 Radio remote control 215 Emergency unlocking locking 216 Emergency operation o
290. ng The auxiliary heating can be used when both when stationary when the en gine is switched off to preheat the vehicle and also while driving e g during the heating phase of the engine The aux heating functions in connection with the air conditioning system or Climatronic The auxiliary heating also warms up the engine This is not valid for vehicles with the 3 6 191 kW FSI engine The auxiliary heating warms up the coolant by combusting fuel from the vehi cle tank This warms the air flowing into the passenger compartment if the blower is turned on Depending on the environmental conditions the automatic on or off of the heater occurs which causes the best possible conditions for the engine run ning and the interior heating For vehicles with petrol engines the automatic switching on and off of the heater can be disabled at a specialist workshop E WARNING a The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms e g garag es risk of poisoning The auxiliary heating must not be allowed to run during refuelling risk of fire a The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of the vehicle If you want to use the heater then the car should not be parked in places where the exhaust gases can come into contact with flam mable materials such as dry grass undergrowth leaves spilled fuel or simi lar Risk of fire EH CAUTION a The running auxiliary heater consumes fuel fro
291. ng 171 Safety eye 170 Towing a trailer 171 Trailer operation 166 Trailer stabilisation 172 Transport Luggage compartment 97 Roof rack 108 Transporting children safely 22 Triangle 204 TSA 172 Turn signal 69 Turn signal system Warning light 41 Twindoor see boot lid 57 Two way radio systems 121 Tyre Explanation of the labelling 201 see wheels 201 Tyre inflation pressure Warning light 40 Tyre load bearing capacity Refer to Wheels 201 Tyre pressure monitoring 165 Save tyre pressure values 166 Tyre repair Preparations 210 Pressure test 21l Sealing and inflating the tyre 210 Tyres 197 Inflation pressure 198 Sizes 198 Tyre wear indicator 198 Tyre size 201 see wheels 201 U Umbrella Tray 95 Underbody protection 180 Unleaded petrol 153 Unlock Vehicle key 51 Unlocking Individual settings 54 KESSY 53 Remote control 52 Unlocking and locking 50 Using the information system 42 Using the selector lever 145 V Variable loading floor 104 Dividing the luggage compartment 104 Remove 104 slides off on aluminium rails 105 Vehicle battery Automatic load deactivation 197 Charging 196 Checking the battery electrolyte level _ 195 Cover 195 Disconnecting and reconnecting 196 Operation in winter 195 Replacing 196 Safety instructions 193 Vehicle care
292. ng the oil temperature is present symbols are displayed instead of the oil temperature Warning against speeding Set the speed limit e g for the maximum permissible speed in towns page 46 Warning at excessive speeds Warning at excessive speeds CQ Read and observe H on page 44 first Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary gt Select the menu item Speed warning Q or 6 gt Activate the speed limit option by confirming this menu item gt Set the desired speed limit e g 50 km h gt Store the speed limit by confirming the set value or wait several seconds Your settings will be saved automatically The speed limit can be adjusted from 30 km h to 250 km h in 5 km h incre ments 1 Applies for vehicles using the MAXI DOT display 2 An initial value of 30 km h is displayed automatically if no value has been specified 46 Operation Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving gt Select the menu item Speed warning Q or 6 gt Drive at the desired speed e g 50 km h gt Confirm the current speed as the speed limit If you wish to adjust the set speed limit you can do so in 5 km h intervals e g the accepted speed of 47 km h increases to 50 km h or decreases to 45 km h gt Store the speed limit or wait several seconds your settings will be saved automatically Change or disable speed limit gt Select the menu item Speed warning Q or 8 gt By
293. nge for around 5 seconds Replace the battery page 216 EH CAUTION The radio remote control comprises electronic components and must therefore be protected against water severe impacts and direct sunlight CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Mobile phones and two way radio systems 121 Universal telephone preinstallation hands free 122 Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel 122 Symbols in the MAXI DOT display 123 Phone Phonebook 124 Mobile phones and two way radio systems SKODA permits the operation of mobile phones and two way radio systems with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission power of up to 10 watts Please ask at a specialist workshop about installing and operating mobile phones and two way radio systems that have a transmission power of more than 10 W Operating mobile phones or two way radio systems may interfere with the functionality of the electronic systems in your vehicle This could be for the following reasons gt no external aerial gt external aerial incorrectly installed gt transmission power greater than 10 watts HU WARNING f a mobile phone or a two way radio system is operated in a vehicle with out an external aerial or an external aerial which has been installed incor rectly this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field inside the vehicle Two w
294. ning Seats and practical features Air conditioning system MAXI DOT display Service interval display Unlocking and locking Anti theft alarm system Luggage compartment lid Electric boot lid Superb Combi Electrical power windows Electric sliding tilting roof Panoramic sliding tilting roof Superb Estate Lights and visibility Lights Interior lights Visibility Windscreen wipers and washers Rear mirror Adjusting the seats Seat features Practical features Luggage compartment Removable light Superb Combi Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment Estate Extending variable loading floor with integrated aluminium rails and fastening elements Superb Combi Net partition Superb Combi Roof rack Heating ventilation cooling Air conditioning system manual air conditioning system 46 48 50 50 55 57 59 61 64 65 67 67 73 75 77 79 81 81 85 88 97 103 104 105 107 108 T10 T10 Tiz Communication and multimedia Starting off and Driving Assist systems Hitch and trailer Climatronic automatic air conditioning system Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventilation General information Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ___ Universal telephone preinstallation GSM III __ Wi Fi Voice control Multimedia Drivi
295. not release the control dial until it has done SO f for example the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is pos sible that the sun screen does not operate correctly Then turn the switch to position A Fig 47 on page 66and press and hold the button G Fig 48 on page 66 The sun screen opens and closes again after around 10 seconds Do not release the control dial until it has done so Operation Fig 47 Control dial for the sliding tilting roof N Read and observe on page 65 first Comfort position gt Turn the switch to position C Fig 47 When the sliding tilting roof is in the comfort position the intensity of the wind noise is reduced Open partially gt Turn the switch to a position in area D Open fully gt Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position spring tensioned position Tilting roof gt Turn the switch to position A gt Press the switch in the region E towards the roof Closing gt Turn the switch to position A gt Press the switch on the recess E down and pull forwards 66 Operation Force limiter The sliding tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter The sliding tilting roof stops and moves back several centimetres when it cannot be closed because there is something in the way e g ice The sliding tilting roof can be fully closed without a force limiter by pressing the switch on the recess E down and then pushing it fo
296. nsert the trailer cable into the 13 pin socket If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7 pin connector you can use a suitable adapter from SKODA Original Accessories to establish a connection to the elec tricity gt Hook the breakaway cable of the trailer to the security lock slot B The breakaway cable of the trailer has to sag when mounted into the security lock slot for all trailer positions relative to the vehicle sharp curves reverse driving and the like Uncoupling The uncoupling of the trailer is carried out in reverse order gt Unhook the breakaway cable of the trailer from the security lock slot Fig 161 gt Pull the trailer cable out of the 13 pin socket gt Remove the trailer from the ball head gt Place the cover 5 on the ball head Fig 155 on page 167 gt Grip the 13 pin socket at point A and swing in the opposite direction to the arrow Fig 161 Exterior mirrors You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear view mirrors National legal requirements must be observed Headlights The front of the vehicle can be lifted when a trailer is being towed and the headlights can dazzle other road users Adjust the headlight setting on the headlight range control page 68 Operat ing the lights and the instrument illumination EN WARNING Incorrect or improperly connected electrical installation can c
297. nsiderably impair the pro tective function of the side airbag Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag mod ule must be repaired immediately by a specialist garage The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage cracks or deep scratches It is not permissible to use force in order to open the modules Airbagsystem 19 Note In vehicles with side airbags at the front a label with the lettering AIRBAG is lo cated on the front seat backrests a In vehicles with rear side airbags the word AIRBAG is located between the en trance area and the rear seat rest Head airbags Fig 12 Location of the head airbag gas filled head airbag In the event of a severe side collision the head airbag system offers additional protection for the head and neck area of passengers The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior of the car Fig 12 A In the event of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the relevant side airbag and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the accident occurs The airbag covers the windows of the front and rear doors as well as the door pillar when it is deployed Fig 12 B Head impact with interior parts is reduced by the inflated head airbag The re duction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any move ments of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries
298. o be entered into your mobile phone and confirmed within 30 seconds by following the instructions on your mobile phone display 2 Does not apply for Radio Swing gt Confirm the PIN gt Follow the instructions on the MAXI DOT display and the mobile phone to store a new user or to download the telephone book and identification data from the SIM card into the hands free system The telephone primarily connects via the rSAP profile If the PIN code was stored the telephone is automatically detected and con nected with the hands free system the next time the ignition is switched on Check your mobile phone to see whether this automatic connection has been established Disconnecting the connection gt By removing the key from the ignition lock the connection is disconnected during a telephone call gt By disconnecting the hands free system in the mobile phone gt Select the user by disconnecting the user in the MAXI DOT display in the Bluetooth User menu option Disconnect On vehicles which are fitted with a radio or navigation system at the factory it is possible to terminate the telephone call after removing the key from the ig nition lock by pressing the button on the touchscreen of the radio or naviga tion system refer to the Operating instructions for the radio or navigation system Note a In the memory of the hands free system up to three users can be stored whereby the hands free system can only comm
299. ody Even if you only drive at a speed of 30 50 km h the forces that your body is exposed to in the event of an accident can exceed a metric tonne 1000 kg For example a person s weight of 80 kg increases to 4 8 tonnes 4800 kg at 50 km h In the event of a frontal collision occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt are thrown forward and strike parts of the interior of the car such as the steering wheel dash panel windscreen in ways which cannot be control led Fig 4 A In certain circumstances you could even be thrown out of the vehicle which could cause life threatening or even fatal injuries Seatbelts 13 It is also important that rear passengers fasten their seat belts as they could otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not only to himself but also for those seated in the front Fig 4 B Fastening and unfastening seat belts Fig 6 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt Rout ing of belt webbing for an expectant mother A Read and observe H on page 12 first Fastening gt Correctly adjust the front seat and head restraint before fastening the seat belt page 9 gt Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis 14 Safety gt Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle belong
300. of net damage Luggage compartment cover Fig 104 Removing installing the luggage compartment cover N Read and observe H and M on page 98 first Removing gt Hook the support straps 1 Fig 104 onto the boot lid gt Place the cover in the horizontal position gt Pull the cover out of the holders 2 horizontally towards the rear The removed boot cover can be stowed behind the seat backrest Fitting gt Push the boot cover into the brackets 2 Fig 104 gt Hook the support straps 1 on the boot lid H WARNING No objects should be placed on the boot cover the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with some thing FF Note If the retaining strips 1 are attached to the boot lid the boot cover will rise when you open the boot lid Roll up boot cover Superb Combi Fig 105 Roll up cargo cover take out then pull out or roll up A Read and observe H and on page 98 first Extending gt Pull the foldable boot cover as far as the stop into the secured position 2 Fig 105 Retracting gt Press the cover in the handle area in the direction of the arrow 3 Fig 105 and the cover automatically rolls up into position 1 Press in the grip area again and the cover will roll up Removing inserting The fully rolled up luggage compartment cover can be removed e g for the transport of bulky objects gt Push on the side of the cr
301. off and Driving 145 Fig 140 Shift lock button A Read and observe H and on page 145 first When the ignition is switched on the gearbox mode and the currently selected gear are indicated in the display Fig 139 The following modes can be selected with the selector lever Fig 139 P Parking mode The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this mode Parking mode must only be selected when the vehicle is stationary R Reverse gear Reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the en gine is at idling speed Before moving into mode R from mode P or N depress the brake pedal while simultaneously pressing the lock button in the direction of the ar row Fig 140 N Neutral Power transmission to the drive wheels is interrupted in this mode D Mode for forwards travel normal programme In mode D the forward gears are automatically changed according to the en gine load accelerator pedal actuation and driving speed S Mode for forwards travel sports programme In mode S the forward gears are shifted automatically up and down at higher engine speeds than in mode D Before changing to mode S from mode D the shift lock button must be press ed in the direction of the arrow Fig 140 146 Driving Releasing selector lever from P or N modes selector lever lock The selector lever is locked in the P and N modes to prevent the forwards trav el mode from being sel
302. ormation messages Parking 178 178 157 160 158 160 159 Index 241 Park Assist automatic emergency braking 160 Operation 158 Parking Park assist 157 Parking aid 156 Parking aid 156 Function 157 Parking light 68 Part replacement 173 Passive safety Before setting off 8 Driving safety 8 Safety equipment 8 Passive Safety 8 Payload 229 Pedals 145 Footmats 145 Petrol refer to Fuel 184 Polishing the paintwork See Taking care of your vehicle 178 Power outlet 12 V 92 Power Steering steering lock KESSY system warning light 36 Power windows Button in the front passenger door 63 Practical features 88 12 Volt power outlet 92 Ashtray 91 Car park ticket holder 89 Cigarette lighter 91 Clothes hook 94 Cup holders 90 Glasses storage box 93 Removable ski bag 97 Seat backrest with long cargo channel _ 96 Storage compartment for umbrella 95 Storage compartment in rear centre console _ 95 242 Index Storage compartment in the front centre con sole 90 Storage compartment on passenger side _ 94 Storage compartment on the driver s side 89 Storage compartments inthe doors 90 Storage compartment under passenger seat _ 94 Storage compartment under the front armrest 92 Storage net in front centre console 93 Storage pocke
303. orming an emergency lock ing unlocking Locking the door without a locking cylinder Fig 193 Left rear door Emergency lock ing An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors which have no locking cylinder It is only visible after opening the door Remove the cover A l Insert the key into the slot B and turn it into the horizontal position in the direction of the arrow mirror inverted on the right doors Replace the cover Unlocking the boot lid Fig 194 Emergency unlocking Superb Superb Combi The boot lid can be unlocked manually in an emergency Unlocking Superb Insert the vehicle key into the slot in the trim panel as far as the stop A Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow Open the boot lid Unlocking Superb Combi Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening in the trim as far as the stop F B Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow Open the boot lid Selector lever emergency unlocking Fig 195 Selector lever emergency unlocking Firmly apply the handbrake Grasp the cover 1 in the area of arrow 2 and carefully pull up wards Also unlock the cover on the other side Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in the direction of the arrow 3 At the same time press the locking button in the selector lever and move the selector lever to N The selector lever will be locked once more if it
304. ossbar in the direction of the arrow 4 Fig 105 and remove the cover in the direction of the arrow 5 Insertion takes place in reverse order E WARNING No objects should be placed on the foldable boot cover Automatic Retractable cargo cover Superb Combi A Read and observe H and M on page 98 first The automatic rolling up of the foldable boot cover enables an easier entry in to the boot gt Open the boot lid The foldable boot cover rolls up automatically in the position 1 to Fig 105 on page 101 gt Push the cover in the area of the handle in the direction of the arrow 3 The cover retracts completely When the boot lid is opened quickly the automatic rolling up of the foldable boot cover is blocked for a delay time of approx 2 seconds The function to automatically roll up the foldable boot cover can be activated deactivated via the MAXI DOT display in the menu Settings Autom blind Side pockets in luggage compartment B3T 0716 Fig 106 Superb boot Open side compartment left right Seats and practical features 101 Fig 107 Superb Combi boot Open right compartment A Read and observe H and on page 98 first Open close compartment Superb gt Turn the bolts in direction of arrow Fig 106 Closing takes place in reverse order The CD changer and TV tuner are located in the right compartment Fig 106 B The first aid box can also be stored in this compartmen
305. ount the day Activate Activate pre set mode Deactivate Deactivate pre set mode Factory settings Restore factory settings Back Return to main menu Only one programmed pre set time can be active The last programmed pre set time remains active After the auxiliary heating activates automatically at the set time it is neces sary to pre set a time again If the menu item Back is selected or no changes are made on the display for longer than 10 seconds the set values are stored but the pre set time is not activated The system switches itself off at the end of the running time set under the menu item Running time Note A warning light on the button 3 Fig 127 illuminates when the system is run ning Radio remote control Fig 128 Auxiliary heater Radio remote control 120 Operation A Read and observe H and on page 119 first Explanation of graphic Fig 128 A Aerial Warning light Switch on the auxiliary heating Switch off the auxiliary heating The transmitter and the battery are housed in the housing of the remote con trol The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle When the battery is fully charged the range of the remote control is a few hundred metres Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle bad weather conditions and a weaker battery in the remote control can clearly re duce the range To switch the auxiliary heating on or off hold the remo
306. ows gt With the CANCEL voice command gt Briefly press button 1 Fig 130 on the multifunction steering wheel FF Note The dialogue of an incoming call is immediately interrupted The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multifunction steering wheel with telephone control On vehicles that are factory fitted with the Columbus navigation system it is only possible to operate the voice control for the telephone via this de vice Operating instructions for the Columbus navigation system chap ter Voice control for the navigation system Voice commands GSM II Basic voice commands Voice command Action After this command the system repeats all possible HELP commands Voice commands GSM III Basic voice commands Voice command Action HELP After this command the system repeats all possible commands This command calls up the contact from the phone CALL XYZ oat After this command a name can be entered to es CALL NAME tablish a connection with the requested party After this command for example the phone book can be repeated back to you a voice entry for the contact can be updated or deleted etc PHONE BOOK After this command a telephone number can be entered to establish a connection with the reques ted party DIAL NUMBER CALL REGISTER Lists of dialled numbers missed calls etc REDIAL The last selected telephone number is selected After
307. p memory memory 1 The single trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off New data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours the memory is automatically erased Total trip memory memory 2 The total trip memory gathers data from any number of individual journeys up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 1999 kilometres driven 8 and a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes or 9 999 kilometres driven Q The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calcula tion starts all over again Unlike the single trip memory the total trip memory is not deleted after a pe riod of interruption of driving of 2 hours The following values of the selected memory are set to zero gt Average fuel consumption gt Distance driven gt Average speed gt Driving time Note Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data Information overview N Read and observe H on page 44 first Outside temperature The current outside temperature is displayed This information is always shown on vehicles with a MAXI DOT display Driving time The time travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed If you want to measure the time travelled from a particular moment in time reset th
308. p mirror Sun visors Fig 59 Fig 60 1 Fold down the cover 2 Swivel cover towards the door 3 Fold down the auxiliary cover A Make up mirror the cover can be pushed in the direction of the arrow Light turns on automatically when the cover slides open While sliding the cover A or when lifting the cover the light turns off B HU WARNING The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the de ployment area of the head airbags if any objects are attached to them Ini tiation of the head airbags may cause injury 76 Operation Sun screen Fig 61 Unroll the sun screen The sun screen is located in the lower part of the boot cover Extending gt Pull the sun screen on the handle A Fig 61 and hang it in the magnetic brackets B Retracting gt Remove the sun screen from the magnetic brackets B and hold it on the handle A so that it can slowly roll up into the housing on the boot cover without being damaged FI Note Do not place any objects that react sensitively to influences of magnetic fields watches electronics etc in the immediate vicinity of the magnetic brackets They can be damaged by the magnetic field Sun screen in the rear doors Fig 62 Rear door Sun screen l K a lt 7 B3T 0620 Extending gt Pull out the sun screen with the handle A Fig 62 and hang it in the brack et on the top edge of the door Retracting gt Remove t
309. p3 player and to play back music from these devices via the factory fitted radio or navigation system The AUX input for external audio sources is located below the armrest of the front seats and is marked with the symbol AUX The MDI input is located in the storage compartment below the front armrest 1 For vehicles with the navigation system Amundsen the AUX input located on the front panel of the navigation device manual of the navigation system Amundsen Communication and multimedia 135 CD changer The CD changer CD Changer The CD changer for the radio and navigation system is located in the right side compartment of the boot Inserting the CD gt Touch the button C Fig 132 and guide the CD compact disc into the CD case B The CD is automatically loaded onto the lowest free position in the CD chang er The warning light in the corresponding button D stops flashing Filling the CD changer with CDs gt Press and hold the button C Fig 132 for longer than 2 seconds and guide the CDs one after the other maximum 6 CDs into the CD case B The warning lights in the buttons D stop flashing Inserting a CD at a specific position gt Press the button C Fig 132 The warning lights in the buttons D illuminate the memory spaces that are al ready assigned and flash in the case of free memory spaces gt Touch the desired button D and guide the CD into the CD case B Eject
310. page 228 Technical data The details given in the vehicle s technical documentation always take prece dence over the details in the Owner s Manual The trailer loads specified apply only to altitudes up to 1 000 metres above mean sea level The engine output falls as altitude increases as does the ability to climb Therefore for every additional 1 000 m in height or part the maximum per missible towed weight must be reduced by 10 The towed weight comprises the actual weights of the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing equipment are merely test data for the towing equipment The vehicle specific values are detailed in the vehicle documents E WARNING The maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the permissible weight of the trailer must not exceed this could cause an accident A sliding cargo can significantly adversely affect stability and driving safe ty there is a risk of accident Towing a trailer Driving speed For safety reasons do not drive faster than 80 km h when towing a trailer Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the trailer is detected Never attempt to stop the trailer from swaying by acceler ating Brakes Apply the brakes in good time If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake apply the brakes gently at first and then brake firmly This will avoid brake jolt
311. persons who might for example release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear unattended in the ve hicle The vehicle could then start to move risk of accident E WARNING In the case of damage to the standard fitted front spoiler or if retrofitting another front spoiler hub caps etc page 173 Services modifications and technical alterations make sure that the air supply to the front brakes is not affected The front brakes may overheat which can have a negative im pact on the functioning of the braking system there is a risk of an acci dent EE CAUTION Observe the recommendations on the new brake pads page 149 Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if braking is not necessary This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear Information on braking A Read and observe H and H on page 143 first If the brakes are applied in full and the control unit for the braking system con siders the situation to be dangerous for the following traffic the brake light flashes automatically After the speed was reduced below around 10 km h or the vehicle was stop ped the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system switches on The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically af ter accelerating or driving off again Before travelling a long distance down a steep gradient reduce speed and shift into the next low
312. phone menu item List Arrange the entries in the phone book Surname Arrange according to surname Surname Sort by contact name Own number Optionally display your own telephone number on the display of the device of the person you are calling this function is network depend ent Network depnd Network dependent own number display Yes Allow display of your own number No Prohibit display of your own number Signal settings Signal settings Ring tone Ring tone setting Volume Signal volume settings Turn vol up Increase volume Turn vol down Decrease volume Phone settings Phone settings Select operator Select operator Automatic Automatic operator selection Manual Manual operator selection Network mode Network mode UMTS UMTS GSM GSM Automatic automatic SIM mode Applies to telephones with the rSAP profile that simultaneously support the operation of two SIM cards there is an option to choose which SIM card to connect to the hands free system SIM mode 1 SIM 1 is connected to the hands free system SIM mode 2 SIM 2 is connected to the hands free system Phone mode Toggle between rSAP and HFP mode Premium rSAP mode Hands free HFP mode Off time Set the off time in increments of 5 min Access point Set the Internet access point APN Change the access point name User name User Name Password Password Switch off ph Switch off the hand
313. place recognised with the information to drive on Parking place recognised with the information to engage the reverse gear Indication for selecting the forward gear D Indication for selecting the reverse gear If the system has recognised a suitable parking space this parking space is shown in the display Fig 150 A gt Continue driving forwards until the display appears Fig 150 B gt Stop and ensure that the vehicle does not continue to move forward until the parking procedure starts gt Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R gt As soon as the following message is shown in the display Steering int ac tive Monitor area around veh let go of the steering wheel The steering will be taken over by the system gt Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully If necessary the parking procedure can be continued with further steps gt If the arrow in the display flashes forward Fig 150 c then select the Ist gear or move the selector lever into position D The display shows the icon brake pedal gt Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro tates into the required position the symbol goes out gt Carefully drive forwards gt If the backwards arrow is flashing in the display Fig 150 D select reverse gear again or move the selector lever into position R The di
314. posite direction to that of the arrow as far as it goes gt Fit the protective cover 2 Replacing bulb for main beam B3T 0559 Fig 205 Headlights with Xenon light Changing the bulb for the main beam N Read and observe H and on page 224 first gt Unlock the protective cap in the direction of arrow 1 Fig 205 and remove gt Turn the plug with bulb C anti clockwise to the stop and remove it gt Change the bulb gt Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in an anti clockwise direc tion as far as the stop gt Insert the protective cap in holder 2 and carefully push in The protective cover must engage firmly Replacing the bulb for the fog light B3T 0563 Fig 206 Front bumper Remove the protective grille fog light Fuses and light bulbs 225 Fig 207 Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light Replacing the light bulb A Read and observe H and on page 224 first Removing the protective grille gt Undo the protective grille in the area of the arrow Fig 206 A using the clamp for removing the wheel trims page 205 Vehicle tool kit Col Read and observe H and eee on page 224 first gt Remove the protective grille in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 208 Remove the number plate light replace the bulb gt Open the boot lid Changing light bulbs for fog lights gt Push in the lamp in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 208 gt Use the screw
315. position by moving the knob in the direction of the arrow Fig 65 The movement of the mirror surface follows the movement of the rotary knob Synchronous adjustment of the mirror gt Activate the synchronous adjustment of the mirror above the MAXI DOT dis play in the menu item Mirror adjust page 47 Settings gt Turn the knob for the mirror control to the position for the driver mirror ad justment gt Adjust the mirror to the desired position Folding in both of the exterior mirrors with the rotary knob G It is only possible to fold in both exterior mirrors when the ignition is switched on and at a speed of up to 15 km h The mirrors are folded out into the driving position after the rotary knob is turned from the position amp to a different one Folding in both of the exterior mirrors using the remote control key gt Close all windows gt Press amp on the remote control key for about 2 seconds The exterior mirror is folded back into the driving position when the ignition is switched on Mirror with automatic dimming The exterior mirror blackout is controlled together with the automatic dimming interior mirror page 79 Memory function for mirrors Valid for vehicles with electrically adjustable driver s seat It is possible to save the current setting of the exterior mirrors when saving the driver s seat position with page 84 Memory function of the electrically adjustable seat or page 84 Memory fu
316. pped with a glow plug system The glow plug warning light oo illuminates after the ignition has been switched on Start the engine once the ov warning light has gone out You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily Procedure for starting the engine gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Move the gearshift lever into neutral or move the selector lever into position PorN gt Depress and hold the clutch pedal vehicles with a manual gearbox or brake pedal vehicles with an automatic gearbox until the engine starts gt Press and hold Fig 135 on page 141 the starter button until the engine starts CAUTION a If the engine does not start up after a second attempt one of the following fuses may be defective Petrol engine fuse for the electric fuel pump Diesel engine fuse for the control unit for glow plugs or glow plug relay and fuel pump Check the fuse and replace if necessary page 220 or seek assistance from a specialist garage 1 On vehicles with the START STOP system it is sufficient to press the starter button briefly The motor will then automatically start 142 Driving Switching off the engine A Read and observe H and H on page 140 first gt Stop the vehicle gt Press the starter button Fig 135 on page 141 briefly The engine and the ignition are switched off simultaneously The engine
317. pressure monitoring tyre pressure values are to be stor ed page 166 Replace the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair op tions WARNING Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque has been checked Loosening tightening wheel bolts Fig 179 Changing a wheel Loosening the wheel bolts A Read and observe H on page 206 first Before removing the wheel bolts the caps for the wheel bolts must be pulled off Releasing gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as the stop gt Grip the wrench at its end and turn the bolt about one turn in the direction of the arrow Fig 179 Tightening gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as the stop gt Grip the wrench at its end and turn the bolt against the direction of the ar row Fig 179 until it is tight After tightening the wheel bolts the covering caps must be replaced 1 Use the appropriate adapter for undoing and tightening the anti theft wheel bolts page 208 E WARNING Undo the wheel bolts only a little about one turn provided that the vehi cle has not yet been jacked up Otherwise the wheel could become loose and fall off a f it proves difficult to undo the bolts carefully apply pressure to the end of the wrench with your foot Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so and make sure you keep your footing Raising the vehicle Fig 180 Jacking points fo
318. quipment and self help 219 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Fuses in the dash panel 220 Fuses in the engine compartment 222 Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment 222 Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses Switch off the ignition and the corresponding power consuming device before replacing a fuse Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operat ing page 220 Fuses in the dash panel or page 222 Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers which switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been eliminated Fuse colour Maximum amperage light brown dark brown red blue yellow white green orange red E WARNING Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment page 186 220 Do it yourself EE CAUTION Never repair fuses or replace them with a fuse of a higher amperage there is a risk of fire This may also cause damage at another part of the elec trical system A blown fuses is recognisable by the molten metal strip Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage a If a newly inserted fuse burns through again then a specialist should be con sulted immediately FI Note We recommend always carrying
319. quirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the vehicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works SKODA places a particular emphasis on minimising negative effects on the environment It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness Fuel consumption environmental pollution and the wear to the engine brakes and tyres depend essentially on the following three factors gt Your personal driving style gt Operating conditions gt Technical requirements The fuel economy by can be improved by 10 15 by always looking ahead and driving in an economical way Fuel consumption is also be influenced by external factors which are beyond the driver s control Consumption increases during the winter or under difficult conditions on poor roads etc Fuel consumption can vary considerably from the manufacturer s data as a re sult of outside temperatures the weather and driving style The optimal engine speed should be maintained when accelerating to avoid a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle EE CAUTION All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its normal operating temperature Looking ahead N Read and observe H on page 149 first A vehicle s highest fuel consumption occurs when accelerating therefore un necessary accelerating and braking should
320. r During operation of the Climatronic an increase in engine idle speed can oc cur under certain circumstances in order to ensure adequate heating comfort On vehicles equipped with a factory fitted radio or radio navigation system the Climatronic information is also shown on their displays This function can be switched off see operating instructions for the radio or navigation sys tem Control elements PASSENGER AIR BAG Fig 126 Climatronic Control elements Functions of the individual controls Fig 126 Adjust the temperature for the left side page 116 Adjust the blower speed page 118 depending on equipment gt W Aux heating on off page 119 gt Switching the windscreen heater on off page 75 Adjust the temperature for the right side page 116 Interior temperature sensor depending on equipment gt lt gt Recirculation mode with air quality sensor on off page 117 Recir culation mode Version 1 gt Recirculation mode without air quality sensor on off page 117 Re circulation mode Version 2 A gt gt lm lo Air conditioning system 115 max y Switch the intensive windscreen heater on off Air flow to the windows Air flow to the upper body Air flow in the footwell Switching the rear window heater on off page 75 a Control the seat heater on the front left seat page 85 AUTO Switching automatic mode on page 116 OFF Switching Climatronic
321. r gt In the device to be connected select the connection using WPS function see operating instructions for the device to be connected If the Pushbutton menu item is selected in the instrument cluster the Wi Fi connection is made automatically If the WPS PIN menu item is selected in the instrument cluster then a PIN must be entered in the device to be connected and the instrument cluster Use WLAN network in MAXI DOT display When a Wi Fi network is switched on the following menu items are displayed when the Wi Fi menu item is selected Off Switch off the WLAN network depending on the context Device list Display a list of external devices Active device Display a list of active devices Block Block device connections Known devices Display a list of known devices Rename Rename the device Block Block device connections Device blocked Display of a list of blocked devices Unblock Remove the connection block Delete lists Delete device lists Known devices Delete the list of known devices Device blocked Delete the list of blocked devices Both lists Delete both device lists Password Use of password to log on to the WLAN network Show Display a password to log on to the WLAN network Generate Generate a new password to log on to the WLAN network Wi Fi Name Use of WLAN network name Show Display the WLAN network name Rename Rename the WLAN network WPS config Wi F
322. r If the lamp is not correctly opened it can be damaged a Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the rechargeable batter ies a The replacement rechargeable batteries must have the same specification as the original rechargeable batteries If other types of rechargeable batteries are used the power output can be reduced or it can lead to a malfunction of the lamp For the sake of the environment Dispose of used rechargeable batteries in accordance with national legal provi sions CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Dividing the luggage compartment gt gt 14 Remove variable loading floor 104 The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier AE CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg EF Note The room under the variable loading floor can be used to stow objects 104 Operation Dividing the luggage compartment Fig 111 Dividing the boot with variable loading floor B3T 0598 AN Read and observe M on page 104 first gt Lift up the part with the mounting and secure it by sliding it into the grooves marked with the arrows Fig 111 Remove variable loading floor B3T 0659 Fig 112 Boot Remove variable loading floor remove carrier rails I Read and observe M on page 104 first gt Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the safety eyes A Fig
323. r drive if you feel tired The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed Therefore take regular sufficient breaks during long trips There will be no system warning during the so called micro sleep F Note In some situations the system may evaluate the driving incorrectly and thus mistakenly recommend a break e g sporty driving adverse weather condi tions or poor road conditions The fatigue detection system is designed primarily for motorway driving Function A Read and observe H on page 165 first The fatigue detection system advises the driver on the basis of information about the steering behaviour to take a break from driving The system recom mends a break at speeds of 65 200 km h After the ignition has been switched on the system evaluates the steering be haviour for 15 minutes This baseline analysis is constantly compared with the current steering behaviour If the system detects deviations from normal steering behaviour due to possi ble fatigue of the driver it recommends taking a break from driving The system deletes the stored baseline analysis if one of the following con ditions is met gt The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off gt The vehicle is stopped the seat belt removed and the driver s door opened gt The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed the system recommends a
324. r is stowed in the tool kit Note a Note the code number which is embossed both on the adapter and also on the end of each anti theft wheel bolt This number can be used to purchase a replacement adapter from SKODA Original Parts if necessary a The anti theft wheel bolt set and adapter can be purchased from a KODA Partner CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Components of the puncture repair kits 209 Preparations for using the breakdown kit 210 Sealing and inflating the tyre 210 Notes for driving with tyre repaired 211 Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies or a puncture with diameters up to approx 4 mm A repair made using the breakdown kit is never intended to replace a perma nent repair on the tyre Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist ga rage The wheel need not be removed during the repair Do not remove foreign bodies e g screws or nails from the tyre The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circumstances gt There is damage to the rim gt The outside temperature is less than 20 C gt The tears or punctures are greater than 4 mm in size gt There is damage to the tyre wall gt Driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre gt If the use by date see inflation bottle has passed U WARNING a f you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning
325. r load unbraked kg a GreenLine b Slopes up to 12 Slopes up to 8 1500 1700 1200 1400 1200 1400 1500 1700 233 Technical data 2 0 1 103 kW TDI CR engine Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 103 4200 320 1750 2500 4 1968 Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb DSG6 Superb MG6 4x4 Superb Combi MG6 Superb Combi DSG6 Superb Combi MG6 4x4 Top speed km h 212 212 210 211 210 208 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 0 10 1 10 3 10 1 10 2 10 4 Operating weight kg depending on equipment configuration 1532 1690 1554 1712 1609 1767 1554 1712 1576 1734 1631 1789 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1800 2000 1800 2000 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 2 0 1 125 kW TDI CR engine Output kW at rpm 125 4200 Maximum torque Nm at rpm 350 1750 2500 Number of cylinders displacement cm 4 1968 Performance and Weights Top speed km h Superb MG6 228 Superb DSG6 222 Superb DSG6 4 x 4 219 Superb Combi MG6 226 Superb Combi DSG6 221 Superb Combi DSG64x4 218 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 8 6 8 6 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 8 Operating weight kg depending on equipment configuration 1540 1698 1537 171
326. r positioning lifting jack Fig 181 Attach lifting jack A Read and observe H on page 206 first In order to raise the vehicle the jack from the tool kit is to be used Position the car jack at the jacking point closest to the flat tyre Emergency equipment and self help 207 The mounting points are located on the metal bar of the lower sill on the un derside of your vehicle The positions of these are embossed by means of markings on the side surface of the lower sill Fig 181 gt Support the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground and ensure that the jack is located in a vertical position at the jacking point Fig 181 A gt Position the lifting jack below the jacking point with the crank and move it up until its claw encloses the web Fig 181 B gt Continue turning up the jack until the wheel is just about lifted off the ground E WARNING Notes for vehicle lifting Choose a flat and firm surface for jacking the vehicle a f the wheel has to be changed on a slope first of all block the opposite wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpect edly rolling away Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent possible moving A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move the lifting jack causing the vehicle to fall down It is therefore always nec essary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wid
327. r system QO Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light is illuminated the brake pads are worn The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Check brake wear Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately Ql Read and observe H on page 35 first Either the left or the right gt warning light flashes depending on the position of the turn signal lever If there is a fault in the turn signal system the warning light flashes at twice its normal rate Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash D Wi A Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light 20 illuminates when low beam is selected A Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light 0 illuminates when the fog lamps are operating QO Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light illuminates when the cruise control is active CQ Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light illuminates operate the brake pedal This is necessary to move the selector lever from position P and N page 146or to start the en gine in vehicles with the KESSY system page 142 Ql Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light 20 illuminates when the main beam or the headlight flasher is being operated Instruments and Indicator Lights 41 CQ Introduction This chapter contains informat
328. r using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel You can select digits O 9 symbols gt and the Delete Call and Back functions Call register The following menu items can be selected in the Call register menu item Missed calls List of missed calls Received calls list of received calls 1 Only applies when connecting the telephone to the hands free system via the rSAP profile 128 Operation Dialled nos List of dialled numbers Delete lists Delete call registers Voice mailbox In the Voice mailbox menu item you can set or save the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number The required numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjust ment wheel You can select digits 0 9 symbols gt and the Delete Call Store and Back functions Messages A list of received text messages is displayed in the Messages menu item After calling a message the following functions appear Show Display text message Read The system reads out the selected text message through the vehi cle s speakers Send time Display message send time Call back Dial the phone number of the sender of the text message Copy Copy the received text message to the SIM card of your mobile phone Delete Delete the message Bluetooth The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item User Overview of
329. r your mod el of vehicle HH WARNING The national legal regulations must be observed for the use of tyres WARNING Instructions for the use of tyres For the first 500 km new tyres do not yet provide optimum grip and ap propriate care should therefore be taken when driving risk of accident For reasons of driving safety do not replace tyres individually Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity of moun ted tyres Never exceed the maximum permissible speed for the mounted tyres An incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear impairs handling Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged immediately re duce your speed and stop If no external damage is evident drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialist garage to have the vehicle checked E WARNING Information regarding tyre damage or wear Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age Never drive with damaged tyres there is the risk of an accident occur ring Wheels 197 E WARNING Continued a You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the wear indicators have been worn down Worn tyres impair necessary adhesion to the road surface particularly at high speeds on wet roads This could lead to aquaplaning uncontrolled vehicle movement swimming on a wet road surfac
330. rally safer on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat In contrast to adults the muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury Children should be transported in accordance with the relevant statutory pro visions Child seats that comply with the ECE R 44 standard must be used The ECE R standard stands for Economic Commission for Europe Regulation Child seats that comply with the ECE R 44 standard are identified with a test mark that cannot be removed a capital E in a circle and the certification num ber below H WARNING The national legal requirements must be observed when using child seats One should never carry children and also not babies on one s lap a Never leave children unattended in the vehicle Certain outside climatic conditions can cause life threatening temperatures in the vehicle a The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire journey Other wise the child would be thrown through the vehicle in the event of an acci dent causing fatal injuries to both the child and other occupants E WARNING Continued a Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehicle is moving This particularly applies to children who are transported on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe or even fatal injuri
331. ratures etc the system function may be limited incorrect recog nition of obstacle EE CAUTION The correct evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure de pends on the circumference of the wheels on the vehicle a The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fitted with the wheel size approved by the manufacturer Do without the use of the system if snow chains or a spare wheel is moun ted If wheels other than those approved by the manufacturer are mounted the resulting position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly This can be avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage Note We recommend performing the parking at a safe speed to about 5 km h 158 Driving Functioning N Read and observe H and on page 158 first Basic system operations gt The measurement and evaluation of the size of parking spaces when driving gt The determination of the correct position of the vehicle for parking gt The calculation of the line on which the vehicle drives backwards into the parking space or forwards from the parking space gt Automatic rotation of the front wheels during the parking The display of the instrument cluster hereinafter only in the display informa tion and system messages are displayed When the system is activated the warning light illuminates Pe Fig 149 on page 158 A The traction control system ASR must always be switched on when p
332. rbag deactivated using the key switch in the storage com partment gt The warning light 2 illuminates for approx 4 seconds after switching on the ignition gt The OFF 2 3 Fig 13 on page 21 warning light illuminates when the igni tion is switched on Note The national regulations for switching off airbags must be observed A SKODA service partner will be able to inform you which if any of your vehi cle s airbags can or must be deactivated Deactivating the front passenger airbag Fig 13 Key operated switch for the front passenger airbag warning light for front seat passenger airbag deactivation Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch Switching off gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the storage box on the front passenger s side gt Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key F gt Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 2 Fig 13 OFF gt Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch J gt Close the storage box on the front passenger s side gt Check that warning light OFF 3 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF in the text illuminates after the ignition is switched on Switching on gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the storage box on the front passenger s side gt Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key F gt Care
333. re duce the effectiveness of the head airbags a Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision to the rear CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg Storage pockets on the front seats I Read and observe H on page 89 first Pockets for storing maps magazines etc are provided on the back of the front seat backrests Fig 93 E WARNING Never put heavy items in the map pockets risk of injury EH CAUTION Never put large objects into the map pockets e g bottles or objects with sharp edges risk of damaging the pockets and seat coverings Storage compartment for umbrella Fig 94 Left rear door Stowage compart ment for an umbrella N Read and observe H on page 89 first The storage compartment for an umbrella is located in the rear left door Fig 94 F Note An umbrella can be purchased from KODA Original Accessories Storage compartment in rear centre console Figi 95 Opening the storage compart ment B3T 0653 N Read and observe H on page 89 first The storage compartment is equipped with a removable insert Open close gt Pull the handle A Fig 95 on the upper section of the recess and open out the compartment in the direction of the arrow Closing takes place in reverse order Seats and practical features 95 U WARNING The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes
334. re compatible with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II or GSM III Ask a KODA Partner whether your phone is compatible with the universal telephone prepa ration GSM II or GSM III The range of the Bluetooth connection to the hands free system is restric ted to the vehicle interior The range is dependent on local factors e g obsta cles between the devices and mutual interferences with other devices If your mobile phone is in a jacket pocket for example this can lead to difficulties when establishing a connection with the hands free system or transferring data There are buttons in the steering wheel for easy operation of the basic func tions of the phone Fig 129 so that the driver is distracted from the traffic as little as possible when using the phone This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the universal tele phone installation at the factory The buttons control the functions for the operating mode of the current tele phone If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated Button wheel Action Function Fig 129 Press briefly MUTE Turn upwards Increase volume Turn downwards Decrease volume Accept a call end a call Display of the basic Phone menu Main Phone menu gt List of dialled numbers Call selected contact Press briefly Press button for a long period aim Reject the incoming call Tu
335. re that the mirrors are not covered 8 Safety J Check the tyre inflation pressure v Check the engine oil brake fluid and coolant level Y Secure all items of luggage Y Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the vehicle JZ Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid V Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals JV Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts page 22 Transporting children safely Adopt the correct seated position page 9 Correct and safe seated position Tell your passengers to assume the correct seated position Driving safety A Read and observe H on page 8 first The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants If your driving safety is affected you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk The following guidelines must therefore be observed Y Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation e g by your passengers or mobile phone calls Y Never drive when your driving ability is impaired e g due to medication al cohol or drugs J Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit v Always adjust the driving speed to the road traffic and weather condi tions Y Take regular breaks on long journeys at least every two hours Safety equipment A Read and observe H on page 8 first The following list contains only part of the safety equipment in your vehicle
336. rear doors 76 Sun visors 76 Switch see Ignition 139 Switching off the engine see KESSY 142 Switch light on and off 68 Index 243 Switch off ignition Refer to KESSY 141 Switch on ignition Refer to KESSY 141 Synchronous adjustment of the rear view mir ror 80 Synthetic leather 182 T Tailgate TwinDoor 58 Taking care of the vehicle Natural leather 181 Seat belts 183 Taking care of your vehicle Automatic car wash system 177 Cavity protection 180 Chrome parts 178 Cleaning the wheels 180 Decorative films 179 Door lock cylinders 179 Headlight lenses 179 High pressure cleaner 177 Plastic parts 178 Polishing the paintwork 178 Rubber seals 178 Taking care of the interior 181 Taking care of your vehicle exterior 177 Washing by hand 176 Wash system 177 Wax treatment 178 Taking care of your vehicles Fabric covers 182 Technical data 228 Telephone 124 126 Temporary spare wheel 200 Tilting roof see Electric sliding tilting roof 64 Tiptronic 146 Tools 205 244 Index TOP TETHER 27 Towing 213 Towing a trailer 171 Towing device Description 167 Operation and maintenance 180 Towing eye Front 214 Rear 214 Towing protection 56 Traction Control System ASR 155 Trailer 170 13 pin socket 170 connection and disconnection 170 Loadi
337. reasing the speed with the brake pedal The speed can also be reduced by depressing the brake pedal which tempora rily deactivates the system page 162 162 Driving Switching off temporarily A Read and observe H and H on page 161 first The cruise control system can be temporarily deactivated by pushing the switch A Fig 151 on page 161 into the spring mounted CANCEL position or by depressing the brake or clutch pedal The set speed remains stored in the memory Briefly push the rocker button B into the RES position in order to resume the stored speed after the clutch or brake pedal is released CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operating conditions for the system 163 Operation in vehicles with manual gearbox 163 Operation in vehicles with automatic gearbox 163 System related automatic start up 164 Manually deactivating activating the system 164 Information messages 164 The START STOP system hereinafter referred to as the system saves fuel and reduces polluting emissions and CO 2 emissions by turning the engine off e g when stopping at traffic lights and starting the engine again when moving off E WARNING Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is run ning Operating conditions for the system 14 18 14 18 4 1 Travel time Travel time 30 min 30 min Fig
338. remove variable loading floor BS T 0599 Fig 116 Luggage compartment variable loading floor AN Read and observe M on page 105 first The variable loading floor can be removed and reinstalled if necessary Removing Grasp the rear part of the floor by the handle raise it slightly in the direction of the arrow 1 and pull it out over the bumper in the direction of the arrow 2 until it engages in the opening C Fig 11 106 Operation Fold up the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow 3 Press the safety buttons A and remove the floor Fitting Fold up the floor and place it on the carrier rails Push the floor forwards until it engages in the openings B in the carrier rails Carefully press in the vicinity of the openings C on the floor until it clicks in to place if necessary press the safety buttons A E WARNING Ensure the variable loading floor is attached correctly during installation If this is not the case there is a risk of injury for the occupants Fixing set ot B3T 0662 Fig 117 Telescopic pole and tensioning strap N Read and observe on page 105 first The fixing set can be used for dividing the boot or for securing the objects which are being transported Telescopic pole Insert the holders for the telescopic pole into the left and right openings of the carrier rails Press the top part of the holder in the direction of the arrow 1 and simultaneously pu
339. removed and will not latch into the ready po sition The ball head then needs to be brought into this position before the next time it is fitted Tuck the ball bar in the ready position with the golden key up in the box otherwise there is a risk of damage to the key Do not use excessive force when handling the operating lever e g do not step on it FI Note We recommend that you put the protective cap on the ball before removing the ball head a Clean any dirt from the ball head before stowing it away in the box with the vehicle tool kit Accessories Fig 160 Representation of the maximum permissible level of the ball head of the towing hitch and the per missible total weight of the ac cessories including the load de pending on the load center of gravity N Read and observe H and H on page 166 first An accessory can mounted on the ball head of the towing hitch e g bike carri ers If this accessory is used the maximum permissible overhang of the ball head of the towing hitch and the permissible gross vehicle weight of the accesso ries including load are to be checked The maximum permissible overhang of the ball head of the towing hitch is 70 cm Fig 160 The total permitted weight of the accessory including load changes with in creasing distance of the centre of gravity of the load from the ball head of the towing hitch Hitch and trailer 169 Distance of the centre of gravity of the load fro
340. replacement fuses in the vehicle A box of replacement fuses can be purchased from SKODA Original Accessories There can be multiple power consuming devices for one fuse A single consumer may use several fuses Fuses in the dash panel B3T 0585 Fig 199 Cover of the fuse box in the control panel fuses A Read and observe H and on page 220 first The fuses are located on the left side of the dash panel behind a cover Replacing fuses gt Remove the cover Fig 199 gt Remove the plastic clip from the holder in the fuse box cover in the dash panel gt Place the clamp on the respective fuse and pull this fuse out gt Insert a new fuse gt Replace the clamp in the original position gt Reinsert the cover of the fuse box Fuse assignment in the dash panel Consumer No Consumer Fuel pump relay control unit for fuel pump injection valves Diagnostic socket engine control unit fuel pump relay fuel pump Electric boot lid control unit Haldex gt ABS control unit ESC switch for tyre pressure warning brake sen Climate controlled front seats i for START STOP coil of me starter relay only DVD preinstallation SS ale reay contr wal Front power window central locking system of the rear doors 4 rea dimming mirrors pressure sensor telephone prein Electric sliding tilting roof
341. requests the entry of the telephone number for the internet access depending on the operator usually 99 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Switching Wi Fi network on off 130 Connecting an external device to the WLAN network 130 Use WLAN network in MAXI DOT display 131 WLAN also Wi Fi is a wireless network for connecting to the Internet Using a mobile phone connected with the universal telephone preparation GSM III via the rSAP profile it is possible to establish a Wi Fi network in the ve hicle and to enable passengers with compatible devices to connect to this net work Switching Wi Fi network on off Switching on gt Connect the mobile phone with the universal telephone preparation GSM III via the rSAP profile page 127 gt Select the Wi Fi menu item in the Phone menu The display shows the message Switch on Wi Fi gt Select the Yes menu item If no access point is assigned automatically then this must be entered man ually as per the instructions from the mobile network operator e g Internet 1 The name of the access point is defined by the mobile operator 130 Operation If the Wi Fi network is switched on the display will show the following mes sage for example WLAN SK_WLAN 1234 switched on The display then shows a password for the Wi Fi network connection The password can subsequently be found in the Phone Wi Fi Password S
342. result in problems in the brake system The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically page 35 Brake sys tem Brake booster The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal The brake booster only operates when the engine is running Handbrake Fig 137 Handbrake N Read and observe H and H on page 143 first Apply gt Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards Releasing gt Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking button Fig 137 gt Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button The handbrake warning light illuminates when the handbrake is applied provided the ignition is on A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the handbrake applied 144 Driving The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Release parking brake The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of more than around 5 km h for more than 3 seconds H WARNING Please note that the handbrake must be fully released A handbrake which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating This can have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system there is a risk of an accident EE CAUTION After the vehicle has come to a standstill always tighten the handbrake first and then select the first gear vehicles with a manual gearbox or move the se lector lever
343. rged battery There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being star ted a The non insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each other there is a risk of short circuit a The jump start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle there is a risk of short circuit Route the jump start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotat ing parts in the engine compartment a There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise cur rent may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected 212 Do it yourself Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system Fig 185 Engine earth START STOP sys tem wy I 531 0670 AN Read and observe H on page 211 first The jump start cable must only be connected to the engine earthing point on vehicles with the START STOP system Fig 185 Jump starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot Fig 186 Detail of the engine compart ment Jump starting point QN Read and observe H on page 211 first On vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power can only be connected to the jump starting point in the engine compartment of the vehicle being started by means of a jump start cable Fig 186 gt Open the protec
344. rior air to flow into the storage compartment We recommend closing the air supply if it is operated in heating mode or the cooling system for the storage compartment is not being used E WARNING The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety reasons 94 Operation FF Note When the storage compartment is opened a light illuminates Storage compartment under passenger seat Fig 92 Front passenger seat Opening the storage compartment N Read and observe H on page 89 first Opening gt Pull the handle to position 1 Fig 92 in the direction of the arrow The compartment opens out in the direction of the arrow 2 Closing gt Grip the compartment by the handle and close in the opposite direction to that of the arrow 2 Fig 92 gt Keep hold of the handle until the compartment is closed WARNING The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety reasons EE CAUTION The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1 5 kg in weight Clothes hook N Read and observe H on page 89 first The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors E WARNING Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing this may
345. riving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior The air recirculation mode is automatically activated after the ignition is switched if it was on before the ignition was turned off The warning light in the button illuminates Switch off on gt Press the amp button The warning light in the button goes out gt Press the button again The warning light in the button illuminates E WARNING Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an acci dent increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows Start to mist up Air conditioning system 117 Note As soon as the windscreen mists up press the symbol button maxq Press the AUTO button once the windscreen has demisted Controlling blower The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with the interior temperature However the blower stages can be manually adapted to suit your particular needs gt Repeatedly pressing the symbol button on the left or right reduces or in creases blower speed If the blower is switched off the Climatronic system is switched off The set blower speed is displayed above the symbol button when th
346. rmation on the following subjects Manually adjusting the front seats 82 Electric front seat adjustment 82 Head restraints 83 Memory function of the electrically adjustable seat 84 Memory function of the remote control key 84 The driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs The seat backrest on the driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for the following rea sons gt Reaching the controls safely and quickly gt A relaxed and fatigue free body position gt Achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag system HU WARNING a Only adjust the driver s seat when the vehicle is stationary risk of acci dent Caution when adjusting the seat You may suffer injuries or bruises as a result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention The electric front seat adjustment is also functional when the ignition is turned off even with the ignition key removed Therefore when leaving the vehicle never leave people who are not completely independent such as children unattended in the vehicle there is a danger of injury Never carry more people than the number of seats in the vehicle Do not carry any objects on the front passenger seat except o
347. rn up down Previous next menu item Press briefly Confirm selected menu item Press button for a long period of time Quickly turn upwards To the previous initial letter in the telephone book Continuously display first letter of the phone book Quickly turn downwards To the next initial letter in the telephone book Press briefly Return to previous level in the menu Press button for a long period of time el e e A S S GE Exit telephone menu Symbols in the MAXI DOT display Meaning Valid for Charge status of the telephone battery GSM II GSM III Signal strength GSM II GSM III A phone is connected with the hands free system GSM II GSM IlI when connected via the HFP profile The hands free system is visible to other devices GSM II GSM IlI when connected via the HFP profile A phone is connected with the hands free system GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile The hands free system is visible to other devices GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile A multimedia unit is connected to the hands free system GSM II GSM III A UMTS network is available GSM III Internet connection via the hands free system GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile a This function is only supported by some mobile phones Communication and multimedia 123 Phone Phonebook A phone phonebook is part of the hands free system This phone phonebook can be used depending on the
348. roll the net parti tion E WARNING After placing skis into the through loading bag you must secure the bag with the securing strap B Fig 98 The strap A must hold the skis tight s Make sure that the strap A holds the skis in front of the binding also re fer to imprint on the through loading bag The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 24 kg Note The through loading bag is foreseen for four pairs of skis Place the skis with the tips facing to the front and the sticks with the tips facing to the rear into the through loading bag a f there are several pairs of skis in the through loading bag ensure that the bindings are positioned at the same height The through loading bag must never be folded together or stowed when moist CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Class N1 vehicles 98 Fastening elements 99 Fixing nets 99 Folding hook 99 Floor covering 100 Luggage net 100 Luggage compartment cover 100 Roll up boot cover Superb Combi 101 Automatic Retractable cargo cover Superb Combi 101 Side pockets in luggage compartment 101 Side compartment in boot with battery 102 Non closable side pocket Superb Combi 102 Please observe the following for the purpose of maintaining good handling characteristics of your vehicle gt Distribute loads as evenly as possible Seats and practical featur
349. ronmental pollution and wear of your vehicle The maximum speed of your vehicle should as far possible never be used Fuel consumption pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase dispropor tionally at high speeds The graph Fig 143 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle Fuel consumption will be halved if you drive at only three quarters of the possible top speed of your vehicle Reducing idling AN Read and observe M on page 149 first Idling also costs fuel 150 Driving In vehicles not equipped with the START STOP system turn off the engine when in a traffic jam at a level crossing or traffic lights with longer wait times Even after just 30 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is nee ded when you start the engine up again If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operat ing temperature Wear and tear and pollutant emissions though are particu larly high in the warming up phase Therefore start driving as soon as the en gine has started In this case high engine speeds should be avoided Avoiding short distances 1 100km Fig 144 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in 1 100 km at different tem peratures AN Read and observe M on page 149 first Short distances result in above average high fuel consumption We therefore recommend avoiding distances of less than 4 km if the engine is cold A cold engine consumes the mo
350. roximately 20 cm with a slight swing E WARNING Check that the bonnet is closed properly a If you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet risk of accident CAUTION Never open the bonnet by the locking lever Fig 163 Inspecting and replenishing 187 Engine compartment overview r NN f DA Ea T RO A Lif 7 Fig 164 Principle sketch Engine compartment A Read and observe H and M on page 186 first Arrangement in the engine compartment Fig 164 1 Coolant expansion reservoir o o 192 2 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 188 3 Engine oil filler opening 191 4 Engine oil dipstick 190 5 Brake fluid reservoir o o o o o o o 193 6 Battery below a cover 193 EF Note The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and diesel engines is practically identical Radiator fan A Read and observe H and on page 186 first The radiator fan is powered by an electric motor Operation is controlled ac cording to the temperature of the coolant 1 In some countries 5 5 Itr applies for both variants 188 General Maintenance E WARNING After switching off the ignition the fan may intermittently continue to op erate for approx 10 minutes Windscreen washer system Fig 165 Engine compartment Wind screen washer fluid rese
351. running light is switched on the parking lights neither at the front nor the rear and the number plate lights are not lit Therefore always switch on the low beam when the visibility is poor Turn signal and main beam Fig 50 Operating lever Turn signal and main beam operation N Read and observe H on page 67 first Lever positions Fig 50 A Switch on right turn signal Switch on left turn signal Switch on high beam spring loaded position D Switching off main beam switching on headlamp flasher spring loaded position Main beam The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on The warning light 0 illuminates in the instrument cluster when the high beam is switched on Flasher The headlight flasher can be operated even if the ignition is switched off The warning light 2oilluminates in the instrument cluster when the headlight flasher is switched on Flashing When the left turn signal switch is switched on the indicator light lt flashes in the instrument cluster When the right turn signal switch is switched on the indicator light gt flashes in the instrument cluster The turn signal light switches itself off automatically when driving around a curve or after making a turn The warning light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb for the turn signal light fails Lights and visibility 69 Convenience turn signal If you wish to flash three times only brie
352. rvoir q ga Var a 2 Ni Mihi lt A Read and observe H and M on page 186 first B3T 0422 The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compart ment Fig 165 This contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or rear window and for the headlight cleaning system The capacity of the reservoir is about 3 litres or about 5 5 litres on vehicles that have a headlight cleaning system Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and head lights We recommend using clean water together with a screen cleaner from the range of KODA Original Accessories with antifreeze in winter which will remove any stubborn dirt The washing water should always be mixed with antifreeze in winter even if the vehicle has heated windscreen washer nozzles Under exceptional circumstances methylated spirits can also be used if no screen cleaner with antifreeze is available The concentration of methylated spirits must not be more than 15 The freeze protection at this concentration is sufficient only to 5 C EE CAUTION a Under no circumstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added to the windscreen washer fluid a f the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system only cleaning prod ucts which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights must be added to the windscreen washer fluid Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir whe
353. rward until the sliding tilting roof is fully closed H D WARNING When operating the sliding tilting roof proceed with caution to avoid caus ing crushing injuries risk of injury EE CAUTION During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicin ity of the sliding tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism Opening closing the sun screen Fig 48 Buttons for sun screen Q Read and observe M on page 65 first The sun screen can be closed or opened using the buttons Fig 48 Opening gt Briefly press the button F Fig 48 to open fully gt Press and hold the button F to open to the desired position The opening process stops when one releases the button Closing gt Briefly press the button G Fig 48 to close fully gt Press and hold the button G to close in the desired position The closing process stops when one releases the button E WARNING When operating the sunshade proceed with caution to avoid causing crushing injuries risk of injury Convenience operation of sliding tilting roof QO Read and observe M on page 65 first The sliding tilting roof can be operated by locking or unlocking using the key or using the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor A or B Fig 34 on page 53 Closing gt Press amp and hold the symbol button on the key or hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the
354. s modifications and technical alterations a f a fault occurs in the ABS system the ESC ASR and EDL will also not work An ABS fault is indicated with the warning light page 38 154 Driving Electronic Stability Control ESC Fig 146 ESC system ASR button B3T 0698 A Read and observe H and H on page 154 first The ESC system helps to maintain control of the vehicle in situations where it is being operated at its dynamic limits such as a sudden change to the direc tion of travel Depending on the road surface conditions the risk of skidding is reduced thereby improving the vehicle s driving stability The ESC system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual behaviour of the vehicle If differences exist such as the car begin ning to skid the ESC system will automatically brake the appropriate wheel During an intervention of the system the warning light amp flashes in the instru ment cluster The following systems are integrated into the Electronic Stability Control ESC gt Antilock Brake System ABS page 155 gt Traction control ASR page 155 gt Electronic Differential Lock EDL page 155 gt Driver Steering Recommendation DSR page 155 gt Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA page 155 g
355. s sliding tilting roof can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the out door temperature is higher than 20 C The sliding tilting roof can still be operated for approx 10 minutes after switching the ignition off However as soon as the driver or front passenger s door is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding tilting roof E CAUTION Always close the sliding tilting roof before disconnecting the battery f the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is possible that the Sliding tilting roof does not operate correctly In this case turn the rotary switch to the switch position A Fig 46 on page 64 and push forward for about 10 seconds Operation Fig 46 Control dial for the sliding tilting roof CQ Read and observe M on page 64 first Comfort position gt Turn the switch to position C Fig 46 When the sliding tilting roof is in the comfort position the intensity of the wind noise is reduced Open partially gt Simply turn the knob to a point between A and Open fully gt Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position spring tensioned position Tilting roof gt Turn the switch to position D Closing gt Turn the switch to position A Sun screen The sun screen is also opened automatically when the tilt slide sunroof slides open When the tilt slide sunroof is closed the sun screen can be manually op erated H Force
356. s can also result in wheel imbalance This may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering wheel which in certain circumstances can cause premature wear of the steering This means it is necessary to remove the dirt Towing device and mounting recess A Read and observe H and M on page 177 first Close the mounting recess with the cap to prevent any ingress of dirt If dirt is present clean the inner surfaces of the mounting recess and treat with a suitable preservative Always check the ball head before hitching a trailer Apply a suitable grease if necessary Fit the protective cap when stowing away the ball head to protect the luggage compartment against dirt EE CAUTION Apply grease to the inner part of the mounting recess Make sure you do not remove any grease Underbody protection A Read and observe H and H on page 177 first The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and me chanical influences When driving it cannot be guaranteed that no damage to the protective layer will occur We recommend having the protective layer underneath the vehicle and the chassis checked preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of winter H WARNING Never use additional underbody protection or anti corrosion agents for ex haust pipes catalytic converters diesel particle filters or heat shields When the engine reaches its operating temperature t
357. s chapter contains information on the following subjects Open cover 195 Checking the battery electrolyte level 195 Charging 196 Replacing OG Disconnecting or reconnecting 196 Automatic load deactivation 197 Warning symbols on the vehicle battery Meaning Always wear eye protection Battery acid is severely caustic Always wear gloves and eye pro tection Inspecting and replenishing 193 Symbol Meaning Keep fire sparks open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the vehicle battery When charging the vehicle battery a highly explosive gas mixture is produced Keep children away from the vehicle battery H WARNING There is risk of injuries poisoning chemical burns explosions or fire when working on the battery and on the electrical system It is essential to com ply with the generally applicable rules of safety as well as the warning in structions outlined below Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely inde pendent especially children Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the battery vent openings Protect your eyes by wearing safety goggles or a face shield risk of blindness a Always wear protective gloves eye and skin protection when handling the vehicle battery The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must therefore be handled with the greatest of care Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the
358. s free system the mobile phone remains paired Back Return to the main menu in the MAXI DOT display Internet connection via Bluetooth A notebook can for example be connected to the Internet via the hands free system The control unit of the hands free system supports the GPRS EDGE and UMTS 3G technologies An Internet can only be established via a telephone which is connected via the rSAP profile The procedure for connecting to the Internet can vary depending on the type and version of the operating system as well as the type of the device to be connected Successfully connecting to the internet requires appropriate knowledge of the operating system for connecting the device Sequence for connection gt Connect the mobile phone with the hands free system gt Set the access point in the Phone Settings Access point menu depending on the operator usually Internet Communication and multimedia 129 gt Switch on the visibility of the hands free system for other devices in the Phone Bluetooth Visibility menu gt Use the device that is to be connected to search for available Bluetooth de vices gt Select the hands free system as standard SKODA_BT from the list of found devices gt Enter the password on the device being connected and follow any instruc tions given on this device or in the MAXI DOTdisplay gt Enter the desired Internet address in the Internet browser The operating system
359. s necessary to activate the roof page 218 1 Applies to emergency operation of the Superb sliding tilting roof 2 Applies to emergency operation of the Superb Combi sliding tilting roof 218 Do it yourself Activation atter and recla imping the The panoramic sliding tilting roof referred to form now on as just the sliding tiling roof and the sun screen must be activated after disconnecting and re connecting the battery To activate the sliding tilting roof press the notch on the control dial down wards and forwards for approx 10 seconds To activate the sun screen press and hold the switch G Fig 48 on page 66for approx 10 seconds If the sliding tilting roof or sun screen is not fully closed or pushed shut when disconnecting and reconnecting the battery they must first be closed or push ed shut page 66 Opening closing the sun screen page 66 Operation Only then is it possible to perform the activation This chapter contains information on the following subjects Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 219 Replacing the rear window wiper blade 219 E WARNING Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea sons These can be purchased from a SKODA Partner Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Fig 197 Windscreen wiper blade N Read and observe H on page 218 first Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade put the windscreen wiper arms into the
360. s re sulting from the trailer wheels locking On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a brake Hitch and trailer 171 Engine overheating The speed must be reduced immediately if the needle for the coolant tempera ture gauge moves into the right hand area or the red area of the scale Stop and switch off the engine if the warning light in the instrument cluster illuminates The following guidelines must be observed page 36 Coolant The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating WARNING a Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic situation EE CAUTION If you tow a trailer frequently you should also have your vehicle inspected be tween service intervals Trailer stabilisation TSA The trailer stabilisation is an extension of the stabilisation control that works in conjunction with the counter steering assistance to reduce the amount the trailer sways After turning on the ignition the ESC warning light amp in the instrument cluster illuminates for about 2 seconds longer than the ABS warning light Function requirements for trailer stabilisation J The trailer was shipped from the factory or purchased from the KODA genuine accessories v The ESC is active Warning lights or amp do not illuminate in the instru ment cluster JV The trailer is elec
361. s too high Instruments and Indicator Lights 33 The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Gearbox overheated Stop Owner s manual do not continue to drive Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and wait until the lt icon goes out risk of gearbox damage You can continue your journey as soon as the icon disappears E WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 72 The warning triangle must be set up at the prescribed distance observe the national legal provisions when doing SO FT Note f the MAXI DOT display shows warning messages these messages must be confirmed in order to access the main menu page 42 As long as the operational faults are not rectified the symbols are always in dicated again After they are displayed for the first time the symbols continue to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Handbrake 35 Brake system 35 A Seat belt warning light 35 Generator 35 Door open 36 7 Engine oil pressure 36 Coolant 36 gt Bonnet 36 lt Boot lid 36 Power steering steering lock system KESSY 36 Engine oil level 37 amp Traction Control System ASR 37 amp Electronic Stability Control ESC 37
362. s when the cooling system is switched on If the desired interior temperature can also be achieved without activating the cooling system fresh air mode should be selected The cooling system is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to provide cooling at a high load of the engine EE CAUTION Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents especially around the feet and large differences in temperature for example when get ting out of the vehicle can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold 112 Operation FI Note We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a spe cialist garage once every year During operation of the air conditioning an increase in engine idle speed may occur under certain circumstances in order to ensure sufficient heating com fort Control elements PASSENGER AIR BAG w AD P P v EN ie gt 4 B3T 0588 Fig 125 The air conditioning system Control elements AN Read and observe M on page 112 first Functions of the individual controls Fig 125 A Set the temperature turn to the left to reduce the temperature turn to the right to increase the temperature Set the blower level level 0 blowers off level 4 the highest blower speed Set the direction of the air outlet page 110 A C Switch the cooling system on off G Switching the rear window heater on off page 75 Aux heating on off page 118 Sw
363. sary to switch on first the rSAP function gt Switch on the ignition gt Select the Phone New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until the hands free system has completed the search gt Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found gt Confirm the PIN gt If your SIM card is blocked by a PIN code enter the PIN code for the SIM card in your phone The telephone connects to the hands free system during the first connection you can only enter the PIN code in the MAXI DOT display when the vehicle is stationary as this is the only situation when you can choose whether the PIN code should be stored gt To save a new user follow the instructions in the MAXI DOT display gt Reconfirm the rSAP command on your mobile phone to download the tele phone book and the identification data from the SIM card into the hands free system Connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the HPP profile gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele phone gt Switch on the ignition gt Select the Phone New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until the hands free system has completed the search gt Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found 0 Depending on the Bluetooth version on the mobile phone an automatically generated 6 digit PIN SSP will either be displayed or a 16 digit code displayed in the MAXI DOTdisplay will need t
364. seated position a Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident This ap plies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable child safety seat page 24 Child safety and side airbag There must not be any further persons animals or objects positioned be tween the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag No accesso ries such as cup holders should be attached to the doors a f children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling they may be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident This can result in serious injuries page 22 Child seat EN WARNING The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the front doors For this reason no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or door panels e g installation of additional loudspeakers Further information page 175 Airbags Ensure that there are no excessive forces such as violent knocks kicks etc impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be damaged The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case a Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passen ger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by SKODA In view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat use of non approved seat or protective covers would co
365. sed on its own without the DVD player risk of injury a The inclination of the holder can be adjusted to three pre set positions Be careful not to injure fingers between the holder and the backrest when changes to the position of the DVD player holder are made a The DVD player holder must not be used when the rear seat backrest or the rear seat is folded forward or has been removed completely Note Follow the instructions given in the operating instructions of the DVD player holder DVD player Communication and multimedia 137 CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Electronic immobilizer 139 Ignition Switch 139 Starting the engine 139 Stopping the engine 140 Starting and stopping the engine on vehicles with the KESSY sys tem page 140 The engine can only be started using a correctly coded original key The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after Starting the cold engine This is quite normal and is not an operating problem E WARNING a When the vehicle is travelling with the engine off the ignition key must always be in position 2 Fig 134 on page 139 ignition switched on This position is confirmed by the appearance of certain indicator lamps in the in strument cluster a If the key is not in position 2 it could unexpectedly lock the steering danger of accident Only pull the ignition key from the ignition lock
366. serve H on page 173 first If your new vehicle is fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination with the spoiler on the luggage compartment lid then the following instruc tions must be adhered to gt For safety reasons the vehicle must only be fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination with the associated spoiler on the luggage compart ment lid gt This kind of spoiler cannot be left on the front bumper either on its own in combination with another spoiler not on the luggage compartment lid or in combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the luggage compartment lid gt We recommend that you consult the SKODA service partner for any repairs to or replacement addition or removal of spoilers E WARNING a f work on your vehicle s spoilers is not carried out properly this can lead to operational faults risk of accident and serious injuries a If a front spoiler full wheel trim etc is mounted retrospectively it must be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced The front brakes may overheat which can have a negative impact on the functioning of the braking system there is a risk of an accident Airbags A Read and observe H on page 173 first The system components of the airbag system can be situated in the front bumper doors front seats roof lining or body E WARNING Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of system components due to
367. sh in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place Tensioning strap gt Insert the tensioning strap holders into the opening on the left or right carri er rail gt Press the holder in the direction of the arrow 3 Fig 117 and simultaneous ly push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 4 gt Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place gt Place the object that is to be secured behind the tensioning strap gt Press the button 5 on the top side of the holder and tighten the strap H WARNING The objects in the boot must be firmly secured with the fixing set so that they cannot move freely and uncontrollably and to prevent damage to ob jects or injuries to occupants EF Note Do not use the fixing set to secure objects that might damage the fixing set a The tensioning strap can also be fully reeled up by pressing the button 5 Fig 117 Movable lashing eyes Fig 118 Move lashing eyelets N Read and observe M on page 105 first There are four moveable lashing eyelets in the boot that can for example be used to attach the fixing nets gt Press the button in the direction of arrow 1 Fig 118 and move the lashing eyelets to the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Fold up the clamp the lashing eyelets A and for example attach the fixing net CQ Introduction This chapter contains in
368. sible to operate the window for a short time You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the overheating protection has cooled down Opening closing the window from the driver seat Fig 44 Buttons on the driver s door N Read and observe H and H on page 62 first Power window buttons Fig 44 A Button for electrical power window of the driver s door Button for electrical power window of the front passenger door Button for electrical power window of the rear right door D Button for electrical power window of the rear left door S Safety pushbutton Opening gt Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has moved into the desired position Releasing the button causes the window to stop immediately The window can be completely opened automatically by briefly pressing the button as far as the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately Closing gt Pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold until the window has moved into the desired position Releasing the button causes the window to stop immediately The window can also be fully closed automatically by pulling the button up to the stop Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immedi ately Safety pushbutton The buttons for power windows in the rear doors can be deactivated by press ing the safety switch S Fig 44 The buttons for the electrical power
369. signalling of the activation of the warning system on and off in the MAXI DOT display in the menu item ATA confirm page 47 Interior monitor and towing protection Fig 37 Button for interior monitor and towing protection N Read and observe on page 56 first The interior monitor detects movements inside the car and then triggers the alarm The tow away protection triggers the alarm if a vehicle is registered as being on an inclination Activating The interior monitor and the towing protection are activated automatically af ter the vehicle is locked Deactivating gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the driver door gt Press the symbol button amp Fig 37 on the B column on the driver s side The symbol lighting in the button changes m from red to orange gt Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds Deactivate the interior monitor and the towing protection if there is a possibili ty of the alarm being triggered by movements e g by children or animals within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported e g by train or ship or towed CAUTION The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the interior monitor To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor the glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehi cle a The anti theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked even if the SafeLock system is deactivated T
370. soiled e g with wax resi dues after washing in automatic car wash systems page 177 a The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en gine is running and the outside temperature is less than approx 10 C Lights and visibility 77 Windscreen wipers and washers Fig 63 Operating lever Windscreen wipers and washer settings CQ Read and observe H and H on page 77 first Lever positions o0 OFF Wipers off 1 s1 Periodic windscreen wiping automatic wiping in rain 2 LOW Slow windscreen wiping 3 HIGH Rapid windscreen wiping 4 1x Flick windscreen wiping service position of the wiper arms page 219 spring loaded position 5 amp Automatic wipe wash for windscreen spring loaded position 6 Wiping the rear window the windscreen wiper wipes at regular in tervals after a few seconds ira Automatic wipe wash for the rear window spring loaded position A 1 Switches for setting the desired pause between the individual wip er strokes the speed of the wiping in rain operating lever in the position 1 Interval windscreen wiping 11 The wiping intervals are also speed dependent regulated Automatic windscreen wiping in rain 11 The wiping intervals are controlled depending on the rain intensity Automatic wipe wash for windscreen The wash system operates immediately the windscreen wipers wipe some what later The wash system and the windscreen wiper opera
371. splay shows the icon brake pedal gt Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro tates into the required position the symbol goes out gt Carefully move backwards You can repeat these steps several times in succession As soon as the parking procedure is completed an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in the display Park Assist stopped Take over steering Automatic brake assist when speeding If a velocity of 7 km his exceeded during the parking manoeuvre for the first time the speed will be automatically reduced by the system to less than 7 km h This prevents the parking manoeuvre from aborting Automatic termination The system terminates the parking procedure if one of the following cases ari ses gt A speed of 7 km his exceeded for the second time gt The time limit of 6 minutes is exceeded Assistsystems 159 gt The system key is pressed gt The ASR system is turned off gt There is a driver intervention in the automatic steering operation wheel stop gt When there is a system fault system temporarily not available gt There is an automatic emergency braking If any of the above events occurs the following message is dis played page 160 Departing from a parallel parking space A Read and observe H and on page 158 first Manoeuvring out gt Press the symbol buttononce Pe Fig 149 on page 158 gt Activa
372. ssigned 17 Instrument cluster windscreen wiper lever and turn signal lever 18 Audio amplifier sound system 19 Radio 20 22 Not assigned 23 Engine control unit 24 Data bus control unit 25 26 Not assigned 27 Fuel dosage valve 28 Engine control unit Consumer Main relay Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit Data bus control unit Windscreen wipers Engine control unit Not assigned Ignition Radiator fan valves Clutch brake pad sensor Lambda probe AKF valve Lambda probe Ignition Not assigned Front left main headlight left tail light Pump for ABS Power supply for terminal 15 ignition on Not assigned Power supply relay terminal X Power to the internal fuse carrier Not assigned a In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine the electrical components of this terminal are automatically switched off Fuse assignment in the engine compartment version B No l Consumer Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG Measuring circuit Valves for ABS Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG Not assigned Power supply relay terminal X Radio WO CO N a Ul BR WIN 10 Not assigned Engine control unit Main relay Lambda probe petrol engine glow plug system relay and fuel pump di
373. st fuel immediately after the start Fuel con sumption drops to 10 litres 100 km after just 1 kilometre The consumption sta bilises once the engine and catalytic converter have reached their operating temperature An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature The graph Fig 144 shows the different levels of fuel consumption after driving a certain distance at a temperature of 20 C and a temperature of 10 C Checking tyre pressure QN Read and observe M on page 149 first Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel Always ensure the tyre inflation pressure is correct page 198 If the pressure is too low the tyres will have to overcome a higher rolling resistance This will not only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behav iour will worsen Always check the tyre inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Avoiding unnecessary ballast N Read and observe on page 149 first Transporting ballast costs fuel Each kilogramme of weight increases the fuel consumption Therefore we rec ommend carrying no unnecessary weight It is particularly in town traffic when one is accelerating quite often that the vehicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption A rule of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an in crease in fuel consumption of about 1 litre 100 kilometres At a speed of 100 120 km h a vehicle fitted
374. st workshop if the gearbox has switched to the emergency pro gramme CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects New engine _ 4B New tyres 149 New brake pads 149 148 Driving New engine The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres Up to 1 000 kilometres gt Do not drive faster than 3 4 of the maximum speed of the gear in use which means 3 4 of the maximum permissible engine speed gt No full throttle gt Avoid high engine speeds gt Do not tow a trailer From 1 000 up to 1 500 kilometres Gradually increase the power output of the engine up to the full speed of the gear engaged which means up to the maximum permissible engine speed The red scale on the rev counter indicates the range in which the system be gins to limit the engine speed During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later until all of the moving parts have harmonized The driving style which you adopt during the first approx 1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the suc cess of running in your car Never drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds even after the running in pe riod On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox at the very latest shift up into the next gear when the red area is reached Observe the recommended gear page 43 Gear recommendation Very high engine speeds when acceler ating accelerator are automatically restricted M
375. stened with the ISOFIX system on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE R 16 standard Size class Fron nger b r rear Rear middle up to 10 kg O up to 13 kg a The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat b If the front passenger seat is fitted with the ISOFIX system attachment points it is suited for the installation of an ISOFIX child seat with the Semi Universal approval IL SU The seat is suited for installation of a ISOFIX child seat with the Semi Universal approval The Semi Universal category means that the child seat with the ISOFIX system is approved for your vehicle Observe the list of vehicles that comes with the child seat IUF The seat is suitable for the installation of a ISOFIX child seat with the ap proval Universal and attachment with the TOP TETHER system belt X The seat is not fitted with ISOFIX system attachment points 26 Safety Attachment points of the TOP TETHER system Anchor eyelets on the TOP TETHER system B3T 0706 TOP TETHER represents a fastening system which restricts movements of the up per part of the child seat The anchor eyelets for attaching the belt for a child seat with the TOP TETHER sys tem are located on the rear side of the outer rear seat backrests Fig 19 E WARNING a Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a chil
376. storage box Storage compartment on passenger side Storage compartment under passenger seat Clothes hook Storage pockets on the front seats Storage compartment for umbrella Storage compartment in rear centre console Storage compartment in the rear armrest Rear seat backrest with long cargo channel Removable ski bag U WARNING Do not place anything on the dash panel These objects might slide or fall down while you are driving under acceleration or when cornering and could distract you from the traffic there is a risk of an accident Make sure that no objects from the centre console or from other storage compartments can get into the driver s footwell while you are driving You 92 93 93 94 94 94 95 95 95 96 96 97 would not be able to brake operate the clutch pedal or accelerate danger of causing an accident No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the drinks holders the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sud den braking or the vehicle collides with something a Ash and cigarette or cigar stubs must only be discarded in ashtrays Car park ticket holder B3T 0675 Fig 79 Parking ticket holder N Read and observe H on page 89 first The note holder is designed e g for attaching car park tickets E WARNING The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order not to restrict the driver s vision
377. strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to allow the heated air to escape The cooling system should not be switched on if the windows are open For the sake of the environment Pollutant emissions are also lower when fuel is being saved page 149 Eco nomical driving and environmental sustainability Air conditioning system 111 Operational problems A Read and observe H and on page 110 first If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than 5 C there is a problem in the system The reasons for this may be gt One of the fuses has blown Check the fuse and replace if necessa ry page 220 gt The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot page 31 If you are not able to resolve the operational problem yourself or if the cooler output has reduced switch off the cooling system and seek assistance froma specialist garage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Control elements 112 adjusting 114 Recirculated air mode 114 The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met JV The cooling system is switched on page 112 v The engine is running J The outside temperature is above approximately 2 C v The blower is switched on Under certain circumstances air at a temperature of about 5 C can flow out of the vent
378. symbol and the number of days remaining until the next service inter val are displayed in position B gt The symbol and the number of kilometres remaining until the next service interval are displayed in position C Resetting the service interval display We recommend that the display reset is completed by a specialist garage We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself In correctly setting the service interval display could cause problems to the vehi cle Variable service interval For vehicles with variable service intervals after resetting the oil change serv ice display the values of a new service interval are displayed which are based on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle These values are then continuously matched according to the actual operating conditions of the vehicle 0 Depending on the individual setting page 54 2 This function applies only to vehicles with specific equipment or for some countries 50 Operation CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Vehicle key 51 Unlocking locking with the remote control key 52 Opening closing a door 52 Unlocking locking KESSY 53 Information messages KESSY 33 Safe securing 54 Individual settings 54 Locking unlocking the vehicle from the inside 55 Child safety lock 55 Your car is equipped with a central locking system The central locking system
379. system off A C Switch the cooling system on off page 116 DUAL Switch the temperature setting in Dual mode on off page 116 Control the seat heater on the front right seat page 85 WY o x Note Do not stick anything on or cover the interior temperature sensor E other wise it could have an unfavourable effect on the Climatronic automatic mode The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and to demist the windows in the interior of the car Recommended setting for all periods of the year gt Set the required temperature between 18 C and 26 C we recommend 22 ig Oe gt Press the button AUTO Fig 126 on page 715 gt Set the air outlet vents 2 and 3 Fig 123 on page 710 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards After pressing a warning light in the top right or left corner of the button AUTO illuminates depending on which mode was last selected If the warning light in the top right corner of the button AUTO illuminates the Climatronic operates in HIGH mode The HIGH mode is the standard setting of the Climatronic Upon pressing the AUTO button again the Climatronic switches to LOW mode and the warning light in the top left corner illuminates The Climatronic uses only in this mode the lower blower speed However taking into account the noise level this is more comfortable yet be aware that the effectiveness of the air conditioning system
380. t HU WARNING The through loading channel is only intended for transporting skis that are placed in a properly secured removable through loading bag page 97 Removable ski bag QO Read and observe H on page 89 first The removable through loading bag hereinafter referred to only as a through loading bag is used exclusively for transporting skis Loading gt Open the boot lid gt Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest down wards page 96 Rear seat backrest with long cargo channel gt Place the empty through loading bag in such a way that the end of the bag with the zip is in the boot gt Push the skis into the through loading bag from the boot H gt Close the through loading bag Securing gt Tighten the strap A on the free end around the skis in front of the bind ings Fig 98 gt Fold the seat backrest a little forward gt Guide the securing strap B through the opening in the seat backrest around the upper part of the seat backrest gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the unlock ing button clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest gt Insert the securing strap B into the lock C until it clicks into place On vehicles fitted with a luggage net partition guide the securing strap around the housing when the net partition is rolled up After fixing the through loading bag in place it is not longer possible to un
381. t Open and close compartment Superb Combi gt Pull the handle in the direction of the arrow Fig 107 gt Open the compartment cover downwards gt When closing keep hold of the handle until the compartment is closed The CD changer and TV Tuner are housed in this compartment The first aid box and warning triangle can also be stored in this compartment Side compartment in boot with battery Fig 108 Open compartment with battery Superb Superb Combi 102 Operation CQ Read and observe H and M on page 98 first On some vehicles the battery is located in the left compartment page 193 Open close compartment Superb gt Unfasten the bolts e g with a coin or screwdriver in the direction of the ar row 1 Fig 108 Closing takes place in reverse order Open and close compartment Superb Combi gt For example insert a coin in the slot A and lift them in the arrow direction 2 Fig 108 The compartment opens out in the direction of the arrow 3 gt Close compartment opposite to arrow direction 3 juntil you hear it click F Note The side compartment where the battery is located is labelled in the Superb Combi vehicles with the symbol amp Non closable side pocket Superb Combi Fig 109 Removing non lockable side compartment B3T 0658 A Read and observe H and M on page 98 first Increasing the size of the boot gt Remove the cover of the stowage compartment in
382. t Hill Hold Control HHC page 156 gt Trailer stabilisation TSA page 172 The ESC system cannot be deactivated The amp Fig 146 button can only be used to deactivate the ASR The amp warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the ASR is de activated Antilock brake system ABS A Read and observe H and F on page 154 first ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking Thereby it helps the driver to maintain control of the vehicle The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises When the ABS system is active do not brake periodically or reduce the pres sure on the brake pedal Traction Control System ASR Fig 147 ASR button QO Read and observe H and H on page 154 first If the wheels are slipping the ASR system adapts the engine speed to the con ditions of the road surface The ASR makes it much easier to start off acceler ate and climb steep hills even if the conditions of the road surface are unfav ourable The ASR function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on If your vehicle is fitted with the ESC system the ASR is integrated into the ESC system page 154 During an intervention of the system the ASR warning light amp flashes in the instrument cluster The ASR should normally always be enabled The system should be deactiva ted only in the following sit
383. t maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered which can lead to injuries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct There must not by any further persons animals or objects positioned be tween the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag E WARNING Front airbag and transporting children Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a proper restraint system If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat page 20 Deactivating airbags If this is not done there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed When transporting a child on the front passenger seat pay attention to any relevant national regula tions regarding the use of child safety seats E WARNING General information The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash pan el on the passenger side must not have stickers attached be covered or modified in any other way These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth th
384. t and technology The information listed in this operating manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going to press It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the technical data illustrations and information contained in this Owner s Manual Service schedule The service plan includes the documentation of the vehicle handover informa tion with regard to warranty and service events The radio instruction manual The instruction manual of the radio contains a description of the operation of the radio and possibly also some functions and vehicle systems Manual of the navigation system The manual of the navigation system includes a description of the operation of the navigation system and possibly also some functions and vehicle systems 4 Board literature Move Brochure The Move brochure contains phone numbers of importers and service offices in individual countries together with emergency numbers Terms used The on board literature contains the following terms relating to the service work for your vehicle Specialist garage a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks for SKODA vehicles A specialist garage can be a SKODA partner a SKODA service partner or an independent workshop KODA service partner A Workshop that has been contractually authorised by the manufacturer SKODA AUTO a s or its sales partner to perform service tasks on SKODA vehicles and to sel
385. t as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time H gt Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler neck and put it back in the pump gt Insert the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and screw it in a clockwise direc tion until it clicks into place gt Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place Check that the fuel filler flap is closed properly EE CAUTION The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time provided the nozzle has been operated properly 1 In Germany also DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane rating 95 or 91 or DIN 51626 2 or E5 for unleaded petrol with octane rating 95 or 98 184 General Maintenance FI Note The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres including a reserve of approx 10 5 litres Unleaded petrol A Read and observe H and M on page 183 first The vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol that meets the EN 228 standard All petrol engines can be operated using petrol with a maximum of 10 bioe thanol E10 Specified fuel unleaded petrol 95 91 or 92 or 93 RON Use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON Unleaded petrol with the octane ratings 91 or 92 or 93 RON can also be used but may result in a slight loss in performance and slightly increased fuel consumption Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol min 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON or higher If unleade
386. t differ from the factory fitted ones page 201 Explanation of the tyre labelling E WARNING Information on the wheel bolts a The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily Never treat them with grease or oil a The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light al loy wheels is 120 Nm a f the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque the rim can come loose when the car is moving A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim a In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts the wheel can loosen when the car is moving Note The national legal requirements must be observed when changing a wheel Preliminary work N Read and observe H on page 206 first Before changing the wheel the following work must be carried out gt Have all the occupants get out The passengers should not stand on the road instead they should remain behind a crash barrier for instance while the wheel is being changed gt Switch off the engine gt Select the Ist gear or place the selector lever of the automatic transmission in the P position gt Apply the handbrake firmly gt Uncouple a trailer 206 Do it yourself gt Remove the vehicle tool kit page 205and the spare wheel page 200from the boot Changing a wheel N Read and observe H on page 206 first When changing a whee
387. t no ob jects from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compart ment under sudden braking risk of injury In occupied rear seats make sure that the respective seat backrests are properly engaged 88 Operation AE CAUTION Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backr ests Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the fol ded back seat backrests Store the head restraints that were removed in such a way that they are not damaged or soiled Rear seat folded forward Superb Combi Fig 78 A Folding the seat cushion for wards gt 1 ay B3T 0642 gt Pull up the seat squab in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 78 and fold for wards in the direction of the arrow 2 F Note To achieve a loading space that is as horizontal as possible the rear head re straints can be removed before folding the seat backrests forwards Store the removed head restraints in such a way that they are not damaged or soiled CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Car park ticket holder 89 Storage compartment on the driver s side 89 Storage compartments inthe doors 90 Storage compartment in the front centre console 90 Cup holders 90 Cigarette lighter ST Ashtray 91 12 Volt power outlet 92 Storage compartment under the front armrest Storage net in front centre console Glasses
388. te control vertically with the aerial A pointing upwards The antenna must not be covered with the fingers or the palm of the hand during this process The auxiliary heating can only be switched on off safely using the radio re mote control if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle is at least 2 m After pressing the button the warning light in the remote control gives the user different kinds of feedback Display warning light B Fig 128 Meaning The auxiliary heating has been Lights up green for around 2 seconds E E On The auxiliary heating has been switched off Slowly flashes green for around 2 sec The ignition signal was not received onds Lights up red for around 2 seconds The auxiliary heating is blocked e g Quickly flashes green for around 2 because the tank is nearly empty or seconds there is a fault in the auxiliary heat ing i ff signal was not re Flashes red for around 2 seconds ei ott signal was not re The battery is weak however the switching on or off signal was re ceived Lights up orange for around 2 sec onds then green or red Display warning light le gt Fig 128 Meaning The battery is weak however the switching on or off signal was not re ceived The battery is discharged however the switching on or off signal was not received Lights up orange for around 2 sec onds then flashes green or red Flashes ora
389. te simultaneous ly at a speed of more than 120 km h 78 Operation Letting go of the operating lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the wipers to continue for another 3 4 wiper strokes depending on the spraying duration At a speed of more than 2 km h the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds after the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen This function can be activated deactivated by a specialist garage Automatic wipe wash for the rear window amp Superb Combi The wash system operates immediately the wiper wipes somewhat later Letting go of the operating lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the wiper to continue for another 2 to 3 wiper strokes depending on the spraying duration The operating lever remains in position Fig 63 6 Automatic rear window wiper Superb Combi If the lever is in position 2 Fig 63 or 3 the rear window is wiped every 30 or 10 seconds if the vehicle s speed exceeds 5 km h If automatic windscreen wiping in rain is activated the operating lever is in the position 1 the function is only active if the windscreen wipers operate in continuous mode no break between each wiping process Automatic rear window wiping can be activated deactivated via the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Rear wiper page 47 Winter setting of the windscreen wiper If the windscreen wipers are in rest position they cannot be folded out fro
390. te the turn signal for side of the vehicle where the parking space is out of which you wish to manoeuvre gt Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R gt As soon as the following message is shown in the display Steering int ac tive Monitor area around veh let go of the steering wheel The steering will be taken over by the system gt Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully gt Follow the system instructions shown in the display As soon as the parking procedure is completed an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in the information display Q Take over steering and continue driving Automatic termination The system terminates the manoeuvring procedure if one of the following ca Ses arises gt The system key is pressed gt The ASR system is turned off gt There is a driver intervention in the automatic steering operation wheel stop gt When there is a system fault system temporarily not available gt There is an automatic emergency braking If any of the above events occurs the following message is dis played page 160 160 Driving Automatic emergency braking N Read and observe H and on page 158 first If the system detects a risk of collision during parking automatic emergency braking takes place to prevent a collision The parking is terminated by the emergency braking EE CAUTION If the parking is aborted due to
391. teering wheel is operated by the system is referred to as parking operation Assist systems 157 The parking aid is part of the park assist system therefore the information and safety guidelines page 156 Parking aid must also be read and ob served E WARNING The system only serves as an assistance and does not relieve the driver of the responsibility for the vehicle operation During the parking process the system automatically performs rapid steering movements While it is doing so do not place your hands between the steering wheel spokes risk of injury a During a parking manoeuvre on loose or slippery surfaces gravel snow ice etc you may stray from the calculated road because of the surface conditions Therefore we suggest that you do not use the system in such situations a External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors Un der adverse conditions this may cause objects or people to not be recog nised by the system EE CAUTION a f other vehicles are parked behind the kerb or on it the system can also guide your vehicle beyond the kerb or onto it Ensure that the wheels or the wheel rims of your vehicle are not damaged and if necessary intervene in time s Under certain circumstances surfaces or structures of certain objects such as wire mesh fences or powder snow cannot be recognised by the system Under adverse weather conditions heavy rain water vapour very low or high tempe
392. temperature is regulated automatically within this range If a temperature lower than 18 C is selected a blue symbol illuminates at the start of the numerical scale If a temperature higher than 26 C is selected a red symbol illuminates at the start of the numerical scale At both end positions Climatronic functions at maximum cooling heating out put and the temperature is not regulated EE CAUTION Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents especially around the feet and large differences in temperature for example when get ting out of the vehicle can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold Recirculation mode Version 1 Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting in to the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is recognised by the air quality sensor recirculated air mode will temporarily be switched off If the concentration of pollutants decreases to the normal level the air distri bution control is automatically switched off so that fresh air can be guided into the vehicle interior In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior When the automatic air distribution control is switched on an air quality sen sor measures the concentration of pollutants in the drawn in air Switch
393. tes when the park ing light is on 12 Volt power outlet YY Mim Fig 87 Boot Superb Superb Combi socket N Read and observe H on page 89 first The 12 volt power socket hereinafter referred to only as a socket is located in the front center console A Fig 85 on page 97 in the rear center console Fig 85 on page 97 and in the luggage compartment Fig 87 Use gt Remove the cover from power socket or cigarette lighter Fig 85 on page 91or open the cover for the power socket Fig 87 gt Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket The power socket and any connected appliances can also be operated when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn H 92 Operation D WARNING Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can cause fires burns and other serious injuries Therefore when leaving the vehicle never leave people who are not completely independent such as children unattended in the vehicle a f the connected electric device becomes too hot switch it off and discon nect it from the power supply immediately EE CAUTION The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical acces sories with a power uptake of up to 120 watt Never exceed the maximum power consumption otherwise the vehicle s electrical system can be damaged Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery of the
394. the MAXI DOT display page 46 Press button for a long Display main menu of the period of time MAXI DOT display page 46 Turn upwards or down wards Select data set data values Press briefly View information confirm specification 42 Operation Display a low temperature N Read and observe H on page 42 first Display in the MAXI DOT display If the outside temperature while driving drops to below 4 C the following icon appears on the display in front of the temperature display An audible Signal is emitted If the outside temperature is already below 4 C when turning the ignition on the icon appears immediately Prompt in the segment display If the outside temperature while driving drops to below 4 C the temperature display will show up with the following icon before this occurs An audible signal is emitted If the outside temperature is already below 4 C when turning the ignition on the temperature display and the icon appear immediately After pressing button A Fig 27 on page 42 the most recently displayed data is shown U WARNING Even at temperatures of around 4 C there may still be black ice on the road surface You should therefore not rely solely on the outside tempera ture display for accurate information as to whether there is ice on the road Gear recommendation 14 18 CREM Fig 28 Information on the selected gear gear recommendation 207 OQ
395. the direction of the ar row Fig 109 FE CAUTION When handling the side compartment ensure that the cover and the cover mountings are not damaged CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Use light 103 Changing rechargeable light batteries 103 A removable lamp is fitted on the left side of the boot This lamp has two func tions gt Lighting the luggage compartment part B Fig 110 on page 103 illumina ted lamp in holder gt Portable lamp part C illuminated lamp removed from the holder If the lamp is in the holder it is automatically switched on when the boot lid is opened and switched off again when the boot lid is closed The lamp is supplied by three rechargeable type AAA batteries The rechargea ble batteries are constantly charged when the engine is running It takes ap prox 3 hours to fully charge the rechargeable batteries The lamp is fitted with magnets Therefore it is possible to attach the lamp for example on the vehicle body after removing it EH CAUTION The removable lamp is not watertight and must therefore be protected against moisture EI Note a f the lamp is not correctly inserted into the holder it does not light up when the boot lid is opened and the rechargeable batteries are not charged a f the lamp is not switched off and it is correctly inserted in the holder the bulbs in the front part C Fig 110 on page 103
396. the full wheel trim there is a risk of damaging the trim a When using the anti theft wheel bolt ensure that it is in the hole in the valve area a f wheel trims are fitted an adequate flow of air must be assured in order to cool the brake system FF Note We recommend that you use wheel trims from SKODA Original Accessories Wheel bolts Fig 174 Remove the cap N Read and observe H and M on page 197 first Before removing the wheel bolts remove the covering caps Pulling off gt Push the extraction pliers page 205 sufficiently far onto the cap until the inner catches of the pliers are positioned at the collar of the cap gt Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow Fig 174 Fitting gt Push the cap onto the wheel bolt up to the stop CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Explanation of the tyre labelling 201 Superb 202 Superb GreenLine 202 Superb N1 203 Approved tyre variants are first to be selected for the model variant e g Su perb GreenLine and then selected according to the engine size of your vehi cle If the model variant of your vehicle cannot be found in the discrete module then the approved tyre variants are to be selected according to the engine size of your vehicle in module page 202 Superb Only use radial tyres of the same type size rolling circumference and tread pattern on one axle on all four wheels When
397. the ignition 2 Fig 134 on page 139 gt Depress and hold the clutch pedal vehicles with a manual gearbox or brake pedal vehicles with an automatic gearbox until the engine starts gt Turn the key to position 3 to the stop and release immediately the engine has started do not depress the accelerator After letting go the vehicle key will return to position 2 If the engine does not start within 10 seconds turn the key to position 1 Re peat the start up process after approx half a minute Vehicles with manual transmission The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed The following message is shown in the instrument cluster display Q Depress clutch to start CLUTCH Starting off and Driving 139 Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine will not start if the brake pedal is not depressed The following message is shown in the instrument cluster display Q Depress the brake to start BRAKE CAUTION f the engine does not start up after a second attempt one of the following fuses may be defective Petrol engine fuse for the electric fuel pump Diesel engine fuse for the control unit for glow plugs or glow plug relay and fuel pump a Check the fuse and replace if necessary page 220 or seek assistance from a specialist garage Stopping the engine A Read and observe H and M on page 138 first Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key to position
398. the rear fog light on the trailer illuminates if the vehicle has a factory fit ted towing device or a towing device from SKODA original accessories and it is driven with a trailer COMING HOME LEAVING HOME A Read and observe H on page 67 first COMING HOME hereinafter referred to only as function switches the light au tomatically for a short time after leaving the vehicle LEAVING HOME hereinafter referred to only as function switches the light au tomatically for a short time when approaching the vehicle The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met v The light switch is in position AUTO Fig 51 on page 70 The visibility in the vehicle environment is reduced The ignition is switched off The parking aid is activated The function is switched on the driver s door is opened the car is un locked with the remote control 4 The function switches on the following light depending on the equipment fitted gt Parking lights gt Low beam gt Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors gt Licence plate light Poorer visibility is evaluated by sensor mounted in the holder of the interior mirror COMING HOME The light turns on automatically when you open the driver s door on within 60 seconds of turning off the ignition The light turns off 10 seconds after closing all the doors and the boot lid or af ter the pre set time has expired If a door or the boot lid remains open t
399. the rocker button B into the SET Fig 151 on page 161 position After you have released the rocker button B from the SET position the speed you have just stored is kept constant without having to depress the ac celerator Changing the stored speed A Read and observe H and H on page 161 first Increasing the speed with the rocker button gt Push the rocker button B into the RES Fig 151 on page 161 position If the rocker button is held in the RES position the speed will increase con tinuously Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory Decreasing the speed using the rocker button The stored speed can be reduced by pushing the rocker switch B into the SET Fig 151 on page 161 position If the rocker button is pressed and held in the SET position the speed will decrease continuously Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory If the rocker button is released at a speed of less than approx 25 km h the speed is not stored and the memory is erased Once the speed of the vehicle has increased to more than approx 25 km h the speed must then be stored again by pushing the rocker button B into the SET position Increasing the speed with the accelerator gt Depress the accelerator pedal Releasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set speed Dec
400. the sake of the environment A suitably selected gear has the following advantages a It helps to reduce fuel consumption a It reduces engine noise a t protects the environment a It benefits the life and reliability of the engine Information system 43 Door boot or engine compartment warning N Read and observe H on page 42 first Vehicles with a MAXI DOT display If at least one door the boot or bonnet is open the display indicates the rele vant open door boot or bonnet vehicle icon Vehicles with a segment display If at least one door or the boot or bonnet is open the warning lights or 3 and gt come on in the instrument cluster page 34 Warning lights An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km h when a door is open CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Memory 44 Information overview 45 Warning at excessive speeds 46 The driving data is displayed on the multifunction display The multifunction display only operates when the ignition is switched on After the ignition is switched on the function that was last selected before switch ing off the ignition is displayed For vehicles with a MAXI DOT display the menu item MFD must be selected and confirmed in the main menu page 46 MAXI DOT display On vehicles with a MAXI DOT display there is an option to fade out some of the information page 47 Settings H WAR
401. the speed exceeding 7 km h for the second speed then the automatic emergency braking is not triggered by the system Information messages A Read and observe H and on page 158 first Q Park Assist Speed too high If a speed of 50 km h is exceeded while searching for a parking space the system with the key symbol is Pe must be reactivated Speed too high Take over steering The parking is terminated if the speed exceeds 7 km hr Q Driver steering intervention Take over steering The parking procedure is terminated due to a driver steering intervention Park Assist stopped ASR deactivated The parking procedure cannot be carried out because the ASR system is deac tivated Activate the ASR ASR deactivated Take over steering The parking procedure was ended because ASR was deactivated during the parking procedure O Trailer Park Assist stopped The parking procedure cannot be carried out because a trailer is hitched Time limit exceeded Take over steering The parking procedure was ended because the time limit of 6 minutes was passed Park Assist currently not available The system cannot be activated because a fault exists on the vehicle Seek help from a specialist garage Park Assist stopped System not available right now The parking procedure was ended because a fault exists on the vehicle Seek help from a specialist garage Q Park Assist faulty Workshop The parking procedure
402. tion Sliding tilting roof 65 Sliding tilting roof Superb Estate 67 Convenience turn signal 70 Coolant 191 Checking 192 Messages 36 Replenishing 192 Temperature gauge 31 Warning light 36 CORNER See Fog lights with CORNER function 71 Correct seated position 9 Driver 9 Front passenger 10 Instructions TI Rear seats T Counter for distance driven 32 Cruise control system Activating deactivating 161 Changing the stored speed 162 Storing and maintaining speed 162 Switching off temporarily 162 Warning light 41 Cruise Control System 161 Cup holders 90 D DAY LIGHT see Daylight running lights 69 Daylight running lights 69 De icing the windscreen and rear window ___ s 75 Deactivating an airbag 21 Decorative films 179 Delayed locking of the boot lid see boot lid 58 Diesel refer to Fuel 185 238 Index diesel particulate filter 39 Diesel fuel Operation in winter 185 Diesel particulate filter warning light 39 Digital Clock Time 32 Dipstick 190 Display 31 Compass points 48 Coolant temperature 31 Fuel supply 32 Gear changes 43 Service intervals 48 Display a low temperature 43 Display of the second speed 33 Distance driven 32 Door Child safety lock 55 Closing 52 Emergency locking 217 Emergency locking the driver s door 216 Opening 52
403. tion Tyres that are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption Note We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres be carried out by a spe cialist garage We recommend that you use wheel rims tyres full wheel trims and snow chains from SKODA Original Accessories 198 General Maintenance Service life of tyres Fig 171 Principle sketch Tyre tread with wear indicators open fuel filler flap with a table detailing the tyre sizes and tyre inflation pressures Fig 172 Replacing wheels AN Read and observe H and on page 197 first The service life of tyres depends on the inflation pressure driving style and other circumstances Tyre pressure Check the tyre pressure including that of the spare wheel at least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey The tyre pressures for tyres are shown on the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 171 B The tyre pressure for the spare wheel should correspond to the highest pres sure specified for your vehicle Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Do not reduce the higher pressure on warm tyres In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring tyre pressure values are to be stor ed page 166 With greater additional load adjust the tyre inflation pressure accordingly Driving style Fast cornering sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres Wheel balance The wheels of a new vehicle
404. tion is activa ted in any forward driving mode The gearbox shifts down one or more gears depending on the vehicle speed and engine speed and the vehicle accelerates The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range Starting off and Driving 147 E WARNING Rapid acceleration particularly on slippery roads can lead to loss of control of the vehicle there is a risk of an accident Malfunction A Read and observe H and on page 145 first Emergency programme The transmission switches to the emergency programme if there is a fault in the automatic gearbox system Indications of an activated emergency programme include the following gt Only certain gears are selected gt Reverse gear R cannot be used gt Shifting gears in Tiptronic mode is not possible Gearbox overheating The gearbox may for example become too hot due to frequent repeated Starting or stop and go traffic Overheating is indicated by the warning light page 33 Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are too hot Defective selector lever lock If the selector lever lock is defective or its power supply is interrupted e g dis charged vehicle battery faulty fuse the selector lever can no longer be moved out of position P in the normal manner and the vehicle can no longer be driv en The selector lever must be emergency released page 217 FF Note Visit a speciali
405. tive gt Has the mobile phone already been paired with the hands free system Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display The following menu items can be selected from the Phone menu Phone book Dial number Call register Voice mailbox Bluetooth Settings Back Phone book The Phone book menu item lists the contacts downloaded from the telephone memory and the mobile phone SIM card Dial number Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item The re quired numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel You can select digits 0 9 symbols gt and the Cancel Call and Delete functions Communication and multimedia 125 Call register The following menu items can be selected in the Call register menu item Missed calls List of missed calls Dialled nos List of dialled numbers Received calls list of received calls Voice mailbox In the Voice mailbox menu item you can set the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number Bluetooth The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item User Overview of the stored telephones New user Search for new mobile phones in reception range Visibility Switches on the visibility of the hands free system for other devi ces Media player Playback via Bluetooth Active device Connected device Paired devices List
406. tive cap of the jump starting point in the direction of the ar row Fig 186 gt Connect the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power with the jump starting point gt Attach the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power to a solid metal part firmly connected to the engine block or to the engine block itself gt Start the engine gt After starting the engine close the protective cap of the jump starting point Fig 187 Braided tow rope Spiral tow rope This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front towing eye 214 Rear towing eye 214 Vehicles with a tow hitch 214 gt For towing a braided tow rope is to be used Fig 187 A The following guidelines must be observed when towing Vehicles with manual transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear wheels raised Vehicles with automatic transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front wheels raised If the vehicle is raised at rear the auto matic gearbox is damaged Driver of the tow vehicle gt Engage the clutch gently when starting off or depress the accelerator partic ularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox gt Only then approach correctly when the rope is taut The maximum towing speed is 50 km h Driver of the towed vehicle gt Switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel is
407. to ensure the full functioning of the vehicle as well as to prevent damage This involves for example the coolant battery replacement and the like Statutory checks A Read and observe H on page 173 first Many countries have legislation requiring the operational reliability and road worthiness and or exhaust gas properties of a vehicle to be tested at specific intervals These tests can be carried out by workshops or testing stations that have been legally authorised for this purpose Carcare 173 The SKODA Service Partners are up to date on the legally required tests and will prepare the vehicle for the tests as part of a service operation if required or will be responsible for carrying out these tests The specialist garages can carry out the specified tests directly if required by the customer if they are authorised to do so This saves you time and money Even if you want to take your vehicle to an officially approved test centre for prior checking in preparation of a legally required test we recommend that you consult the service consultant of your SKODA Service Partner beforehand Based on their appraisal the service consultant will tell you which areas you should focus on in order to ensure that your vehicle will pass the technical test without any problems This allows you to avoid additional expenses resulting from a possible subsequent test SKODA Service Partners N Read and observe H on page 173 first SKODA Service
408. to match the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers page 9 Correct and safe seated position Removing installing gt Fold the seat slightly forward before removing the rear head restraint gt Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop gt Press the locking button in the direction of the arrow Fig 69 B and pull the head restraint out gt To reinsert the head restraint push it far enough down into the seat back rest until the locking button clicks into place Removing and installing rear middle head rest Applies to vehicles using the TOP TETHER system gt Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop gt Press the locking button in the direction of arrow 1 Fig 70 simultaneously press the locking button into the opening 2 using a flathead screwdriver with a width of maximum 5 mm and pull out the head rest gt To reinsert the head restraint push it far enough down into the seat back rest until the locking button clicks into place H WARNING With seats occupied the respective head rests must be installed and cor rectly set may not be in the bottom position there is a risk of fatal injury F Note The middle rear head restraint is adjustable in two positions Seats and practical features 83 Memory function of the electrically adjustable seat
409. to run in emergency mode Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately oo Glow plug system diesel engine N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light oo illuminates after the ignition has been turned on Once the light has gone out the engine can be started immediately There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light 07 does not come on at all or illuminates continuously If the warning light o gt begins to flash while driving a fault exists in the engine control The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately PC Engine performance check petrol engine N Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light EPC illuminates there is a fault in the engine control The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately Diesel particulate filter diesel engine N Read and observe H on page 35 first The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust The soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt ona regular basis If the warning light illuminates rust has accumulated in the filter To clean the filter and where traffic conditions permit H drive as follows for at least 15 minutes or until the warning light goes out J 4thor 5th is selected automatic transmission position S Vehicle speed at
410. trically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trailer socket v The speed is higher than approx 60 km h vV The trailer has a rigid drawbar 172 Driving E WARNING a The increased safety offered by the trailer stabilisation must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise a Avoid abrupt and sudden driving and braking manoeuvres there is a risk of accidents EE CAUTION a The trailer stabilisation need not be able to correctly detect all of driving sit uations a Light trailers that sway are not always detected and therefore stabilised ac cordingly by the trailer stabilisation Release the pressure on the accelerator pedal if the system is being regula ted Note The trailer stabilisation works for both braked and unbraked trailers Anti theft alarm system When the vehicle is locked the alarm is activated when the electrical connec tion to the trailer is interrupted Always switch off the anti theft alarm system before a trailer is coupled or un coupled page 55 Conditions for including a trailer in the anti theft alarm system J The vehicle is factory fitted with an anti theft alarm system and towing equipment JV The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trailer socket vV The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is functional J The vehicle is locked with the vehicle key and the anti theft alarm system is activated EE CAUTION For techni
411. ts For the sake of the environment Technical documents regarding alterations carried out on the vehicle must be kept by the vehicle user in order to be handed over to the recyclers at a later date This ensures that the vehicle is recycled in an environmentally sound manner Note We recommend only having these modifications and technical alterations carried out by a specialist garage Any damage caused by technical alterations made without the approval of the manufacturer is excluded from the warranty Service schedule The KODA Partner does not assume any liability for products that have not been approved by KODA AUTO a s even though these may be products with an operational approval or that have been approved by a government testing institute We advise you only to use KODA Original Accessories and KODA Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle Reliability safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these KODA Original Accessories and KODA Original Parts can be purchased from SKODA Partners who will also perform the professional assembly of the pur chased parts Vehicle operating under different weather conditions A Read and observe H on page 173 first If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with its intended weather conditions you should contact a SKODA Partner He will advise you if certain precautions need to be taken
412. ts on the front seats 95 Puncture set 209 R Radiator fan 188 Radio 4 Radio reception See windows 179 Radio remote control Auxiliary heating 120 Raise vehicle 207 Rear view mirror Exterior mirrors 80 Fold in passenger mirror 80 Synchronous adjustment of the rear view mir ror 80 Rear fog light 71 Warning light 38 Rear interior light 74 Rear mirror 79 Interior mirror 79 Rear seats Seat folded forward Combi 88 Rear window heater 75 Recirculated air mode Manual air conditioning 114 Refuelling 184 Fuel 184 Remote control Locking 52 Replacing the battery 215 Synchronisation process 215 Unlocking 52 Remote control key Replacing the battery 215 Removable lights Superb Combi Changing rechargeable light batteries 103 Removable Light Superb Combi Remove light 103 Removable ski bag 97 Removable variable loading floor Fit and remove 106 Repairs and technical alterations 173 Replacing Bulb for main beam 225 Bulb for main beam and daytime running lights 225 Bulb for the fog light 225 Bulb for the licence plate light 226 Bulb in rear light Superb Combi 227 Fuses 220 Fuses in the dash panel 220 Fuses in the engine compartment 222 Low beam bulb 224 Vehicle battery 196 Wiper blades 219 Replenishing Coolant 192 Engine oil 191 Windscreen washer fluid 188 Revolution counter 21 Roof luggage rack Attachment points 109 Roof rack 108
413. ttings and use of the lights Lights and visibility 67 E WARNING Continued The automatic driving lamp control AUTO only operates as a support and does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the lights and if necessary to switch on the light depending on the prevailing light condi tions The light sensor cannot for example detect rain or snow Under these conditions we recommend switching on the low beam or fog lights Never drive with only the side lights on The side lights are not bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by oth er oncoming traffic Therefore always switch on the low beam when it is dark or if visibility is poor i Note The headlights may mist up temporarily When the driving lights are switched on the light outlet areas are free from condensation after a short time al though the headlight lenses may still be misted up around the edge This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system Operating the lights and the instrument illumination Fig 49 Light switches knobs for head light beam adjustment and brightness of instrument illumi nation A Read and observe H on page 67 first Switching lights on and off Depending on the equipment configuration the light switch A Fig 49 can be moved to the following positions Turn switch 0 Switching off lights except daytime running lights AUTO Automatic switching lights on and
414. uations for example gt When driving with snow chains gt When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface gt When rocking a car free when it has become stuck The ASR can be deactivated via the 488 Fig 147symbol button The amp warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the ASR is de activated Ensure the ASR is activated again afterwards Electronic Differential Lock EDL A Read and observe H and on page 154 first If one of the wheels starts to spin the EDL system brakes the spinning wheel and transfers the driving force to the other wheels This ensures the stability of the vehicle and a quick journey The EDL switches off automatically in order to avoid excessive heat generation in the disc brake of the wheel being braked The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down Driver Steering Recommendation DSR A Read and observe H and F on page 154 first In critical situations the DSR provides the driver with a steering recommenda tion in order to stabilise the vehicle The DSR is activated for example on the right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA N Read and observe H and H on page 154 first HBA increases the braking effect and helps to shorten the braking distance The HBA is a
415. ump start cables must be attached in the following sequence gt Attach clamp 1 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery A Fig 184 gt Attach clamp 2 to the positive terminal of the battery supplying power B gt Attach clamp 3 to the negative terminal of the battery supplying power B gt Attach clamp 4 to a solid metal component firmly connected to the engine block or to the engine block itself Starting engine gt Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle Emergency equipment and self help 211 gt Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery gt If the engine does not start halt the attempt to start the engine after 10 sec onds and wait for 30 seconds before repeating the process gt Remove the jumper cables exactly in the reverse sequence as for clamping Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V The capacity Ah of the bat tery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the discharged battery in your vehicle Jump start cables Only use jump start cables which have an adequately large cross section and insulated terminal clamps Obey the instructions of the jump start cable manu facturer Positive cable colour coding in the majority of cases is red Negative cable colour coding in the majority of cases is black E WARNING Do not clamp the jump start cable to the negative terminal of the dis cha
416. unicate actively with one user If a connection is established with a fourth mobile phone one of the users must be deleted When connecting to the hands free system follow the instructions on your mobile phone Communication and multimedia 127 Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display If no phone is connected to the hands free system the message No paired phone found appears along with the following menu items when the Phone menu is selected Help This menu item appears when no paired phone is stored in the memo ry of the hands free system Connect This menu item appears when one or more paired phones are stor ed in the memory of the hands free system New user New phone Media player Media player Active device Connected device Paired devices List of paired devices Find Device search a Visibility Visibility on off SOS Emergency call If a telephone is paired with the hands free system the following menu items can be selected in the Phone menu Phone book The Phone book menu item lists the contacts downloaded from the telephone memory and the mobile phone SIM card The following functions are available for each phone contact Display telephone number Voice tag Voice tag for the contact Play Play a voice tag Record Record a voice contact Dial number Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item The re quired numbers must be selected one after the othe
417. urney continues Some possible reasons for this are gt The vehicle has begun to roll e g on a slope gt The brake pedal has been actuated several times gt The current consumption is too high 164 Driving Manually deactivating activating the system Fig 153 Button for the START STOP sys tem AN Read and observe H on page 162 first Deactivating activating gt Press the amp button Fig 153 When start stop mode is deactivated the warning light in the button illumi nates Note If the system is deactivated when the engine is turned off automatically then the automatic start process takes place Information messages N Read and observe H on page 162 first The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display Start engine manually START MANUALLY One of the conditions for automatic engine start is not satisfied or the driver s seat belt is not fastened The engine must be started manually On vehicles with the system KESSY the ignition is turned off by the first press of the start button only after pressing for the second time is the start process initiated Fault Start stop ERROR START STOP A system error is present Seek help from a specialist garage CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Function 165 Information messages 165 E WARNING a For the driving ability is always the driver s responsibility Neve
418. us tone 3 rising tones 3 identical tones Adjusting deleting the top lid position A Read and observe H and H on page 59 first Adjusting gt Stop the lid in the desired position electrically or manually gt Press and hold the button B Fig 42 on page 59 for longer than 3 seconds Storing the new position is confirmed with an audible signal Delete gt Carefully lift up the lid manually to the maximum opening position gt Press and hold the button B Fig 42 on page 59 for longer than 3 seconds An audible signal sounds and the height which was originally set is deleted from the memory while the basic position of the top lid position is again set The top lid position is adjusted for example in the following situations gt When the space for opening the lid is limited e g garage height gt For a more convenient operation such as by a person s height The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically is always lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is opened manually The lid always opens to the height which was last stored Malfunctions N Read and observe H and H on page 59 first If the battery is disconnected and reconnected while the lid is open it is nec essary to activate the system of the electric boot lid Activation means closing the lid by hand Thus the end position of the lid is stored under fully closed in secured lock E
419. use gt Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket The cigarette lighter also operates when the ignition is switched off or the ig nition key withdrawn H E WARNING a Take care when using the cigarette lighter Improper usage can cause burns When leaving the vehicle never leave people who are not completely in dependent such as children unattended in the vehicle They could operate the lighter and burn themselves FF Note The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12 Volt socket for electrical appliances page 92 12 Volt power outlet Ashtray A AM DA Fig 86 Centre console Ashtray at the front rear N Read and observe H on page 89 first The ashtray can be used for discarding ash cigarettes cigars and the like H Removing inserting the front ash tray gt Open the ashtray Fig 82 on page 90 gt Grasp the ashtray insert in the area A Fig 86 and remove it in the direc tion of the arrow 1 Insertion takes place in reverse order Removing inserting the rear ashtray insert gt Open the ashtray Fig 95 on page 95 gt Grasp the ashtray insert B Fig 86 in the area marked with the arrows and remove it in the direction of the arrow 2 Insertion takes place in reverse order Seats and practical features 91 E WARNING Never place flammable objects in the ashtray risk of fire EF Note The ashtrays are fitted with an interior light which illumina
420. ve the selector lever into the desired position page 145 and then release the lock button 1 This function is only valid for some engines gt Release the brake pedal and accelerate Stop gt Fully depress and hold the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop gt Keep holding the brake pedal until driving is resumed The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a short time such as at a cross roads Parking gt Fully depress and hold the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Press the lock button in the direction of the arrow Fig 140 on page 146and keep pressing gt Move the selector lever into the position P and then release the locking but ton Launch control The launch control function allows the vehicle in mode S or Tiptronic to reach its maximum acceleration when starting off gt Disable the ASR page 154 Brake assist systems gt START STOP deactivate page 164 gt Fully depress and hold the brake pedal with your left foot gt Fully depress the accelerator pedal with your right foot gt Release the brake pedal The vehicle starts off with maximum acceleration Reactivate the ASR and START STOP when the desired speed has been reached Kickdown The kickdown function allows you to achieve maximum acceleration by your vehicle while driving When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed the kickdown func
421. vehicle F Note The brake fluid is changed as part of a compulsory inspection service We recommend using brake fluids from the SKODA Original Accessories range Checking the brake fluid level Fig 168 Engine compartment Brake fluid reservoir i A Read and observe H and on page 193 first The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment Fig 168 gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir Fig 168 The level must be between the MIN and MAX markings A slight drop in the fluid level results in operation due to normal wear and tear and the automatic adjustment of the brake pads There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system however if the fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the MIN mark ing If the brake fluid level is too low this is indicated by the warning light page 35 Brake system illuminating in the instrument cluster Changing N Read and observe H and H on page 193 first Brake fluid absorbs moisture Over time it therefore absorbs moisture from the environment Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake system The water content lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid The brake fluid must comply with the following standards or specifications gt VW 50114 gt FMVSS 116 DOT4 CQ Introduction Thi
422. ving gt The temporary spare wheel is inflated to the maximum inflation pressure for the vehicle Fig 171 on page 198 gt The tyre inflation pressure of the spare wheel R 18 is 420 kPa gt Only use this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage since it is not intended for permanent use HE WARNING a Never drive with more than one temporary spare wheel mounted Only use the temporary spare wheel when absolutely necessary Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged f the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wheel differ from the fitted tyres never drive faster than 80 km h or 50 mph a Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering a The snow chains cannot be used on the temporary spare wheel Observe the instructions on the warning sticker on the temporary spare wheel Full wheel trim A Read and observe H and on page 197 first Before removing the wheel bolts remove the wheel cover Pulling off gt Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit page 205 into the reinforced edge of the wheel trim gt Push the wheel wrench through the clamp support on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim Fitting gt Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening gt Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks correctly in place CAUTION Only use the manual pressure and do not hit
423. void high speeds full throttle and high engine loads This prevents possible damage to the engine The operating range The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves into the middle of the scale At very high ambient temperatures or un der heavy engine loads the pointer may move even further to the right High temperature range The coolant temperature is too high if the pointer reaches the red area of the scale Further information page 36 EE CAUTION Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant Never cover the radiator there is a risk of the engine overheating Display 10 22 Fig 23 1 Display types Travel time 30 min tp YT ge 18 5 THO Dim 12440 1253 2 B3T 0691 N Read and observe H on page 30 first The following information will be displayed gt Distance travelled page 32 gt Time page 32 gt Details of the information system page 42 gt Details of the service interval display page 48 Instruments and Indicator Lights 31 Display types Fig 23 A Segment display B MAXI DOT display EE CAUTION Pull out the ignition key if coming in contact with the display e g when clean ing to prevent any possible damage On vehicles with the KESSY system switch off the ignition and open the driver s door Fuel gauge Fig 24 Fuel gauge a
424. when the vehicle has come to a complete stop by applying the handbrake Otherwise the steer ing could be blocked risk of accident Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle Unauthor ized persons such as children for example could lock the car turn on the ignition or start the engine there is a danger of injury and accidents Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running there is risk of accident damage or theft Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary risk of acci dent 138 Driving E WARNING Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms The en gine s exhaust gases also contain the odourless and colourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas risk of death Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death Do not leave any items e g cleaning cloths or tools in the engine com partment This presents a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage Never cover the engine with additional insulation material e g with a cover risk of fire EE CAUTION The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the vehicle is at a standstill The starter or engine can be damaged if the starter is activated when the engine is running 3 Fig 134 on page 139 Do not tow start the engine there is a risk of damaging the engine and the catalytic converter The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump Start aid
425. will reach one level higher Main menu items depending on vehicle equipment MFD Multifunction display page 44 Audio Operating instructions for the radio Navigation Operating instructions for the navigation system Phone page 121 Aux heating page 118 Rain closing tivated activated when opening the boot lid Activate or deactivate certain displays of the multifunction display here The following functions can be activated deactivated or adjusted here Activate deactivate the function for automatically closing the window and the tilt slide sunroof in a locked vehicle when it starts raining If the function is activated and it is not raining the windows includ ing the panoramic tilt slide sunroof will close auto matically after approx 12 hours Assist systems page 165 Vehicle status page 33 Settings page 47 ATA confirm Switch on off the audible signal indicating activation of the anti theft alarm system Further informa tion page 55 The Audio and Navigation menu items are only displayed when the factory fit ted radio or navigation system is switched on Central locking Switch on off the central locking and automatic lock ing function also applies to the KESSY system Fur ther information page 54 Individual settings Note f warning messages are displayed these messages must be verified to ac cess the main menu page 42 Using the informatio
426. wing subjects Dialogue 132 Voice commands GSM II 133 Voice commands GSM III 133 Communication and multimedia 131 Dialogue BIT 0173 Fig 130 Multifunction steering wheel The voice control system hereinafter referred to as the system makes it pos sible to use voice commands for some functions of the hands free system The period of time during which the system is ready to receive voice com mands and to carry them out is called a dialogue The system gives audible feedback and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on several factors gt Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses gt Avoid a bad pronunciation gt Close the doors windows and sliding roof to reduce or stop disturbing exte rior noise gt It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds so that the tone of your voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise gt During the dialogue limit additional noise in the vehicle e g passengers talk ing at the same time gt Do not speak if the system makes an announcement The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and di rected to the driver and front passenger Therefore the driver and the front passenger can operate the equipment Entering a phone number The telephone number can be entered as a continuous series of individually spoken digits the
427. witch to position 1 lower intensity and to position 2 higher intensity Switching off gt Switch the rocker switch to the centre position 2 E WARNING If you or a passenger have limited pain and or temperature sensitivity e g caused by medication paralysis or because of chronic illness e g diabetes we recommend that you consult your physician before using the ventilated front seat EE CAUTION Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them The fan is located underneath the front seat cushion Do not place any ob jects in this area it may damage the fan Do not clean the seats using moisture Clean the seat covers page 182 Seat covers Note The ventilation should only be switched on when the engine is running This has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity We do not recommend using the front seat ventilation and heating at the same time Using the ventilation to cool the seat surface considerably reduces the heating capacity at the same time affecting the ability of the control unit to detect the right seat surface temperature Convenience features of passenger seat Fig 74 Operating passenger seat from the rear seat The front passenger seat can also be operated from the rear seat Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt Push the switch A in the direction of one of the arrows 1 Fig 74 Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction
428. with a roof rack cross member without a load will use about 10 more fuel than normal due to the increased aerodynamic drag Regular maintenance AN Read and observe M on page 149 first A poorly tuned engine uses an unnecessarily high amount of fuel By having your vehicle regularly maintained by a specialist garage you create the conditions needed for economical driving The maintenance state of your vehicle has a positive effect on traffic safety and value retention A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 higher than normal Check the oil level at regular intervals e g when filling up Oil consumption is dependent to a considerable extent on the load and speed of the engine Oil consumption could be as high as 0 5 litres 1 000 km depending on your style of driving It is quite normal that a new engine has higher oil consumption at first and reaches its lowest level only after a certain running in time The oil consump tion of a new vehicle can therefore only be correctly assessed after driving about 5 000 km For the sake of the environment a Additional improvements to the fuel economy can be made by using synthet ic low viscosity oils a Regularly check the ground under the vehicle Have your vehicle inspected by a specialist garage if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the ground Note We recommend that your vehicle be serviced on a regular basis by a SKODA service part
429. with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control key The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle The wireless key has a flip out key bit The spare key must by initialised by a specialist garage after repair or replace ment of the receiver unit Only then can the remote control key be used again EE CAUTION a Each key contains electronic components therefore it must be protected against moisture and severe shocks Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean Impurities textile fibres dust etc have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ig nition lock The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti theft alarm system does react to the remote control at less than approx 3 metres away page 215 a When leaving the vehicle always check if it is locked a f the driver s door has been opened the vehicle cannot be locked Note Please contact a specialist garage if you lose a key as they can obtain a new one for you Unlocking and opening 51 Unlocking locking with the remote control key Fig 32 Remote control key N Read and observe H on page 51 first Function and description of the remote control key Fig 32 Unlocking the vehicle G Locking the vehicle lt 3 Unlocking the boot lid A Button for the fold out fold in of the key Warning light Unlocking The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has bee
430. xamples of operational malfunctions Description of the malfunc tion The lid cannot be lifted out of the lock Possible solutions Emergency unlocking of the lid page 217 Removing a possible obstacle e g snow re The lid does not react to an opening the lid page 59 opening signal Press handle A and pull the lid upwards The lid remains in the top position Manual closing of the lid CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening closing the window from the driver seat 62 Opening the windows in the front passenger door and inthe rear doors __ 63 Force limit 63 Window convenience operation 63 Operational faults 64 Unlocking and opening 61 E WARNING a Ensure that no persons are still left in the vehicle when locking the vehi cle In an emergency the windows will no longer be able to be opened from the inside The system is fitted with a force limiter page 63 If there is an obsta cle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully risk of injury Deactivating the electrically operated power windows in the rear doors is recommended safety push button S when children are being transported in the rear seats Fig 44 on page 62 EE CAUTION Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric windows a In the event that th
431. y a specialist garage in order to ensure full functionality of all electrical systems Automatic load deactivation A Read and observe H and on page 194 first The vehicle voltage control unit automatically prevents the battery from dis charging when the battery is put under high levels of strain This may be no ticed from the following gt The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to the electrical system gt Where necessary large convenience consumers such as seat heaters and rear window heaters have their power limited or are shut off completely in the event of an emergency EE CAUTION Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management the vehicle battery may be drained For example when the ignition is switched on a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned on during longer parking a Consumers that are supplied via a 12 V power socket can cause the vehicle battery to discharge when the ignition is switched off EF Note Driving comfort is not impaired by consumers being deactivated The driver is often not aware of it having taken place CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Service life of tyres 198 Unidirectional tyres 199 Spare and temporary spare wheel 200 Full wheel trim 200 Wheel bolts 201 Only use tyres or wheel rims that have been approved by SKODA fo

&Scaron;KODA Superb Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents